portal.tpu.ruportal.tpu.ru/tpu/files/eng-sbornik-2009.pdf · Electrical editions and popular...

Federal Agency of Education Public Educational Institution of High Professional Education

Tomsk Polytechnic University Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

Electric Devices Society (EDS)

Proceedings of the 15th International Scientific and Practical Conference

of Students, Post-graduates and Young Scientists

MODERN TECHNIQUE AND TECHNOLOGIES

MTT’ 2009

May 4 - 8, 2009 TOMSK, RUSSIA

1

UDK 62.001.5 (063) BBK 30.1L.0 S568

Russia, Tomsk, May 4 - 8, 2009

The twelfth International Scientific and Practical Conference of Students, Postgraduates and Young Scientists “Modern Techniques and

Technologies” (MTT’2009), Tomsk, Tomsk Polytechnic University. –

Tomsk: TPU Press, 2009.-226 p.

Copyright and Reprint Permission: Abstracting is permitted with credit to the source. Libraries are permitted to photocopy beyond the limit of U.S. copyright law for private use of patrons those articles in this volume that carry a code at the bottom of the first page, provided the per-copy fee indicated in the code is paid through Copyright Clearance Center, 222

Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923. For other copying, reprint or republication permission, write to IEEE Copyrights Manager, IEEE

Operations Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331. All rights reserved. Copyright ©

2009 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. Editorial board of proceedings of the conference in English: 1. Kairova N.N., leading expert of a department SRWM S&YS SA 2. Sidorova O.V., leading expert of a department SRWM S&YS SA 3. Pashkov V.L., post-graduate of a department computer engineering

UDK 62.001.5 (063) IEEE Catalog Number: 04EX773 ISBN: 0-7803-8226-9 Library of Congress: 2003113476

2

CONFERENCE SCIENTIFIC PROGRAM COMMITTEE

V.A. Vlasov Co-chairman of Scientific Program Committee, ViceRector on Research, Professor, Tomsk, Russia

V.P. Dmitrienko Co-chairman of Scientific Program Committee, Deputy ViceRector on Research, TPU, Tomsk, Russia

L.M. Zolnikova Academic Secretary of the Conference, TPU, Tomsk, Russia

A.A. Sivkov 1th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia V.F. Votyakov 2th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia V.M. Zamyatin 3th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia O.P. Muravliov 4th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia G.S. Evtushenko 5th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.I. Slosman 6th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.M. Malyshenko 7th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.P. Potylitsyn 8th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia V.K. Kuleshov 9th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.S. Zavorin 10th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia M.S. Kukhta 11th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.A.Gromov 12th Section Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia A.A. Stepanov Round table Chairman, TPU, Tomsk, Russia

3

Section I

POWER ENGINEERING

5

Section I: Power engineering

THE ANALYSIS OF THE UNIT FROM THE TUTORIAL BY G.N. KLIMOVA «ENERGY CONSERVATION IN LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS» (TOMSK, 2008) [1]

Bogdanovskaya S. A., Nikitin V. D., Myl’nikova T. S.

Research supervisors: Nikitin V. D., professor,. Myl’nikova T. S., assistant

Tomsk Polytechnic University, Lenin Avenue 30, Tomsk, 634050, Russia

E-mail: Venena@ sibmail.com

The following abbreviations symbols are to

be used Abbreviations: LS light source; LD light device; SCD start-control device; LI lighting installation; LIC the curve of luminous intensity; EP electric power; EEP economy of EP; CE coefficient of efficiency; Lamps: LLL\CLL linear\compact luminescent lamps; IL\DL incandescent\discharge lamps. Symbols : P capacity,W; E illuminance, lx; Еf Е actual value, lx; N number of fixtures; n number of lamps in the device; ηv light return, lm /W; U pressure; Δi i component of EEP; Factors: η the factor of light flux utilization; kz store (k as a variant); z the minimum of illuminance; КCKD=КD CKD power Electrical editions and popular (pseudosci-

entific) literature contain: the design procedures of EEP in illumination (which usually do not change throughout the following editions and differ only in factor notations and explanatory indices); explicit examples of EEP with detailed characteristics (LI objects), numerous digital data, and quite often extensive but useless in-formation. All this is to convince the reader of the importance of the theme (we agree) and of its extreme complexity (in practice it is often just puffed up). Actually the complicated system of notations, multiletter indexing, the developed digital estimations of separate components (cal-culated sometimes by incorrect formulas) make the way to the truth for the reader complicated, since they push to a considerable degree the problem itself into the background. Thus, the reader gets lost in varied and redundant infor-mation.

The approaches to EEP problem in illumi-nation are going to be analyzed on the example of a modern, well made tutorial[1].

The starting items 1,2,3 for calculation of the installed power LI, annual actual EP consump-tion, specific actual EP consumption do not cause any objections. However, the content of the items 4 … 9 where the EEP components are estimated seems to be worse. To make the equation compact, simpler and easy, the EEP

components are numbered; so EPEPE1

1 =Δ

indicates the EEP component. Actually the three EEP components when replaced by LS Δ1, SCD Δ2, LI Δ3, EEP in introducing of automatic control systems (Δ4) and the economy of light energy when cleaning LS and lamps, premise white-washing, washing of windows and (construction) lamps are being considered.

Further on we will analyze the items ([1] pp. 116 - 120).

1. Calculation of the voltage. 1.1 The formula on page 117: • has been used in [2] for the first time

(not accidentally without a conclusion: the au-thors of the instruction believe, that if not to re-veal the essence of the problem the primitive information on the whole can seem more signifi-cant);

• is not absolutely precise as the correct denominator is to consider the character of the deviation of the voltage from the nominal one:

( )n n aU U Uξ −m ve [To be noted: the factually used rule of the

approximated calculations in the equation for Еf makes small error in case if

ХХ αα m1)1( ≈± −

1* 1 <<Δ −UU .] 1.2. The coefficient Θ = Θ (Еf) and Еf=Еf

(Uave), where Uave=0.5 (U1+U2) depends on sin-gle measurements of the voltage. However, be-tween the moments of single measurements (U1 at the beginning and U2 at the end of the re-search) the voltage can change to a large ex-

7

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009

tend. The equation on page 117 is not correct for incandescent lamps since:

, i.e. this equa-tion is to contain the degree of 3.6 [3], but not the coefficient ξ =4. For DL the values ξ are considered to be correct: ξ =2.5 for HQL, ξ =1.5 for LL , ξ =1.1 for SHP, instead of the "general" value of the coefficient of ξ =2.0.

6.36.3 *~ −= nfnff UUФФЕ

1.3 The comments are as follows: • It is absurd to consider «the potential of

the annual EP economy» (p.117) relying on sin-gle measurements of light illuminance;

• The economic effects, if U <Un, cannot be treated as «EEP potential» [4];

• There is «the substitution of the no-tions»: the equation is intended for recalculation of Еf values obtained if U=Un, for Е values if U=Un, and it is not connected with probable EEP in any way.

[Acknowledgement: State Standard 24940-81 «Methods of measurement of light illumi-nance »//Light Engineering. - 1982. - 5, p. 21.]

2. Lamp replacement. 2.1 At the beginning we will consider the

problem when, if LS type and power change, all other parameters remain invariable (or these changes are not considered). The equation on p. 117 is not correct, the correct equation (the di-rect solution) is , where index 1 refers to the former LS, and index 2 refers to the new LS. In this case SCD is considered to be integrated in LS, for example, it is placed in KLL socle and with LS it makes a single device.

111221 )(*1 −−=Δ АА КРКР

(However the trick of a manufacturer is that the power and net light efficiency of a lamp are mentioned in advertising. This makes LS more attractive. In case SCD is separated from LS its influence on EP consumption is to be consid-ered in item 9.

2.2. All the variations occurring when LS is changed are being considered. In this case the direct estimation of EEP is not possible, since the complicated and "delicate" lighting functions such as η and z change, and thus E1EP (propor-tional to the change of LI power) is defined by the equation

1111

2222

2

1

2

11 **1

А

А

V

V

КкzEКкzE

ηη

ηη

−=Δ.

The equation requires some explanation. 1. If IL КА=1. If SCD type is not changed

then КА2=КА1. If both LS are IL or DL then к1=к2. The account of the coefficient of k store is re-quired only if IL is replaced by DL (their k is lar-ger due to their large service life).

2. The η values are to be considered as, if another LS is taken, the position of LS light cen-tre in the light device can be changed. This will cause the deformation of LIC and change η.

3. The calculation of η and z coefficients is very a complicated (of high level) lighting prob-lem (the analytical description of η and z func-tions in its general form is missing). Therefore, the η and z parameters are usually removed from the equation (5.2).

References: 1. Klimova G. N. (2008). Energy Conser-

vation in the Industrial Enterprises. Tutorial. Tomsk Polytechnic University Publishing.

2. Recommendations about Operation of Lighting Installations …(1978) Light Engineering. 2, 14-20. Another edition (no changes made): Light Engineering. 1982. 5, 21.

3. Ivanov A.P. Electric light sources. (1955) M. Gosenergoizdat..

4. Karnauhov A. J, Nikitin V. D. Power Effi-ciency of Light Sources. In collected articles: Theses of the reports on the Science and Re-search Conference. (2007)«Young light engi-neers of Russia» (13th International Specialized Exhibition on Light Engineering …). M, «VIGMA», 17 - 21.

8


RECONFIGURATION OF DISTRIBUTION NETWORK BY GENETIC ALGORITHM

Paar M., Spaček J.

Supervisor: Toman P., Associate Professor

Brno University of Technology, Czech Republic, Brno, Technicka 2848/8

E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

ABSTRACT The paper deals with a method how to recon-

figure the distribution network that leads to mini-mal power losses. The optimization method uses Genetic algorithm to find the solution which does not have only minimal values of power losses but it also has to keep both conditions as voltage drop in the all load buses or overload of lines by cur-rent are not exceeded. The computation was made on the part of real cable distribution net-work.

INTRODUCTION The cheapest solution how to improve the pa-

rameters of power network is reconfiguration of switches. The aim of this paper is to find such a configuration of switches that will lead to minimal cost of power losses in distribution network while respecting given limits. The optimization which is based on reconfiguration carries the problem of network consistency. The ill configuration can lead to disconnection of the several customers or even huge part of network. It means that given limits does not need to be only technical as maximum value of voltage drop level or maximal allowable current of lines but also topological re-striction. These restrictions can direct issue to multi-objection optimization. Multiple optimization criteria can be solved easily by one of stochastic methods e.g. by a form of Genetic Algorithm (GA). The easy extensibility of GA to increase the number of parameters (e.g. output from reliability calculation) was another reason why GA was se-lected. Each combination of the parameter values can be evaluated by so called fitness function expressing its convenience. The optimization task is to find the lowest value of fitness function that contains two parameters – the cost of power losses and a function γ discriminating the unsuit-able solution.

OPTIMIZATION DETAILS The GA implementation is directed by follow-

ing three main branches: calculation of power losses, tools for reconfiguration and genetic algo-rithm.

Power Losses Calculation The evaluation part of the program is based

on the steady state analysis. The analysis uses

linear one-line diagram model of power network. Steady state operation is solved taking into ac-count following simplifying considerations. The parameters of power line or other elements have constant values which are independent of electric current or voltage. Power consumptions are specified using electric currents that are inde-pendent from voltage applied to their terminals. These simplifications have consequence in a way that calculation suffers from the lower accuracy rate comparing to the power-flow methods, such as the Newton-Raphson or Gauss-Seidel meth-ods, but on the other hand this method is faster.

Reconfiguration The power network can be described as un-

directed graph with vertices given by network elements e.g. substations, switching stations, overhead line, overhead cables and switches are presented by graph edges. The network elements can be disconnected and reconnected by switching switchgears in such a way which leads to improved required parameters. These switches form the subnetworks, in the examined network, fed by one substation bounded by opened switches to the borders with others sub-networks.

Usually for these types of problems some of the greedy algorithms, Dijkstra, Prim-Jarnik or Boruvka algorithm, is used. The number of opti-mization limitations makes these algorithms hard or impossible to use for this purpose. Each com-bination of open and closed switches must sat-isfy following conditions:

- Each element of network has to be con-nected

- No element can be fed by more than one substation

- Each subnetwork has to be radial The last condition will be more important in

the future when computation of reliability will be added.

The program contains several tools to cope with it. The conditions are mainly covered by modified DFS (Depth-First Search) and BSF (Breadth-First-Search) algorithms. The modified DSF algorithm divides the meshed network to several the radial subnetworks and also repairs the structure after GA operations.

9

mailto:[email protected]



Genetic Algorithm GA’s are global stochastic optimization

techniques based on Darwin’s evolutionary rules. GA’s are successfully used in problems where local optimization methods usually fail or where their application is impossible. They do not require a specific type of fitness function; it does not even have to be continuous. The only requirement concerning the fitness function is to have finite value for each solution.

Generally principle of GA can be explained as the adaptation of the solution to the input condition. At the beginning, the first population is formed by specific function – the first generation. Better solutions are determined by better fitness function (lower for minimization). The solutions are changed by so called crossover and muta-tion operators. Solutions that are processed by mutation and cross-over operators can proceed to next generation. A small number of the best solutions are directly copied with no respect to the cross-over (so called elitism). This process is repeated until a given number of generations are reached or the fitness function is small enough (for minimization). The calculation uses so called Niche GA [1] without combination of random so-lutions like classical GA but only those solutions that are somehow similar. The new solution is generated by a specific way that enables com-parison with others. The solutions set to the groups that contain only similar solutions. When the cross-over is applied, the solutions for future generations are selected only from same or the closest neighbor group. This process assures that the reconstruction of the generated solu-tions will not be so time consuming because the numbers of changes are limited.

Fitness function and function γ The fitness function evaluates the quality of

solutions and incorporates penalization costs and function γ. The fitness function is defined as:

DOTppnfitness ⋅Δ⋅=

(1)

where np denotes the cost of the losses, Δp is power losses of whole network, TDO is period of full losses, function γ is used to discriminate inappropriate solutions and is given by this for-mula:

( )

( )

1 m1

2 max1

cond

cond

n

ii

m

jj

d u u

d I I

γ=

=

⎛= ⋅ Δ ≥ Δ⎜⎝

⎞+ ⋅ ≥ ⋅Γ⎟

⎠

∑

∑

ax +

(2)

where d1 and d2 are weighting coefficients, Δu is a voltage drop vector in the network, Δumax is maximal permitted voltage drop, Ii represents vector of currents flowing in the network and Imax

is maximal current-carrying capacity, Г is specific penalization. The topological restrictions are se-cured by reconfiguration tools.

TESTED NETWORK AND RESULTS The model was tested on a real MV (middle

voltage) cable network based on a two-stage structure. The chosen part of network circum-scribes between two substations (110/22 kV) that serves over 44 818 customers connected to 288 transformation stations.

Tab. 1. The comparison of outputs

fitness Δp Δp% Generation 103

€.year-1 kW %

1st 22,295 185,75 0,46 400th 16,523 137,69 0,38 Original 40,569 338,07 0,85 1st-400th 5,772 48,06 0,08 Orig.- 400th 24,046 200,38 0,47

The meshed network included also more

than 300 cables set among distribution feeders and switching substations and distribution trans-formers 22/0.4 kV and 628 switchgears, telecon-troled switchgears and circuit breakers.

During simulation, 8002 solutions were tested in 400 generations. The comparison among the best solutions of the first (1st) and the last (400th) generation and original set of switches can be seen in Tab. 1. To illustrate the course of the al-gorithm, the fitness function of the best solutions over generations, is shown in Fig. 1. In this case, the fitness function directly corresponds to costs of power losses because function γ was not util-ized for reason of the overdesigned network pa-rameters. The according with the results that power losses in the overdesigned network does not represent a considerable problem. On the other hand the algorithm was able to find better configuration than the original which had very low power losses.

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 4001.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

2

2.1

2.2

2.3x 104

Generation

Fitn

ess

Func

tion

[EU

RO

/yea

r]

Fig. 1. Duration of fitness function during genera-tions

10


CONCLUSION GA is a stochastic optimization method based

on evolutionary rules and is used to find the minimum costs due the power losses of network reconfiguration while respecting given limitations. The advantage of the algorithm is that using modified Depth-first search algorithm for securing consistency of the network topology on reconfigu-rations. Its practical applicability was demon-strated on an example of the cable distribution

network. Some possible applications of the de-scribed method could be in the distribution net-works to limit the power losses due to improper network configuration.

Acknowledgement: The paper includes the solution results of

the Ministry of Education, Youth and Sport re-search project No. MSM 0021630516.

FLICKERMETER IMPLEMENTATION IN LABVIEW J. Slezingr, J. Drapela, Member, IEEE and J. Tezky


E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract--This paper deals with the de-scription of flickering light sources and flicker measurements. It describes the stan-dard flicker meter and its implementation in Lab View. It shows some of the disadvan-tages and drawbacks of the standard flicker-meter.

Number of rectangular changes per minut R (1/min)

Rel

ativ

e vo

ltage

cha

nge

U/U

(%)

Modulation frequency f (Hz)

Index Terms — Voltage modulation, In-

terharmonics, Flickermeter, LabView. Introduction The fast voltage fluctuations can cause flick-

ering of light sources. Voltage fluctuation can be seen as its amplitude or/and phase modulation, but also can be caused by the presence of inter-harmonics which are produced by some modern appliance or serve as ripple control signals.

M

Fig.2 Curve of equal severity (Pst = 1) for rec-tangular voltage changes on LV power supply systems [4].

However, standard flicker meter is unable to record voltage fluctuations caused by the inter-harmonics at frequencies over 100 Hz. It has led to research of the standard UIE/IEC flickermeter behavior at a model realized in LabView utilized for simulation of the standard flicker-meter re-sponse to integer and non-integer harmonic components in supply voltage up to 3 kHz.

B.Flicker origin Ideal voltage fluctuations can be described

as amplitude modulation. The simplest case is the sinusoidal voltage fluctuations, described by the equation in the standard form.

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡+⎟

⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛ Δ+⋅⋅= )2sin(

211)2sin()( 1 ϕππ tf

UUtfUtu M (3)

Where

UUΔ is the depth of modulation, fM

frequency of modulation, is initial modulation phase

Flicker Definition of flicker Flicker is defined as the discomfort impres-

sion experienced by the human vision resulting from the variations of the luminous flux gener-ated by electric lamps which are fed by a fluctu-ating voltage.

Fluctuations in voltage can be caused by summation of harmonic voltage components with the interharmonic and subharmonic components with frequencies:

11



MIH fff ±= 1 (2)

As it is explained in [1], the similar sine volt-age fluctuations can be obtained even if a fre-quency component (subharmonic or interhar-monic) is superimposed on the fundamental voltage as follows:

)2sin(21)2sin()( 1 IHIHtf

UUtftu ϕππ +⎟⎠⎞

⎜⎝⎛ Δ+=

(3)

Interharmonic components with high fre-quency (above 100 Hz) are also able to cause voltage fluctuation and the light flicker can occur consequently [1]. This applies to all types of light sources, except light bulbs. It would be ap-propriate for the flicker-meter to be able ade-quately reflect the effect of interharmonics with a frequency greater than 100 Hz.

These interharmonics and harmonics are generated by appliances such as power con-verters, arc furnaces, etc., or directly injected into the supply network as electronic ripple con-trol signal.

UIE/IEC Flickermeter The flicker meter design is based on studies

of human brain responses to flickering light. The flicker-meter function and design specification are described by the international standard EN 61000-4-15 [5]. The scope of the flicker meter is based on two main approaches: the simulation of the chain lamp-eye-brain and real time statis-tic analysis of the flicker signal.

UIE/IEC Flickermeter in LabView A flicker-meter meeting standards is an ana-

logue measuring device. Digital measuring in-struments used a modified version of the stan-dard flicker meter. S-transfer functions of analog filters are transferred using the bilinear Z-transformation to digital form.

u2(t)

Block 2

Demodulator0 100Hz

dB

u(t)

Pass band filter0 40Hz

1

Weighting filter

ΔUU

Switchselector

Block 3

u2(t)

Quadraticmultiplier

0 Hz

dB

First order LP filter

Block 4 Block 5

Statisticalevaluation

Pst

Pf

0 Px

X%

Block 1

Signalcondi-tioning

Fig.2 Functional block diagram of IEC Flicker-meter

UIE / IEC flicker-meter model was imple-

mented in Lab VIEW using architecture accord-ing to the Fig. 2.

Input signal for flickermeter is obtained either

from the measurement system NI-cDAQ, or from internal voltage simulator, which simulates the fluctuations in voltage amplitude. Internal simula-tor is used for the purposes of calibration, verifi-cation and testing of the device. Simulated volt-age fluctuation can be of rectangular or sinusoi-dal shape with any frequency and depth of modulation.

Signal conditioning block includes signal normalization on measured smoothed RMS value of input voltage.

Flicker-meter filters of the blocks 3 and 4 are designed as a cascade of digital filters using pre-defined IIR filter type. Then the transfer functions of filters are defined by means of the forward and reverse coefficients. Each filter is repre-sented by a separate SubVI.

This model does not contain statistical analysis, thus only provides information about the instantaneous flicker level (Pf) as flicker-meter response to voltage fluctuations with the frequency and depth modulation.

Validation The validation process is provided by the

standard EN 61000-4-15 [5] where the Pf value must meet for specified testing points the stan-dard requirements with accuracy +-5%.

Tests were carried out for both sinusoidal and rectangular voltage modulation. Results of both tests comply with standard (Fig. 4).

Flickermeter response to interharmonic components in supply voltage

Response of the UIE / IEC flicker-meter model to interharmonic component in the supply voltage with the relative size of 1% is shown on Fig. 5.

Dependence of the instantaneous flicker perception level for interharmonic frequency components in the frequency band of 0-100Hz corresponds to the flickermeter weighting filter. Modulation frequency is reflected in the inter-harmonic frequency according to the equation (2). For frequency components above 100 Hz, the expected size of the response is negligible. Bandwidth of the standard flickermeter is the result of the quadratic function of the block 2 and of the band-pass filter of the block 2.

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

1.10

0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0Modulation frequency fM (Hz)

Pf (

-)

Rectangular modulationSinusoidal modulation

Fig. 4 Compliance test results

12


References:

0.0001

0.001

0.01

0.1

1

10

100

0 50 100 150 200Interharmonic frequency fIH (Hz)

Pf (

-)

1 DRÁPELA, J. A Time Domain Based Flickermeter with Response to High Frequency Interharmonics. In Proceedings of 13th Interna-tional Conference on Harmonics and Quality of Power. 1. University of Wollongong: IEEE PES, 2008. s. 1-7. ISBN: 978-1-4244-1770-4

2 Zbigniew Hanzelka; Andrzej Bień; Guide to Quality of Electrical Supply for Industrial In-stallations, Part 5, Flicker and Voltage Fluctuati-ons, ‘Power Quality’ Working Group WG2, 2000.

Fig. 5 Flicker-meter response to interharmonic components with relative magnitude of 1%Un superimposed on fundamental voltage waveform 3 DRÁPELA, J., MASTNÝ, P.,

PROCHÁZKA, Z. Light flicker caused by inter-harmonics and interharmonic-flicker curves of lamps. WSEAS Transactions on Power Sys-tems, ISSN 1790-5060, 2006, Voll. 1, No. 2, s. 554 - 561.

Conclusion The flicker-meter model has been developed

in Lab VIEW. The flicker-meter response was tested in range of interharmonic frequencies up to 200 Hz. It is clear that the standard flicker-meter response for interharmonic frequencies over 100 Hz is in conflict with fluorescent lamps light flicker observation. The aim of the future work is to modify the flickermeter design to ob-tain appropriate response to these high fre-quency interharmonics.

4 EN 61000-2-2 2nd ed.:2002. Electro-magnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 2-2: Envi-ronment – Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalizing in public low-voltage power supply systems.

5 EN 61000-4-15:2003. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measu-rement techniques. Section 15: Flickermeter. Functional and design specifications.

This paper contains the results of research

works funded by grant no. GP102/08/P582 of the Czech Science Foundation.

ANALYSIS OF PENALIZATION COSTS IN DISTRIBUTION NETWORK J. Slezingr, J. Drapela, Member, IEEE and J. Tezky



Abstract--This paper deals with problems

connected with reliability of electrical energy distribution. Problems involves penalization system of power supply interruption in Czech Republic according to Public Notices to Act No. 540/2005 Coll. Following text is focused on most frequent failures which results in electrical power outage. Causes of power fail-ure are sorted by frequency of longest power outages.

I. Introduction The article is based on Public Notices to Act

No. 540/2005 Coll. that sets values of financial compensation for customers and specifies the conditions of the compensation application. Ac-

cording to the standards, one type of the penalty is set to large customers and the other value penalization is applied to small customers for power supply interruption. Dividing between large and small customers depends on voltage level where they are connected to distribution network. Small customers are connected to LV network and large customers use electrical power directly from MV or HV level. In the Czech Republic, the dividing of voltage level has follow-ing distribution (line-to-line values): LV up to 1 kV, MV from 1 kV to 52 kV and HV from 52 kV to 300 kV. Distribution network operator gives the finance compensation to customers if period of the restoration of electrical energy after failure exceed the time. Specify by standard compensa-

13


http://eru.cz/dias-browse_articles.php?parentId=206&deep=off&type=





tion is determined by 10 % of yearly payment for distribution which is set by actual tariff, reserva-tion of capacity and amount of electrical energy supplied in last account year. The value of com-pensation is restricted by following maximal val-ues: 5 000 CZK for LV, 10 000 CZK for MV and 100 000 CZK for HV. For simulation in this article rate fixed values are given. The voltage level also has influence to maximal permitted length of power supply interruption which is penalized. Maximal duration of one interruption for LV level has the value to 18 hours with cost 1000 CZK and for MV level the standard is set at 12 hours above with penalization 5000 CZK.

II. Analysis penalizations costs for

system of standards applied in Czech Repub-lic

Analysis is intended for distribution network, what consist of 368 feeders. The monitoring measuring of failures, continuously for 12 years, was provided for each feeder. For the course of the cost analysis there were selected failures which were not fulfilled Czech Republic stan-dard. Request amounts at each penalized sup-ply point are deduced from Public Notices to Act No. 540/2005 Coll. for every connected large customer and also for every small consumer.

Figure 1 shows only feeders with require-ment on penalization (100 feeders). Feeders are arranged from the feeders with highest penaliza-tions costs to the feeders with lowest penaliza-tions costs. These feeders are drawn at the hori-zontal axis and recalculated to percentage trans-form. From percentage expression we could find out retrospectively which feeder was at definite position. Value of average costs per year for pe-nalizations and feeder are represented at the primary vertical axis. These values are deter-mined by abbreviation Cppr-CZ where Cppr repre-sents total average penalizations per year and CZ express, that these calculations are based on standard used in Czech Republic. Total count of measured years in this distribution network was 12 years. Cumulate year costs of penalization of feeder are drawn at the secondary axis. This is represented by percentage values. Abbreviation Cpkr-CZ represents total penalizations cumulated in one year and CZ represents that these dimen-sions are calculated for standard used in Czech Republic.

[ ]%10011 C

CC

s

r

rr

rΡΡ

=ΡΡ

ΡΚ

∑=

(4)

∑ ΡΡΡΡ=

rrrs CC

(2) Where:

Cpps is sum of total average penalizations per one year

Cprk1 is total penalizations cumulated per one year

Fig.3 Penalizations costs at every penalized feeder according to Czech Republic standards

At Figure 1, the distribution of the penalized

feeders can be seen. From the value approximately 41% at horizontal axis, the values of penalization costs are insignificant in compari-son with the worst feeders therefore penalization by biggest sums are almost zero. One of the feeders has, abnormally high value of penaliza-tion, in the comparison with another one. This feeder reach penalization costs more than 4 mil-lion CZK.

III. ANALYSIS OF FAILURE CAUSES AT WORST

FEEDERS FOR STANDARDS APPLIED IN CZECH REPUBLIC

This chapter describes the analysis of failure causes of the biggest penalization costs arise in the feeders. The twenty feeders where the high-est penalization costs in last twelve years were recorded. They have been chosen and sorted in Table 1. Failure causes at each feeder are re-corded at this table. Table shows how many times the specific cause of failure came on given feeder. Number in the „number of failures col-umn“ represents how many failures in a given feeder came in 12 years monitoring period. In the last column, how many percents of failures have been caused by meteorological influences, is shown. These failures assign to meteorologi-cal influences: storm, atmospheric impact; ice formation; fall of the branch (tree), wind; rain, snow.

14



http://slovnik.seznam.cz/?q=approximately&lang=en_cz


Fig.4 Cause of faults at biggest penalization feeders

Those 20 worst feeders cause whole 80.72 % from total costs sum of penalization feeders in this network of 235 million CZK. This is approxi-mately 189 million CZK.

Table 1 Cause of failures at biggest penalized feeders

IV.CONCLUSION From initiated values is obvious, how many

penalization costs cause the meteorological in-fluences, which causes 87.8% of penalizations costs from amount of 189 million CZK. This cost shows how many financial resources could be saved if the prevention of this causes was man-aged.

Feeders are arranged according to penaliza-

tion costs. Table 1 shows which the failure causes appeared frequently at the most penal-ized feeders. Frequent failure causes are fall of the branch or tree on the electric line. Percent-age expressions of failure causes produced by atmospheric influences from all failure causes appeared on each feeder are shown at last tab column. In the last line, the sum of these failure causes can be seen. Average value of all failure causes produced by atmospheric influences is shown at the last box at extreme right bottom column. The value of 87.80% is influenced by undetermined failure cause. It was not able to be found out if these failures have been caused by atmospheric influences or by others causations. For uninfluenced of finite number of unknown failure cause there are half of these causes as-sign for meteorological influences and the sec-ond half are not.

This opens the question of releasing other investments to restriction failure causes that was analyzed in the article. That would be the theme for another study how efficient investment could be reached by restriction of these failures causes.

Acknowledgement: The paper includes the solution results of the

Ministry of Education, Youth and Sport research project No MSM 0021630516.

References: 1. Těžký, J.: Evaluation of penalization

costs charged in a specific power distribution network. Master‘s Thesis, Brno 2008. Figure 2 depicts values from Table 1 in the

columnar graph. In graph, the twenty causes of the highest penalization costs are arranged by serial number. To causes are line three groups up. Failures that are caused by meteorological influences are drawn by red color. Failures, with unknown causes are drawn by green color. Fail-ures, which are not caused by meteorological influences, are drawn by blue color.

2. ERO Implementary Public Notices to Act No. 540/2005 Coll.

15

http://www.eru.cz/dias-browse_articles.php?parentId=206&deep=off&type=

http://www.eru.cz/dias-browse_articles.php?parentId=206&deep=off&type=


EVALUATION OF THE RELIABILITY OF THE 22 KV OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION NETWORK AT THE URBAN AREA IN THE CZECH REPUBLIC

Paar M., Špaček J.,

Supervisor: Blažek V., Associate Professor

Brno University of Technology, Department of Electrical Power Engineering,

FEEC, Technicka 2848/8, 616 00 Brno, Czech Republic

E-mails: [email protected], [email protected]

Abstract The paper focuses on the assessment of the

reliability of 22 kV overhead distribution networks. One possibility to express the reliability of the power networks is financial approach. The main part of the paper deals with the assessment of the reliability by using the guaranteed standards of electricity supply continuity, where estimated penalty payment costs are paid by the distribution company to individual consumers. This approach is compared with the presently used assessment of reliability by expected costs of energy not sup-plied.

INTRODUCTION Nowadays, the monitoring of overall aggre-

gated reliability indices is only required by the Energy Regulatory Office in the Czech Republic. If the distribution companies want to express the reliability of power supply, they use only the en-ergy not supplied. Guaranteed standards of the quality of power supply and of related services include e. g. a standard of supply restoration after failure, a standard of not-breaching the planned duration of electricity supply limitation and a standard of replacing the damaged fuse have been introduced since the year 2006. The implementation of guaranteed standards of the electricity supply continuity with limits of the an-nual number of supply interruptions and of their total annual duration is foreseen in the Czech Republic in the future. Therefore we made this analysis, to explore the consequences of this decision.

For that purpose we have available a data from a ten-year period for a large 22 kV over-head urban distribution network which consists of 326 feeder lines supplying 513 858 individual consumers (supply points) with electricity. The network is divided into three supply areas.

GUARANTEED STANDARDS OF

ELECTRICITY SUPPLY CONTINUITY Basically, we can divide guaranteed stan-

dards into two main types – simple and com-bined. In case of a simple guaranteed standard only one limit is observed. It may be e.g. the limit of the annual number of supply interruptions (Ln)

or the limit of their total annual duration (Lt). The guaranteed standard is breached when a given limit is exceeded. In case of the combined guar-anteed standard, there are both limits (Ln and Lt) observed and standard is breached when one of these standards is exceeded. In this case the distribution company has to pay a penalty amounting to cp to each affected consumer down to the LV level. Penalty payment costs for each feeder may then be determined for the chosen combination of limits. For the purpose of our study there will be used only simple guaranteed standards and the value for breaching the stan-dard cp = 37,74 € was chosen.

Penalty payment costs for simple guaran-teed standard can be calculated: ( )xLqcvxvopcqpvC ≥⋅⋅= ,cond, (1)

where ov represents the number of consum-ers connected to vth feeder, xcv,q is the current value of vth feeder and qth year (the annual num-ber of supply interruptions ncv,q or the total an-nual duration of supply interruptions tscv,q for vth

feeder and qth year) and Lx is the limit of current value xcv,q (limit Ln or Lt). The cond( ) expression can take the value of 1 or 0. If the condition is met cond( ) = 1, if not cond( ) = 0.

Total penalty payment costs for qth year can be calculated as a summation:

∑=

=V

vqpvqp CC

1,, (2)

where V represents the total number of feeders in the network.

Finally we can express our required value – Cpp – the total average annual penalty payment costs:

q

CC

q

vqp

pp

∑== 1

,

[€.year-1] (3)

where q represents the number of years. Because the limits have not been introduced in the Czech Republic yet for our purpose we used a wider spectrum of values: Ln = (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10) year-1; Lt = (60, 120, 180, 240, 300, 360, 420, 480, 540, 600, 720) min. year-1.

16




SIMPLE GUARANTEED STANDARDS OF ELECTRICITY SUPPLY CONTINUITY

The total average annual penalty payment costs (Cpp) in our power network for different limits Ln or Lt for simple guaranteed standard are shown in Fig. 1. and Fig. 2. These two figures serve for comparing the reliability of our network areas. On the Fig. 1, the estimation costs range from 0,75 to 3,32 mil. € per year depending on the strictness of the Ln limit. The worst reliability using this approach covers the Area 2 and the best the Area 1. The total average annual pen-alty payment costs for the whole network range from 2,60 to 9,32 mil. € per year for this reliability approach.

On the Fig. 2, the estimation penalty pay-ment costs move within the range (1,32 ÷ 4,57) mil. €.year-1 depending on the strictness of the Lt limit. In this case the Area 1 features the worst reliability and the best reliability is encountered in the Area 2 for limit interval from 60 to 240 min.year-1 and Area 3 for interval from 300 to 720 min.year-1. The Cpp for the whole network (all areas) range from 4,57 to 13,51 mil. € per year.

0,50

1,00

1,50

2,00

2,50

3,00

3,50

4 5 6 7 8 9 10L n [year-1]

Cpp

[106 €

.yea

r-1]

Area 1

Area 2

Area 3

Fig. 1 The total average annual penalty payment costs in the network for different limits Ln

1,00

1,50

2,00

2,50

3,00

3,50

4,00

4,50

5,00

60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600 660 720L t [min.year-1]

Cpp

[106 €

.yea

r-1]

Area 1

Area 2

Area 3

Fig. 2 The total average annual penalty payment costs in the network for different limits L

EXPECTED COSTS OF ENERGY NOT

SUPPLIED Another financial approach for reliability

analysis is using the energy not supplied (ENS).

Except of usual reliability indices, we must know for the calculation the electric output power in the exact area of distribution network. Formula for expected ENS:

8760... MAXMAX

ENSPT

Wτλ

= [kWh.year-1] (4)

λ represents supply interruption intensity [year-1], τ is annual mean time duration of annual supply interruption [h-1], TMAX represents maxi-mal electric output power utilization time [h.year-

1] – in our case is TMAX = 2500 h.year-1 – and PMAX is annual maximal electric output power [kW].

Annual mean costs of ENS on feeder CENS can be calculated – formula (5) – as a product of ENS (WENS) – formula (4) – and price for one kWh (ckWh) – in our case, the value of ckWh = 3,77 €/kWh was chosen.

ENSkWhENS WcC ⋅= [€.year-1] (5)

The total average annual costs of ENS are shown in Tab. 1. The shortcut MC represents major consumers and RC represents residential consumers. Tab. 2 The total average annual costs of ENS

CENS (MC+ RC) CENS (MC) CENS (RC)

Area [106 €.year-1]

[106 €.year-1]

[106 €.year-1]

Whole network 7,14 5,73 1,41

Area 1 2,72 2,23 0,49 Area 2 1,96 1,60 0,36 Area 3 2,46 1,90 0,56

As can be seen in Tab. 1 the smallest total annual average costs of ENS are in the Area 2, it means that Area 2 has the best reliability in comparison with other areas. Otherwise, the worst reliability has the Area 1. The similar situa-tion is for major consumers (in the middle). In case of residential consumers, Area 3 features the worst reliability and the best reliability is en-countered in the Area 2. It means that the reli-ability depends mainly on the MC /RC represent only twenty percent of the total CENS (MC+ RC)/.

If we compare both reliability methods with Cpp and CENS, they give us different results /there is only small area when these two approaches give us similar results of Area reliability – for Cpp Lt = (60 ÷ 180) min.year-1 and CENS.(MC+RC)/.

CONCLUSION Up to now the distribution companies use

only ENS for the reliability of power supply pur-poses. Generally, the guaranteed standards of electricity supply continuity and the penalty pay-ments could serve as a useful tool for the evaluation of reliability of a distribution network.

17


E.g. simple guaranteed standards can be used for the comparison of the reliability, even if exact limit values are not determined. Expected costs of ENS give us another possibility to financial expression of reliability of distribution network, but these costs mainly depend on major con-sumers. Therefore financial expression by Cpp is probably better than using CENS, because it puts the bigger accent on residential consumers too. Both methods – with Cpp or CENS give us different ways for reliability estimation of distribution net-work.

In general, the implementation of guaranteed standards into the practice may represent a sig-nificant financial risk for the Czech distribution companies, because it may represents millions of Euros per year, depending on how strict will be the limits.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The paper includes the solution results of the

Min-istry of Education, Youth and Sport research project No. MSM 0021630516.

THE GROUND FAULT INDICATORS FOR FAULT LOCATION ACCORDING TO THE ANALYSIS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS OF MV LINES David Topolánek1), Jaroslav Bok2), Petr Toman3)

Brno University of Technology, Czech Republic, Brno, Technicka 2848/8 1) tel: +420 54114 9218, email: [email protected], 2) tel: +420 54114 9280, email: [email protected]

3) tel : +420 54114 9224, email: [email protected]

Abstract The paper is focused on the ground fault indi-

cators using electromagnetic field evaluation for the ground fault location in the compensated MV network. The transient phenomena evoked by the ground fault ignition and methods for determina-tion of a fault location are described here. A stored data recorded by the indicator scanning the electromagnetic field of the line during the ground fault can be used for the indicator parame-terization for this purpose.

1. Introduction The operation of the network with a ground

fault belongs to operations with an increased risk of the origination of heavy failures which would result in the interruption of electricity supply to customers. This also explains a great interest in performing theoretical analyses and in developing methods for assessing the place of the ground fault which could be as accurate as possible. Al-though many methods of the ground fault location are available, there exists no universal method which could be applied in all types of non-solidly grounded networks and to all types of ground faults. However, even appropriately chosen methods do not guarantee a sufficiently accurate location, mainly in the case of high-impedance and/or arcing ground faults. Great stress is there-fore laid on a high reliability of indicating or meas-

uring instruments. A good sensitivity can be achieved by installing indicating equipment as closely to the place of the failure as possible. This is also a reason for the expansion of indicators operating on principle of the measurement and analysis of electromagnetic fields.

2 Transient process during earth fault Behaviour of all faulty systems (voltage and

current conditions) during earth fault can be ex-plained by three processes, two transient phe-nomena and steady-state of the earth fault [1]. All three processes start at the same time, but their duration is different. The next chapters de-scribe only the first two transient processes with reference to the dynamical methods, which are explained bellow.

2.1 Discharge of the Faulty Line Over the

Earth We can distinguish two extremes in the

process. The first extreme is that ground fault start at minimum of the faulty line to neutral volt-age, in this case is an affected phase charge near zero. The second extreme is that a phase to ground voltage of the faulty line is near the maximum when ground fault starts and charge of the faulty phase gets near maximum (a discharge current oriented from faulty phase

18





to earth is maximum). The discharge current expands into the network and close in a faulty circuit through a capacitance of faulty phase to ground (Figure 1).

Fig. 5: Charging and discharging process gener-ated by a ground fault.

2.2 Charge of the Healthy Line Over the

Earth The voltage unbalance is a result of the dis-

charge process (distortion of a symmetrical volt-age triangle). The line to neutral voltage of the

affected phase falls down up to zero value and the line to neutral voltages of the healthy phases grow to a line to line voltage value as is shown on the figure 2.

Fig. 6: Change of the voltages during the charg-ing process

Because feeding transformer keeps symmet-

rical voltage, the healthy phases are charged by charging current till the voltages achieve a line to line value (Figure 2). A charge current value de-

pends on a whole healthy line to ground capacity (total healthy line length), furthermore on an im-pedance of a fault circuit (sum of line and fault impedance), voltage values and charge of a healthy line at the moment of ground fault ignition.

3 Passive methods for a fault location Passive methods are based on measured pa-

rameters of voltages and currents after the origi-nation of a ground fault. These parameters can be evaluated during the transient process called forth by the ground fault or after its stabilization (coming into steady state). For that reason, the passive methods may be divided into methods using the steady state signal (statical methods) and into those using the signal during the tran-sient process (dynamical methods) [2].

3.1 Statical Methods • Method of the fifth harmonic • Admittance principle of the zero-

sequence component

3.2 Dynamical Method The paper is mainly focused on usage these

dynamical methods of indicating the grand fault. • First half-period method When a ground fault originates, a short inten-

sive transient process is generated due to the influence of capacities of individual feeders. The capacity of the faulty phase will be discharged and the phases not affected by the failure will be charged during this process. This short discharg-ing current is recognizable in the first half-period after the origination of the ground fault. The method then compares the phases of the zero-sequence component of the current and of the zero-sequence component of the voltage.

• Connection of the resistor A resistor through which the neutral point is

connected to ground for a short time is used for assessing the faulty feeder. After the origination of a ground fault, the resistor shall be connected, after a short delay, for the period of about 1 s and the changes of currents and voltages will be evaluated.

4 The Recorded Data Usage For Parame-

terization of Indicators The ground fault indicator is device for identi-

fication of ground faults according to the analysis of electromagnetic fields of MV lines. Each indica-tor saves the records about the originated ground fault into internal memory. The operator reads out the data from this memory in certain intervals of time or the stored data can be instantaneously transmitted to the operator at the dispatch centre who can analyse them. All data, after having been read out, are processed and they may be used for

Fig. 7: The voltages and currents behaviour at the ground fault – affected line

19


the prediction of electrically weak places in the MV system. The operator may then be sent there for performing visual inspection. An indicator has to be set up in relation to requirement and opera-tion parameters of the monitored network for its correct function. It means that there have to be chosen useful localization methods, sequence of the methods during evaluation and defined limit value for each useful method. The parameteriza-tion is difficult and circuitous in practice, because this setting has to be verified by a actual fault in the protected network. Because a ground fault is not frequent phenomenon it is better when the chosen parameterization is applied to a data of a fault in the network recorded by the indicator. A designed algorithm can be used to this purpose. The algorithm, which imitates the ground fault indicator, uses for assessment a stored data re-corded by the indicator scanning the electromag-netic field of the line during the ground fault.

5 Conclusion There exists no universal method which

would be applicable to all types of networks and ground faults and which would be able to localize the ground fault in these networks safely. For that reason, the most appropriate solution consists in combining more methods so as to restrain their deficiencies, respecting at the same time the fre-quency of origination and the importance of vari-ous types of ground faults. Thanks to the combi-nation of methods presented in this paper and to

a convenient topological dislocation of indicators, a very accurate localization of the ground fault can be achieved. Whole accuracy of the ground fault location is also influenced by good choice of ground fault location method, its sequence for evaluation of fault location and correct parame-terization of ground fault indicators. Because veri-fying of correct parameterization and indicator function is not easy and circuitously workable in the ordinary working network. Therefore is neces-sary fast check on the correct indicator parame-terization and its function by an algorithm which imitate the ground fault indicator. This verified set-up is transferred to the indicator unit.



References: 1. Druml G., Kugi A., Seifert O., 2003, “A

New Directional Transient Relay for High Ohmic Earth Faults“, CIRED 17th International Conference on Electricity Distribution, Barcelona, Session 3.

2. Xinhui Z., Bingyin X., Zhencun P., Peiyu W., 2008, “Study on Single-phase Earthed Faulty Feeder Selection Methods in Non-Solidly Grounded Systems“, IEEE Xplore, Nanjing China, 1836-1840.

ANALYSIS OF SUITABLE USING OF LIGHT SOURCES AT CONCRETE SUPPLY NETWORK WITH REGARD TO RECORDED VOLTAGE EVENTS

David Topolánek1), Jaromír Bok2), Jiří Drápela3)

Brno University of Technology, Czech Republic, Brno, Technicka 2848/8 1) tel: +420 54114 9280, email: [email protected]

2) tel: +420 54114 9280, email: [email protected], 3) tel: +420 54114 9234, email: [email protected]

Abstract This paper deals with voltage dips and short

interruptions in public supply networks. First part is focused on a description of voltage dips meas-urement and evaluation, there are results of dip measurement in one year period at chosen real-world public supply network. In the second part of the paper there are the results of chosen light

sources in term of their immunity to voltage dips and short interruptions. Suitability of chosen light sources using in the measured supply network is also analysed.

1. Introduction The testing of light sources immunity against

voltage dips and short interruption and the testing levels are given by standard EN 61547 [5]. The

20





testing voltage behavior is based on nominal volt-age of concrete lamp. Pre-dip and post-dip volt-age magnitude is equal to nominal voltage. The result of testing is determination of the electric appliance function condition during and after ap-proved test.

2. Measuring of Voltage Dips in real-world supply network

Voltage events in real-world supply networks are registered by special measuring analysers, which are mainly locates in important substations, shunt transformers in rural networks etc. Analys-ers generally monitor and record voltage events without person control for a long period of time, such us with a year period of data downloading. In accordance with [4], voltage dips are classified by two fundamental parameters – residual voltage during voltage dip and dip time duration.

Table 2: Number of voltage dips and interruptions in the first phase of measured three phase supply network Residual voltage

Time duration

90% > U ≥ 85%

85% > U ≥ 70%

70% > U ≥ 40%

40%> U ≥ 5%

5% > U ≥ 0%

10ms ≤ t < 100ms 13 10 3 1 0

100ms ≤ t < 200ms 28 24 11 42 19

200ms ≤ t < 500ms 1 1 4 11 4

500ms ≤ t < 1s 4 2 4 0 0

1s ≤ t < 3s 7 1 1 0 34 3s ≤ t < 20s 0 0 0 0 6 20s ≤ t < 60s 0 0 0 0 5

60s ≤ t < 180s 0 0 0 0 8

180s ≤ t 0 0 0 0 21 Total number of registered voltage dips and

short interruptions shown in Table 1 is 265. As can be seen the most frequent voltage dips in tested network were dips with dip duration at in-tervals from 100ms until 200ms. In this interval the most frequent dips were dips with residual voltage at intervals from 40% until 5% of nominal voltage (42 times). The most frequent voltage interruptions had dip duration at intervals from 1s until 3s (34 times). All recorded voltage dips and short interruptions are also shown on Fig. 1.

0

10

20

30

4050

60

70

80

90

100

1 10 100 1 000 10 000 100 000 1 000 000 10 000 000 100 000000Time duration Δt (ms)

Vol

tage

U/U

n (%

)

Fig. 8. Overview of recorded voltage dips and short interruptions in measured supply network

3. Light sources immunity to voltage dips and short interruptions

All electric appliances immunity to voltage dips and short interruptions is expressed by im-munity curves, which define the area in which the appliance is able to work without function modifi-cation. Immunity curve testing is not a simply process. Before start of testing process it is nec-essary to choose the function criteria, which will be monitored during the measurement. For lamps a signal corresponding to the luminous flux is the basic monitored value. Detailed determination of function criteria is described in [1]. The testing process starts by setting of nominal voltage pa-rameters and in step by step is described in [3]. For purpose of this paper the testing process con-tains only immunity curves test with nominal volt-age and dip parameters (nominal pre-dip and post-dip voltage, sin wave without harmonics, rectangular dip-shape), it was not necessary to test immunity curves with all voltage dip parame-ters modifications. Overview of tested light sources shows Table 2.

21


Table 3: Overview of tested light sources.

Sign Type of the light source; type of the used ballast

Lamp 1 Incandescent lamp TUNGSRAM 60W

Lamp 2 Compact fluorescent lamp PHILIPS SL 13W, built-in induction ballast

Lamp 3 Compact fluorescent lamp OSRAM EL 23W/830; built-in electronic bal-last

Lamp 4 Linear fluorescent lamp PHILIPS TL-D 18W; induction ballast LAYRTON ARC 20W

Lamp 5 Linear fluorescent lamp PHILIPS TL-D 18W; induction ballast LAYRTON ARC 20W; PFC capacitor 4,7F

Lamp 6

Linear fluorescent lamp OSRAM L 58W/20; induction ballast LAYRTON ARC 65/23

Lamp 7

Linear fluorescent lamp OSRAM L 36W/20; electronic ballast ZUMTOBEL LM-PCA 2/32

Lamp 8

Linear fluorescent lamp OSRAM L 58W/20; electronic ballast HELVAR 1x58W HFC

Lamp 9

High pressure sodium lamp TESLA SHL 50W; induction ballast VOSSLOCH SCHVABE 50W; 8F

Lamp 10

High pressure sodium lamp OSRAM VIALox 70W; induction ballast ERC 70W; 12,5F

Lamp 11

High pressure mercury lamp TESLA RVL-X 80W; induction ballast ERC 80W; 8F

Lamp 12

High pressure metal-halide lamp OSRAM 150W (POWERSTAR); induction ballast TRIDO- NIC.ATCO 150W; 20F

Lamp 13

High pressure metal-halide lamp PHILIPS HPI-T 400W; induction bal-last TRM 400W; 30F

Fig. 2 shows immunity curves for function cri-

terion B2. Lamps 7 and 8 were not tested for cri-terion B2 because they contain electronic ballasts and for criterion B2 the lamps 7 and 8 are abso-lutely immune. For criterion B2 nearly all voltage dips and short interruptions in tested supply net-work would cause the interference of correct run-ning of all tested lamps.

0,0

10,0

20,0

30,0

40,0

50,0

60,0

70,0

80,0

90,0

100,0

1 10 100 1000 10000Time duration Δt (ms)

Vol

tage

U/U

n (%

)

lamp 1 lamp 2 lamp 3 lamp 4 lamp 5 lamp 6

lamp 9 lamp 10 lamp 11 lamp 12 lamp 13 dips

Fig. 9. Immunity curves of tested light sources - criterion B2 [1] along with mapping of voltage dips and short interruptions

Fig. 3 shows immunity curves for function cri-terion B1. It can be seen that immunity curves for criterion B1 are different than curves for criterion B2. In this case some of tested light sources are immune to voltage dips with residual voltage lev-els higher than 70% of nominal value, which are very frequent in tested supply network. Lamp 1 was not tested for criterion B1, because Incan-descent bulbs are able to continuously change the luminous flux output to zero during voltage dips without a time-level discontinuity, in compari-son to discharge lamps.

0,0

10,0

20,0

30,0

40,0

50,0

60,0

70,0

80,0

90,0

100,0

1 10 100 1000 10000Time duration Δt (ms)

Vol

tage

U/U

n (%

)

lamp 2 lamp 3 lamp 4 lamp 5 lamp 6 lamp 7 lamp 8

lamp 9 lamp 10 lamp 11 lamp 12 lamp 13 dips

Fig. 10. Immunity curves of tested light sources - criterion B1 [1] along with mapping of voltage dips and short interruptions

4. Conclusion The topology of light source is the main pa-

rameter which essentially affects the immunity curves results. Not all types of light sources are acceptable to use in concrete supply network, they have a different immunity level to voltage dips and short interruptions. Irregular choice of used light source can leads to undesirable failure of output luminous flux and consequently to re-duction in its life times. In the measured supply network the lamp 8 reached the best results and immunity to voltage dips and short interruptions.



22


3. Bok, J., Drápela, J.: Design of Automatic Testing System of Appliances Immunity to Volt-age Dips and Short Interruptions. In proceedings of 10th Conference of Electric Power Engineer-ing, Dlouhé Stráně, 2009. In print.

References: 1. Drápela, J., Bok, J., Šlezingr, J., Pikhart,

J.: Light Sources Immunity to Short Voltage Dips and Interruptions. 20th International Conference on Electricity Distribution. Prague, Czech Republic, 2009. In print. 4. IEC 61000-2-8 Voltage dips and short in-

terruptions on public electric power supply sys-tems with statistical measurement results.

2. Djokic, S., Milanovic, J.V.: Sensitivity of Electrical Equipment to Voltage Sags and Short Interruptions. Recommendation for Testing. Electrical Power Quality and Utilization Journal, Vol. XI, No. 1, 2005, p. 17-32

5. EN 61547 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Specification for equipment for general lightning purposes. EMC immunity requirements.

HARD ROCK EXCAVATION BY ELECTRIC PULSE Lazarev S.V., Perkov V.V.

Research supervisors: Lopatin V.V., professor, Razumeiko O.P., assistant

Tomsk Polytechnic University, Lenin Avenue 30, Tomsk, 634050, Russia


1. Introduction

Hard Rock Excavation by Electric Pulse is a new rock excavation technique under develop-ment. The principle is to apply high voltage pulses to a sonde inserted in a predrilled hole filled with a low resistive liquid. The high voltage pulses will create breakdown in the liquid and generate a discharge channel allowing current to flow through the channel. The current causes the creation of high temperature high pressure plasma generating shock waves propagating into the surrounding solid. As a result of the shock waves fracture formation takes place where the distance of the fractures depends on the pressure of the shock waves. The excavated volume further depends on the cone opening angle. The simulations indicate that the angle may be about 100°.

Figure 1: Generator scheme In the basis of electric burst model the laws

of pulse, mass, energy preservation, describing wave character of pulse influence, are used. Generator energy transformation for electrode gap is shown in Figure 2.

The aims of this work are to develop the method of hard rock excavation by electric pulses and to choose the generator parameters and energy release regime.

Figure 2: The scheme of energy transformation 2. Experimental set up Capacitor storage energy is released for cir-

cuit resistance losses in part rZ and, basically, allocated in the discharge channel. This part of energy, in turn, is spent on formation of plasma and plasma heat and channel expansion work forming shock waves. A part of the liquid wave energy is reflected at the liquid-solid interface. The other part of the liquid wave energy is re-

The principal scheme of the generator used in the experiments for initiation of discharge channel is shown in Figure 1.

23


fracted into the solid. This refracted wave energy is again transferred to deformation energy and kinetic energy of the material. A part of the en-ergy is refracted into the air at the solid-air inter-face.

In the first experiments shock waves were created through two different means of dis-charge channel initiation. There were experi-ments with breakdown in the liquid into electrode gap and with exploding wire. After that we pro-duced a special blasting cartridge (Figure 3).

Figure 3: Blasting cartridge and its scheme

This cartridge allows to produce wave in the

concrete samples with more energy. 3. Model and calculation results The model which consistently describes

generator energy transformation to energy of wave propagating in material includes Kirchhoff equations of discharge circuit, energy balance equation of plasma channel, equations of dy-namics of tensely-deformed solid and liquid state: the movement equation, the indissolubility equation, the energy equation, the equations for tension components, the equations for deforma-tion speed tensor and the concrete and liquid state equation.

Modeling permits to receive information about process dynamics which take place in the discharge circuit, plasma channel and in the me-dium under destruction.

Specifically, it is possible to follow up strain wave propagation in the material (Figure 4).

On basis of computations obtained it is pos-sible to estimate capability of sample destruction criterially.

Modeling allows us to choose the proper pa-rameters of the generator and blasting wire, the latest initiating the discharge channel.

Figure 4: Wave position in concrete at different periods of time

4. Experimental results Having carried out these experiments, good

coincidence of calculated and measured cur-rents was obtained (Figure 5).

Figure 5: Comparison of measured and calculated currents

When the capacitance values 12, 24 and 36

µF were used in experiments, there was not significant destruction of the concrete samples. Having analyzed the results obtained, the equation was offered which assumed that half-period of current (time of basic energy release by plasma channel [1]) is equal to total time of wire blasting.

Further analysis allowed to conclude that for total destruction to produce a crack is not enough but it is also necessary to feed it with energy until it grows to the walls of the concrete sample.

So, from the one hand short regimes allow to release stored energy quicker into plasma channel and to generate pressure waves with big amplitude, from the other hand increasing of half-period permits to feed born cracks with energy for enough time.

24


To destruct the sample sequential destruc-tion method was used. The method consists in following with local destruction from one pre-drilled hole to another for total destruction (Fig-ure 6).

5. Conclusion The experiments showed that this ecologi-

cally clean method for shock wave generation and creation of fractures can be utilized for hard rock excavation.

Hard Rock Excavation by Electric Pulse is at the initial stage of development and a lot of re-search still remains for optimizing of its however promising prospects.

Figure 6: Sequential destruction method Thus, in real experiments one has to search

for compromise between rising of voltage or ca-pacitance to obtain optimal regime of concrete samples destruction.

The work is supported by Russian Fund of Fundamental Researches (08-08-01016-а) and by “The Program for Recovering and Extending Academic Potential for High School” (РНП.2.1.1.53.43.).

On the basis of these inferences the decision to increase the capacitance C of the generator up to its maximum value 96µF was made.

Five experiments have been carried out, where capacitance C is 96 µF, circuit inductivity L is 1.288 µH, circuit active resistance rz is 0.008Ω and blasting wire with the following pa-rameters: length l is 15mm, diameter Ø is 0.38mm. The voltage in the experiments is twice 10 kV and once 13, 14 and 16 kV. Rising of the generator capacitance C resulted in significant increasing of crack formation.

References: 1. Hard Rock Fragmentation with Pulsed

Power, M. Hamelin, F. Kitzinger, S. Pronko, G. Schofeld.

2. Pulsed Power Systems, Principles and Applications, Hansjoachim Bluhm, 2006, chapter 2.

3. Transients in installations of electropulse technology, Semkin B.V, Usov A.F, Zinoviev N.T, St. Petersburg.

25

Section II

INSTRUMENT MAKING

27

Section II: Instrument making

TESTING DRILLING PIPES DURING EXPLOITATION PROCESS Dao Xuan Thao , Sazanakova T.N

Supervisor: Bulgakov V.F, associate professor

Uvarova S.Y., teacher

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050 Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenin str.

Email: [email protected] An embedded checking system for detecting

wears, worn-out elements and other defects is required for increasing reliability, accurate con-structional and operational parameters of the drilling devices that are applied for the drilling process of deep boreholes.

During exploitation process there are some wears of the external surface of drilling pipes, muffs and locks as all these elements during rotation contact with the walls of the well, hence, destruction of threaded joints. The basic defects arising in pipes during exploitation process are cracks, feed marks and others focused along the axis of the pipe - longitudinal defects. There are the defects oriented across the axis of the pipe – cross sectional defects which do not occur often. There are also the defects parallel or nearly par-allel to the surfaces of the pipes.

For the testing of drilling pipes, methods like ultrasonic, eddy-current methods and magnetic control methods are used. Ultrasonic calibrator is used for measuring unilateral thickness of a sin-gle surface of pipes, including pipelines with cor-roded surface during exploitation process. Ultra-sonic defectoscope is applied for testing pipes during exploitation process to check defects like cracks, for measurement of depth and to coordi-nate their bedding. The defectoscope UD2-70 is used for ultrasonic method. One disadvantage of this method is the mechanical contact between object of controlling and the converter. Devices and the installations using eddy-current method are widely used for detection of discontinuity flaws in materials (defectometer and defecto-scopy) and for checking of thickness of wall pipes. Eddy-current method is applied using de-fectoscope VD-02 PK. The method exists only for light combination pipes (alloy of Al). Magnetic control methods are used in magnetic defecto-scope. Portable defectoscope magnetic PMD-70 is intended for the magnetic control of various products, junctions in various devices and parts from ferromagnetic materials. For the basic de-vices magnetic-powder method is preferred.

The channel of detection of defects: Fig.1 represents a combination of an over-

head ECC for the detection of cracks located on the surfaces of a light combination drilling pipes.

MC2, MC3 are measuring coils. During the de-tection of cracks, using thickness meter the ba-sic hindering factor is the clearance (h) between the surface of the controlling pipe and the con-verter. In addition to this, there is a substantial influence rendered by the defected axis of eddy-current converter (ECC) and the horizontal dis-placement Hx.

Fig.1 Overhead ECC above a pipe and its top view

Fig. 2 The block diagram of defectoscope

G-Generator; EC – excitation coil; CC –

compensating coil; MC – measuring coil; SD – subtracting device; SA – selective amplifier; RF –rotation phase; F– formatter; SAFPS – the scheme of amplitude-phase processing of sig-nals.

Experimental research on detecting superfi-cial cracks was done which led to the creation of the structural of scheme, whose block diagram is represented on fig. 2. The excitation coil EC, measuring coil MC1 and compensating coil CC make up the ECC channel of measuring wall thickness.

The excitation coil and measuring coils MC2, MC3 respectively form the differential ECC which is the channel for crack detection.

29



.cvU

.cvU

h

Fig.3 Hodograph of carrying voltage of overhead

ECC Voltage generated by the generator of fre-

quency 2, 5 kHz acts on the coil EC. Signals from the measuring coils MC2 and MC3 are compared in subtracting device VU2. The differ-ence of voltages of coils MC2 and MC3 is ampli-fied in the selective amplifier SA2 and acts on the input of the scheme of amplitude-phase of the processing signal SAFPS, reference voltage Ucv which is obtained on conditions of tuning from displacement ECC concerning a controlla-ble pipe. At significant measurements of h and Hx (within the limits ranging from 0, 1 to 0, 7 ra-diuses Ri of measuring coil MC1) it is not possi-ble to pick up the phase of a supporting voltage providing tuning from displacement in all ranges. It is seen in the curvature in hodograph, in every point A, B, C displacement h of the phase of a supporting voltage should make 90 degrees compared with the line, h of the hodograph.

h

svϕ

Fig. 4 Graph of a phase of basic pressure against clearance (h)

On fig. 4 graph of a phase of basic pressure

against clearance (h) is shown. Phase Usv was measured with Ur, the resistor is included in the circuit of coil of excitation. From the graphs it is

found that, the tuning from displacement h and Hx phase Usv should change on 4 degrees at variation of a clearance h from 2 up to 10 mm. Dependence on fig. 2.4 is used for ECC with radius of measuring coil Ri=17 mm.

The voltage carrying Ucv overhead ECC is used for the expansion of a range of tunings for the backlash of a supporting voltage for SAFPS. For obtaining Ucv it is convenient to use the coil ECC of the channel of measurement of thick-ness of a wall. The channel of a supporting volt-age included from consistently connected sub-tracting device SD1, selective amplifier SA1, rotation phase RF and the shape of right angled voltage formatter (fig. 2). In device SD1 there is a compensation of an initial voltage of measuring coil MC1.

On fig. 5 dependences of the phase of the carrying voltage Uiv on changes of the backlash h is represented. The phase of voltage Ucv is measured on

an output of selective amplifier IU1 relative voltage Ur. Dependence 1 on fig. 2.5 is con-structed for completely compensated ECC. For the same changes of a backlash h, as in the previous case, phase Urv changes 2, 5 degrees. If Ucv is used for obtaining supporting voltage SAFPS at compensated ECC then it is possible to achieve expansion of a range of tuning 2-3 times. Optimum tuning increments of phases Usv and Ucv should be identical to output at one and the same changes h.

h

cvϕ

Fig. 5 Graph of voltage carrying phase against clearance (h)

In recent times there have been strict de-mands from consumers to increase the effi-ciency of nondestructive testing (NT). In particu-lar, the ultrasonic and Eddy-current have proved to be very efficient. As a result of this, proce-dures of NT takes place at various production phases of products – from the initial testing of materials to intermediate testing work piece to the final testing of a finished product. This article

30

Section II: Instrument making focuses on the causes of defects during exploita-tion process, methods and means of testing the drilling pipes.

In Northern areas (Tyumen, Tomsk area) light combination drilling pipes are used, the test-ing, of which uses contactless eddy-current method, allowing the use of defectoscope bodies of pipe to measure thickness of a wall on

greater backlashes (up to 10 mm) between the converter and the testing pipe.

References 1. Eddy-current thickness of electrospend-

ing layer, Tomsk 1994 2. Methods and devices of nondestroying

control, Tomsk 2008 The supervising normative document, 1990

METHODS AND DEVICES FOR THE RESEARCH OF THE PHOTOELECTRIC

CONVERTER IN THE LABORATORY Dao Xuan Thao

Supervisor: Jurchenko A.V., associate professor Mylnikova T.S., senior teacher

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050 Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenin str.

Email: [email protected]

Urgency of the issue. Wide-ranging studies in the field of solar power are being focused on nowadays. The devices for quality control and measurement of manufactured elements charac-teristics are of great urgency to maintenance the manufacture of solar elements and batteries, and to carry out the research on the develop-ment of new types of solar elements. The aim and problem of the research: the analysis of the methods and devices for the laboratory research and testing of the photo-electric converter (solar batteries).

Sun spectrum

The problems: the review of the literature on the analysis of the research methods and device of photo-electric converters; to study the operat-ing principle of photo-electric converters; to ana-lyze techniques and instruments of measure-ment and calculation of the key parameters ap-propriate in photo-electrical converter and solar battery. [1]

Fig. 1 Spectrum of the solar radiation with AM 0-2 and of the blackbody radiation.

Table1: Intensity of the solar radiation with

AM 0-2

AM 0 1350 W/m2 AM 1 952 W/m2

AM 1.5 825 W/m2 AM 2 691 W/m2

31



Operation physics of photo-electrical

converter

Fig. 2 Design of a solar element 1. Surface with SiO2 covering; 2. Face contact; 3. n-Si; 4. p-Si; 5. RER contact.

Fig. 3. Zone model of the open p-p-transition: a) During the initial moment of lighting; b) change of the zone model under the action of continuous lighting and the occurrence of photo electromo-tive force (EMF).

When photo-electrical converter is lighted,

the absorbed photons generate non-equilibrium electron-hole couple. Electrons, which are gen-erated in a p-layer near the p-p-transition, ap-proach the p-p-transition and are taken out in the n-area by the electric field of the p-p-transition. In much the same way superfluous holes cre-ated in the n-layer, are partially transferred to the p-layer (Fig. 3а). [2] As a result the n-layer gets an additional negative charge and the p-layer a positive one. The initial contact potential differ-ence between p- and n-layers of the semicon-ductor decreases and voltage is brought about in the external chain (Fig. 3b).

Volt-ampere characteristics (VACH) of the

photo-electrical converter and its functional parameters:

Volt-ampere characteristics of the photo-

electrical converter, when not lighted, is the volt-ampere characteristics of the р-n transition [2] :

1)(I = I ekTqV

−⋅S where IS is the saturation current created by

free carriers, generated due to the thermal exci-tation.

When the р-n transition is being lighted, the current resulting from the generation of charge carriers caused by optical radiation Isc, apart from the dark current flows across the р-n transi-tion.

Hence, VACH of photo-electric converters can be written as the sum of the currents (for an ideal case) [2]:

I1)(I = I ekTqV

scS −−⋅ The technique of the computer-aided

measurement for photoelectric converter characteristics

Fig. 4 Block diagram for measurement of photo-electric converter characteristics. 1. The simulator of the sun radiation, 2. The water filter, 3. The electron loading.

The block diagram of the solar battery moni-

toring station is presented in Fig. 4. The basic element of the diagram is the electron loading (EL) which changes the resistance depending on the ADC voltage applied to it. It makes it possi-ble to measure the voltage of the changing load-ing in the solar battery by ADC.

The operating principle of the electron charge is based on the variation of the field tran-sistor shutter resistance VT1. The basic scheme of the electron charge is shown in Fig. 5 the transistor shutter is controlled by the microcircuit DA1 via the operational amplifier. [2, 3]

Fig.5 The basic circuit of the electron loading

32


Table 2 VACH of the solar battery 10 W measured on May, 15th at 14.00

Table 2 Using the data from the table 2 the follow-

ing graph chart of VACH can be plotted:

0.000

0.100

0.200

0.300

0.400

0.500

0.600

0.700

0.800

0 5 10 15 20

U(B)

I(A)

Fig.6 Graph chart of VACH

The major characteristic of the photo-

electrical converter is its efficiency. It is defined as, the ratio of the maximum power applied to the loading of the solar element to the power of the sunlight, falling perpendicularly to the operat-

ing surface. %100..

c

opop

PIV

=η

where Vop and Iop are the voltage and current in the operating point of the photo-electrical con-

verter (which provide the maximum power ap-plied to the loading, Fig.4.); Рc is the power of the radiation falling on the solar element which is equal to 800W/m2.

U (В) 0.11 15.9 16.5 17.1 17.5I(А) 0.68 0.43 0.35 0.18 0.09Р(W) 0.07 6.75 5.86 3.09 1.69

Considering, that the area of the solar bat-tery is 0.1 , we obtain the ratio Рc =80W 2m

%8.9%10080

56.014=⋅

⋅=η

The value obtained conforms to the stan-dard.

Thus, in the paper the analysis of the methods and means of the research of photo-electric converters in laboratory conditions has been made. The following conclusions have been drawn:

1. The sunlight is practically inexhaustible energy source which is ecologically pure and easily accessible;

2. The physics of the operation and the calculation of photoelectric converter parameters have been studied;

3. Various simulators of the sun and meth-ods for the research of the photo-electrical con-verter have been described;

4. The block diagram for the measurement of the photo-electrical converter parameters, the fundamental diagram of the electron loading and the results of the experiment have been pre-sented.

References: 1. Andreev V.M (1996). The physics of

photo-electric transformations of solar power, the St.-Petersburg state electro technical university.

2. The collection of laboratory works on the discipline «Information-Measuring Systems».

3. Koltun M.M (1985). Optics and metrology of solar elements, Moscow

“CAR GUARD” Dmitrova Mary

Supervisor: Asadullina L. I., TPU, senior teacher

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk


It is not a secret that technical equipment level of Russian car thieves is very high nowa-days. Any security system that aims to prevent car theft only makes sense if the car owner is

notified immediately and preferably when the theft is in progress but not when the car is al-ready hundreds of miles away.

33



For this reason the main solution in prevent-ing car theft is the system that will notify it imme-diately.

Such “Car Guard” system has to be high-tech and to be able not only to warn car owner about the stealing attempt in progress, but also to give him ability to manage the car remotely in real time in order to prevent the theft.

The “Car Guard” is a system that combines all modern solutions in the area of security sys-tems such as speech interface and GSM com-munication technology. The car owner does not need any special knowledge in order to operate and mange such device; even a novice user could handle it easily. "Car Guard" uses all ad-vantages of GSM communication for vehicle pro-tection.

The "Car Guard" consists of electronic de-vice made of highly reliable automatic compo-nents of such companies like Microchip, Atmel, AMD, ST, Phillips, Nokia. Electronics has ex-tended temperature range and ensures smooth working of "Car Guard" even in conditions of high humidity.

Nowadays GSM networks are extensively used, especially in big cities of our country. High reliability and "viability" of GSM systems even in adverse weather conditions are its main strong characteristics.

All of above characteristics make GSM -terminal solutions much more efficient than tradi-tional car-alarm pagers. Thus functionality and possibilities of alarm systems are considerably extended by real-time notification, remote control and car theft prevention.

"Car Guard" uses standard GSM 900/1800 MHz mobile networks to transfer information and control commands. The main transfer channel is a voice connection. Only signals that are ac-ceptable in mobile networks in the terms of the standard contract (speech and DTMF signals) are used to transfer information.

The device has also an interactive speech menu for configuration.

“Car Guard” system exercises constant con-trol on doors’ sensors, engine jacket and car boot, condition of the doors’ activators and in-forms the owner about any attempt of opening his/her car or disconnects an car-alarm system through alarm key-ring, including special decod-ing and scanning equipment.

«Car Guard» allows to start an injector en-gine, an autonomous heater or the carburetor engine with automatic cold activation for a cer-tain period of time well before driving on a re-mote command. Such start can be one-time or periodical. In cold season this function could help to considerably prolong engine life and to provide easy start after warming up and com-fortable trip even at very low temperatures.

"Car Guard" enables the owner to stop the engine of the car at any distance in case of suc-cessful attempt of the car thief to bypass the regular alarm systems or to activate an actuating mechanism that could help to prevent such at-tempt.

"Car Guard" also provides possibilities to find out coordinates of the car within a mobile net-work with accuracy of 100-500 m (depending on location and density of GSM communication sta-tions). Finding the car position through GSM network has certain advantages in comparison with sensor GPS’s possibility however it is not comparable to it in accuracy. GSM communica-tion systems are steadier to interferences than systems GPS and can not be jammed in trivial ways which are used for usual radio transmitters. At the same time, accuracy of coordinates through network GSM is quite sufficient for cal-culation of movement direction of a car and a search distance.

User can connect GPS receiver to a signal-ling device. It provides a good reception in the conditions of city high-rise building. The receiver should be adjusted to the protocol NMEA – 4800 bps, 8-N-1. It is necessary to remember that in the conditions of absence of visibility of satel-lites, GPS receiver can work on the reflected signals and gives an error in position location and speed of immovable object. After sending sms with inquiry about a car location the answer of the following type will come within 40-60 sec-onds:

GPS> N5537.2518; E03736.3444; OK; dN = .0234; dE = .0543; M Time 12:15:00; Data 12-06-08; Speed = 0 km/h.

N5537.2518; E03736.3444

Сoordinates in degrees, minutes, tenth, 100-th, thou-sand, ten-thousand of min-

utes. OK Movement with respect to

the previous inquiry within the limits of 200 metres

dN = .0234; dE = .0543

Movement with respect to the previous inquiry.

M Time 12:15:00

Time

Data 12-06-08 Date Speed = 0 km/h Velocity of travel

The scheme of reception of coordinates of

object in the form of SMS message:

34


Alarm system can produce alarm signals in different ways.

Audio signals by a siren – in general this is a good and useful method, it can frighten a car-jacker and attract someone’s attention. But this way is not always applicable, e.g. the system can respond to a cat’s jump onto the hood and the siren’s signal may wake up the whole block!

Light signals are used for operating modes indication and performed by regular lamps of turn or parking lights and a special light diode of alarm system.

The most convenient method is a notification sent to a remote unit or a pager of car alarm sys-tem. For this purpose the information should be transmitted from the main (master) unit of a car to the remote unit (pager). Such features are common for two-way alarm systems which are more expensive than one-way system.

The facilities of “Car Guard" to locate coor-dinates, to block the engine or to counteract the theft with remotely switching on through GSM channel make this system a fierce defender at pretty low price for such class of devices.

The degree of security rendered by alarm system is determined by several primary pa-rameters:

If a two-way remote unit (or a pager) is used the owner receives the information by light, au-dio and vibro signals of the remote unit. For a practically acceptable quality of notification the most critical parameter is a working distance of communication between a remote unit and a vehicle. Actual operating distance for communi-cation between a car and a remote unit of good alarm systems does not exceed 500 meters within a line of sight.

1. the degree of radio channel protection; 2. availability of distant locking relays; 3. types of notification; 4. specific security options.

1. Radio channel protection.

The remote and master units of alarm sys-tem communicate at the frequency of 433 MHz. If these commands are not enciphered then the alarm system becomes easy to be broken. Any radio-amateur can record these signals and get a sort of control unit duplicate.

4. Specific security capabilities.

This category includes additional immobiliz-ers (except for the regular and built-in ones), “dallas” keys, and transponder tags. Radio channel protection is a very important

task, because the control over distant lockups, both electronic and often mechanical, is per-formed from the remote control unit, and if the alarm system receives allegedly regular signal, then all lockups are immediately deactivated.

There exist the finger prints readers, voice identifiers, iris analyzers. There is GSM-service, including the version where a car is controlled by dispatcher and the alarm system can be de-activated by a phone call.

All such solutions have their own advantages and imperfections and can be implemented in different ways. In any case a car owner acquires extra worries, cares and/or control devices which make a vehicle operation more complicated.

2. Distant locking relays.

The most drastic protection can be found in the locking relays (electronic modules) that work independently of the main unit of the system.

This project has been finished. And now our company is developing a new product on the basis of the foregoing technology. Currently we work on delimitation of borders for transport which will be under lease (if transport crosses established border the lessor will receive a warn-ing message) and on determination of liquid level in a capacity (if liquid level reaches critical point the user is also warned by the message).

If the system is equipped with such relay, then a thief will face technically stubborn prob-lem. Miniature relay works in the following man-ner: if the main module of the system does not send a special signal then this intellectual relay prevents the engine from starting up.

3. Types of notification.

35

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 THE INFLUENCE OF THE FINANCIAL CRISIS ON THE GEOPHYSICAL WORKS

Kalashnikova E., Zharnikov V.

The supervisor of studies: Uvarova S.

Tomsk polytechnical university, Russia, Tomsk, 634034, 30 Lenin str.

E-mail: [email protected] The oil and gas branch represents one of the

most important strategic branches of a national economy and strongly depends on dynamics of economic processes. In the conditions of finan-cial crisis of 2008 volumes of extraction and transportation of oil and mineral oil all over the world are reduced because of falling of world demand for raw materials. In Russia, reduction of prices on oil results to reduction of volumes of extraction that direct impact on export reduction makes is observed. In this connection there is a necessity for the profound analysis of questions of transportation and transfer of oil and mineral oil, the newest technologies of storage and ex-traction, and also attraction of domestic and for-eign investments into oil and gas branch.

World economic crisis introduces corrective amendments in plans for development of the companies of oil and gas sector. Reduction of investments first of all will concern prospecting works. In the future it can threaten with falling of volumes of extraction. Taking into account world financial and an economic crisis activity de-crease subsoil users in performance of prospect-ing works is expected. It concerns and the fourth quarter 2008, and will especially ssentially affect results of 2009. It is influenced by variety of fac-tors. The lack of free financial assets does not allow the companies to conclude contracts with the prospecting enterprises. And those, in turn, have no possibility in due time to be prepared for field works.

Decrease in volumes of prospecting works becomes for oil extracting by the factor, cer-tainly, negative. Especially, destabilising influ-ence can be predicted in long-term prospect, after all at the increasing exhaustion of stocks to invest in prospecting works it is necessary, and the more, the better. Reduction twice financing volumes can bring to nothing efforts on mainte-nance of resource base and extraction volumes at existing level. Nevertheless the wave of re-duction of prospecting works across Siberia will sweep, and basically on traditional regions of extraction.

On the other hand, in connection with falling of the world prices for oil and crisis of liquidity from the party subsoil users ever less interest to new, yet to not distributed licence sites in per-spective regions. Even privileges under the tax to mining operations at development of Eastern

Siberia and a continental shelf do not compen-sate insufficiently high profitability and complexi-ties with development of licence sites of Eastern Siberia. For example, Kijsky and Romashihinsky, exposed in Irkutsk area in 2008, at the last min-ute have lost buyers - "Rosneft" and "Surgut-neftegaz" have withdrawn the demands from auction, it is not enough desire of one Irkutsk oil company for the organisation of the auctions. Was marked by opposite tendencies in sphere of merges and absorption in oil and gas branch 2008. In first half of year of stock quote of the oil companies were supported by the growing prices for the oil, reached peak in July when cost of oil of mark Brent has made 144 dollars/barr. A consequence of it was high business activity in the branch, observed in the first half of the year: in an investigation and extraction segment 446 transactions by total cost 48 billion dollars.

However, since summer of 2008 in the fi-nancial markets of event have been concluded began to develop in the unprecedented image, and their cumulative influence has threatened the largest developed countries of economic re-cession. Uncertainty concerning an economic condition promoted moderate growth of demand and has caused fluctuations of the prices for oil. In IV quarter influence of the specified factors has led to activity decrease in sphere of merges and absorption in oil and gas branch. In 2008 The volume of transactions of merges and ab-sorption in an investigation and extraction seg-ment was reduced to 28 % in comparison with the record level of activity noted in 2007 On number of transactions of 2008 became the most unsuccessful for the last five years (only 703 transactions). Thus the level of business was an average, making almost two transactions in day. According to IHS Herold Inc, cumulative cost of transactions in 2008 has reached 110 billion dollars, that is comparable to a similar indicator of 2007 (155 billion dollars) when the average price for oil was on 25 % more low, than in 2008.

Economic recession and the reduction in demand caused by it for mineral oil can lead to carrying over of terms of realisation or cancella-tion of some projects, in particular that from them which provide building of new oil refining and petrochemical factories or modernisation of ex-isting oil refining capacities. Essential decrease

36


Section II: Instrument making in profitableness of world oil refining and petro-chemical manufactures in comparison with indi-cators of last years can affect their appeal in the opinion of potential buyers. In existing conditions marketing actives can appear also less attractive against possible decrease in volumes of con-sumption from the commercial enterprises and other consumers.

The important role in oil and gas branch to be taken away to the service companies which serve technics and the equipment, realise metro-logical maintenance throughout all geophysical and prospecting works. With the beginning of world financial crisis the service companies in oil and gas branch of Russia, especially small and average companies have not the best times. The extracting companies often detain payment of already spent works – service companies actu-ally finance the clients. The large and powerful foreign companies have less suffered from crisis and are ready to absorption of weaker players of the market.

Development of the service companies in 2009 will be influenced by scales of prospecting activity, and also volumes of expenses which are ready to incur the oil and gas companies. The destiny of capital-intensive projects will depend on the decisions accepted by clients concerning volumes of planned capital investments, and level of operational expenses will be caused by profitableness of industrial activity. Some signs testify to reduction by the oil and gas companies of planned volumes of capital investments for 2009. Besides, in some cases delays with ac-ceptance of investment decisions were ob-served. The lesser number of new projects will be realised at the price for oil below 50 dollars for barrel. Some oil and gas companies declare repeated competitions on selection of suppliers and the service companies on service of large projects in hope to receive cheaper offers and to reduce expenses for the equipment and ser-vices. Within the limits of the general decrease in expenses on geological prospecting and extrac-tion by the first under reduction projects in geo-logically the mastered regions, realised on the verge of profitability will get. Thus it is necessary to notice, that, unlike crises of last years, the service companies worry present crisis more

confidently and possess abilities to solve a prob-lem which it will bring.

In the future 2010 some of them will manage to avoid negative influence of decrease in activ-ity in oil and gas branch thanks to presence of the long-term contracts guaranteeing receipt of money resources from principal views of ser-vices. Nevertheless, in process of performance of in advance stipulated amount of works the service companies can face a problem of search of profitable projects. Some large service com-panies already declared the plans to stir up ac-tivity in the field of strategic acquisitions that is caused by following two major factors: Necessity of optimisation of existing capacities for satisfac-tion of predicted demand, and also growth of demand for high technologies on purpose to overcome technological backlog regarding of-fered products and services.

In the conditions of world financial crisis, and also against gaining in strength recession of the American economy and European economy, the prices for oil some times for a year overcame psychologically important marks. Actually, the price for oil of mix Urals has fallen to 64 % to 32 dollars for barrel that has made unprofitable oil export basically. Delay of rates of growth of eco-nomic should cause fears of investors concern-ing the further reduction in demand for mineral oil, as became a major factor promoting active sales of actions of the companies of sector. The strong financial indicators of the oil and gas companies provided with the record prices for oil in 2008 while leave to leaders of branch possibil-ity to finance capital investments at the expense of a monetary stream from operational activity. It is obvious, that predicted world recession, pos-sibly, and will promote further to reduction of demand for oil and will cause higher, than last year, volatility the oil prices. More the low prices for oil in 2009 will force the majority of the oil and gas Russian companies to reduce projects of capital investments and to pass to the levels of expenses more corresponding to capital invest-ments on maintenance of business. Changes in system of calculation of export duties and stabili-sation of the market of oil should lead to that in January and February of the come year export will cease to yield losses. It will allow to recover as well home market of oil and mineral oil.

37


FIBER OPTIC MONITORING SYSTEMS Polinovskiy_S.

Scientific advisor: Milyaev D. V. associate professor

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 30, Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia

E-mail: [email protected] Introduction In this paper, we consider a use of monitor-

ing system, created on the base of optical fiber sensing.

At nowadays we have a huge choice of monitoring system. Why is using a fiber optic sensing more reliable than other systems?

There are some advantages below to com-pare it with another system:

• Insensitive to temperature, electromagnetic fields, humidity, vibrations and corrosion

• Excellent long-term stability • Short measurement time • Automatic and/or remote measurement • No calibration required • Easy and fast to install 1 SOFO system The SOFO measuring system is based on

the principle of low-coherence interferometry (see figure). The infrared emission of a light emitting diode (LED) is launched into a standard single mode fiber and directed, through a cou-pler, towards two fibers mounted on or embed-ded in the structure to be monitored.

The measurement fiber is in mechanical con-tact with the structure itself and will therefore follow its deformations in both elongation and shortening.

The second fiber, called reference fiber, is installed free in the same pipe. Mirrors, placed at the end of both fibers, reflect the light back to the coupler which recombines the two beams and directs them towards the analyzer. This is also made of two fiber lines and can introduce a well known path difference between them by means of a mobile mirror.

On moving this mirror, a modulated signal is obtained on the photodiode only when the length difference between the fibers in the analyzer compensates the length difference between the fibers in the structure to better than the coher-ence length of the source (in our case some hundreds of mm).

Each measurement gives a new compensa-tion position reflecting the deformation under-gone by the structure relatively to the previous measurement points.

The Reading Unit can therefore be discon-nected and used to monitor other fiber sensors and other structures.

If multiple sensor need to be measured automatically, in optical switch is installed. The SOFO unit is capable of storing measurements, and later transfer them to the data acquisition PC via a cable or a modem (wired or wireless). Conventional (electrical) data acquisition devices can be connected to the SOFO bus.

2 Mocent system Mocent is a Russian company, specialized

on FOS monitoring systems. They use another type of sensing, and principle of monitoring.

Sequence of construction monitoring proc-

ess: • Building project review • Digital modeling:

– Calculation of pressures in the junc-tions of the supporting frame

– Detection of places requiring regu-lar control for movements (pres-sures )

• Installing of sensors, laying of the transit cables, joining to automatic control system

• Non-stop / discreet communication of sensors and information review

• In case of alarm the on-place analysis with digital modeling and study of construction should be performed.

• Recommendations development to eliminate the source of alarm (destructive event)

It is advisable to divide the fiber optic sen-

sors (FOS) into two wide classes: 1) The fiber-optic waveguide conducts only

the transit function of the environment of trans-mission of optical emanation to the sensing unit;

38


2) The fiber-optic waveguide is the envi-

ronment for transmission of signals and is simul-taneously the sensing unit element of the FOS

The control - measurement system com-

prises the following elements: • Fiber-optic sensor of movements • Fiber-optic sensor of temperature • Fiber-optic waveguide as a distributed

sensor under questioning by optical tester and reflection meter

• Fiber-optic cable • Electric cable • System of collection, processing, accu-

mulation of information from measuring channels to remote point

3 Concrete Setting Sensor The Concrete Setting Sensor is designed to

measure the hardening time of concrete. Its measurement principle is identical with the one of Standard SOFO Deformation Sensors. The only difference is that the axial stiffness of the protection tube of the Concrete Setting Sensor is several orders of magnitude larger, and its ther-mal expansion coefficient is different from that of non-hardened concrete. One Concrete Setting Sensor and one Standard Sensor are to be in-stalled side by side and their measurements are to be compared.

In the initial phases after concrete pouring, when concrete has not hardened, the Standard Sensor accurately measures the very early age deformations of concrete, while the Concrete

Setting Sensor deforms mainly due to tempera-ture variations. Because of its high rigidity and different thermal expansion coefficient, it does not follow accurately the very early age deforma-tions of concrete. Thus, before concrete harden-ing, the measurements realized by the Standard Sensor and the Concrete Setting Sensor are different.

When hardened, concrete becomes suffi-ciently stiff to transfer all its deformations to the Concrete Setting Sensor, and both sensors measure identical deformations. The instant when the difference between the Standard and the Concrete Setting Sensor measurements be-comes constant, corresponds to the hardening time of concrete. An example of such a meas-urement is presented in the following figure.

Fig.3 Deformation measurement

Conclusion Structural heath monitoring is an attractive

and challenging area of intelligent infrastructure, integrating high-tech technologies. It is a con-crete embodiment of modern testing technology so that a

monitored infrastructure is, in fact, a long-term, full-scale and realtime testing system.

References 1. B. Glisic, D. Inaudi, P. Kronenberg, S.

Lloret, S. Vurpillot «Special sensors for deforma-tion measurements of different construction ma-terials and structures», SPIE, 6th International Symposium on Smart Structures and Materials, Newport Beach, USA'(1999), Vol 3670, p 505-513

2. Егоров Ф.А., Ткачев О.И., Неугодников А.П., Рубцов И.В., Поспелов В.И., «Волокон-но-оптический датчик деформаций», Техно-логии строительства, 4, 2005

39


CUFF-LESS WAY TO MEASURE BLOOD PRESSURE Starikov S.S.

Scientific advisor: Milyaev D.V. associate professor

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 30 Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, Russia 634050


Automatic identification of non-invasive

blood pressure (BP), despite the seeming sim-plicity of the problem is still a problem, existing solutions which can not be recognized until the end satisfactory.

The existence of a large number of methods and devices for this purpose (as shown by analysis of the patent literature, every year they added an average of about 25 new technical solutions).

The lack of a universal instrument offset a relatively wide range of technical tools, each de-signed to address a narrow range of clinical tasks. However, there is no any effective auto-mated systems to monitor non-invasive blood pressure monitoring. This greatly complicates the work of doctors, especially in the context of resuscitation, when the continuous dynamics of blood pressure is almost the main requirement adequate management of patients. The lack of continuous long-term control of blood pressure, for example, during sleep, in patients at risk of a hypertensive crisis, does not allow to take timely action and prevent the development of possible complications. The same reason makes it almost impossible to obtain a profile of blood changes in a patient during a diagnostic or therapeutic influ-ence - the task is all the more relevant that the accuracy of diagnosis, and adequacy of medical procedures, such as in the case of hypertension, is determined not by two or three random meas-urements and the nature of the profile of blood in different situations. [1]

Sound method is based on the phenomenon of sound, with its artery compression from the outside (Korotkova phenomenon). I.S. Korotkov found that if the artery to file an external pres-sure exceeding the diastolic, it raises the sounds (tones, noise), which are terminated as soon as the external pressure exceeds the systolic level. Listening through phonendoscope brachial ar-tery in the elbow bend in the process of decom-pression, determine the availability and ending sounds, and pressure gauge to indicate the ap-propriate place at the levels of external pressure (Fig. 2.12). The first level corresponds to the systolic pressure, the second - the diastolic. [2]

For measurements of blood pressure, pulse

and audible methods used sfigmanometry with mercury or membrane manometer with an inter-val of the measured pressure 20 ... 300 mm Hg. Art. + 4 mm. Hg. Art. This method cuff and it is not suitable, because cuffed sway arm. And thus the vein, and this creates an inconvenience to patient.

Article Kuzenkov R.A. proposed a method for measuring blood pressure using the meas-urement of resistance biological tissue diastolic filling.

In formula form it looks like this, it is known that the resistance R can be determined by the classical dependence

Vl

SlR

2⋅=

⋅=

ρρ

where ρ-specific resistance, S-area of the conductor, V-volume of the conductor, l-length of wire from which you can obtain an expression for

the volume: R

lV2⋅

=ρ

. Differentiating on dR,

we get dRR

ldV 2

2⋅−=ρ

We know that the volume velocity of blood

flow is defined as WP

dtdR

Rl

dtdVQ =

⋅−== 2

2ρ

Where W-hydraulic resistance, P-pressure. In view of the blood viscosity μ and the radius of the artery sample r may be defined hydraulic

resistance 4

8rlWπμ

= as a result got a formula to

determine the pressure in the arteries on the human finger phalanges:

40


dtdRk

dtdRlP =−=

ρμπ8

.

The parameters μ and ρ, in certain frequen-cies are physiological constants. For example, when the 150kHz ρ = 150 om * cm and μ = 2.5 * 10 ^ (-3) Pa *S. In doing so, the value l is also a fixed value, depending on the design of the pri-mary measuring device AD converter, for exam-ple l = 3 cm from here should be that.

Ом

SPаlk ⋅⋅−=−= 3101.18

ρμπ

A minus sign

indicates that the change in resistance and pressure are directed in opposite directions, ie, the inflow of blood in the artery corresponds to the reduction of resistance and outflow - it in-creases, so the sign in the calculation can not be used. Since R and P are functions of time that

should bedt

tdRktP )()( = . [3]A measured resis-

tance will be to impose the two electrodes on the phalanges of fingers, respectively, will change the output voltage value of the calculation that

0RRU

U xгx =

As result of an investigation and to develop

some features I have done the primary trans-ducer, which has sensitivity of the higher point.

The references 1. P.L. Andriyaschenko, V.M. Bolshov, V.A,.

Klochkov, V. Yakovlev. By selecting the method of measuring blood pressure monitor complex / / Med.tehnika.-1995 .- 4. - P.26-29.

2. Polishuk V.I., Terekhova L.G. Engineering and Methodology rheography and reopletiz-mografii. - M.: Medicine, 1983.

3. Eman A. Biophysical basis of measure-ment of blood pressure. - L.:

Medicine. 1983.

TECHNICAL DIAGNOSTICS OF MANUFACTURE OF THE SOLAR BATTARY

Takhanova V.


Tomsk Polytechnic University, Russia, Tomsk, 634050, 30 Lenin str.

E-mail:[email protected]

The solar battery- the battery of solar ele-ments, the semi-conductor photo-electric gen-erator, directly reformative energy of solar radia-tion in the electric.

The principal of action of solar battery con-sist in direct transformation of a sunlight to an electric current.

Raw materials for manufacture of the solar battery – usual sand. However for reception from it cleared and photosensitive silicon expensive technological processes are required. Careful cleaning of sand and reception from it monocrys-tal (or polycrystalline) silicon are most expensive parts of their manufacture.

From silicon elements type modules, and from modules collect the solar battery.

Nondestructive check by manufacture Consider more in detail control stages on the

device ICOS Solar wafer and cell inspection:

41


Figure 1. Control stages.

1.Raw wafer inspector: ICOS wafer inspec-

tor; 2. Micro-crack inspection: ICOS Micro-crack Inspector; 3. Texture inspection: ICOS In- Tex Inspector; 4. Anti-Reflective Coating (ARC) in-spection: ICOS SIN Coating Inspector; 5. Metal contacts inspection:

ICOS Print Inspector; 6. End-of-Line cell classification: ICOS Cell Classifier.

The ICOS Wafer Inspector is designed for automated optical inspection of the raw wafer parameters.

Wafer Inspector • 100% inspection after the final stage of

the wafer production and incoming quality con-trol of wafers before entering the solar cell pro-duction line.

• Inspections: wafer contour integrity, wa-fer geometry, surface inspection.

Micro-Crack Inspector The ICOS Micro-crack Inspector is designed

to validate the structural integrity of raw wafers. • This compact module can easily be inte-

grated in the outgoing or incoming wafer han-dling process.

• Overall yield can be enhanced bij in-specting micro-cracks in an early stage, avoiding breakage later in the process

• Inspections: non-penetrating micro-crack, penetrating crack, foreign material inclu-sions, pitting.

In-Tex Inspector The ICOS In-Tex Inspector is designed to

verify the quality of the texturising process. Spe-cific customer texturing sorting criteria can be met, based on the customer wafer production reference set.

• Inspections: wafer reflectivity, wafer con-tour integrity, wafer geometry.

Sin Coating Inspector The ICOS Sin Coating Inspector is designed

for automated optical inspection of the Anti- Re-flective Coating on a solar cell.

• Inspections: ARC color and thickness measurement, coating homogeneity, wafer con-tour, geometry, surface inspection.

Print Inspector The ICOS Print Inspector is designed for

automated optical inspection of the front- and backside metallization of solar cells after the screen printing process. This monitoring of the printing process can be used as an early warn-ing for screen maintenance, adjustment, re-placement or low paste level.

• Inspections: finger interruptions, finger width average, bus bar measurements, paste integrity (backside), print position, surface in-spection , wafer contour integrity, geometry.

Cell Classifier The ICOS Cell Classifier are designed for

automated optical solar cell classifications (front- or backside).

• Inspections: finger interruptions, finger width average, bus bar measurements, paste integrity (backside), print position, surface in-spection, wafer contour integrity, wafer geome-try.

• It allows fast, efficient and reliable optical classifications of solar cells in accordance with your customer’s requirements.

As an example it is possible to result one more device Electro Luminescence Inspection Equipment for Solar Cells and Modules.

Figure 2. Electro Luminescence Inspection

The LumiSolar Professional system utilizes

the electro luminescence phenomena to image micro cracks, cell failures and inhomogenities of photovoltaic cells which are extremely difficult to detect visually. The highly sensitive equipment allows performing detailed quality control of sin-gle cells as well as large arrays.

42


Final inspection. Removal of current-voltage diagram’s.

Figure 4. Measured current-voltage diagrams solar cell.

One of the most important parameters at di-agnostics of solar cells is volt-ampere character-istic removal.

Multipurpose pulse tester for the control

of parameters of solar cell and batteries. The offered multipurpose pulse tester also is

intended for research solar elements, reforma-tive the concentrated sunlight.

In figure 3. The scheme for measurement of current-voltage diagram’s is shown

The tester allows to make measurements of current-voltage diagrams of the solar cell at:

• Angular divergence of radiation of 32 angular minutes;

• Density of a stream of radiation in a range 0.1-200 W/sm2;

• Radiation spectrum AM0 (the “space” Sun) or AM1,5D (land conditions)

That manufacture and quality of made pro-duction has increased it is necessary to super-vise manufacture process at each stage.

In conclusion it is possible to notice, that in the modern world automated monitoring systems even more often take root. For example, as, sys-tem Solar Wafer and cell inspection which is based on recognition of images.

Figure 3. Scheme of measurement of current-voltage diagrams

Measurement of current-voltage diagrams

are spent according to the scheme to figure 3, and also at different temperature.

References:

1. http://www.icos.be/EN/03_02_01.shtml 2. Farenbukh A., Bjub R. Solar cells. The

theory and experiment. 3. http://www.greateyes.de 4. D.S. Strebkov. Renewed power of the

future – Energy, 2, 2007.

43

http://www.icos.be/EN/03_02_01.shtml

http://www.greateyes.de/


CONSENSUS RELATION FOR DATA FUSION IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK

Khomyakova M.S., Tarakanov E.V., Baranov P.F.

Scientific advisor: Muravyov S.V., D.Sc., Professor


E-mail: [email protected] Introduction In this paper, we consider a use of wireless

mesh networks for monitoring and information collection purposes.

The approach is based on determination of Kemeny median which corresponds to consen-sus relation. An algorithm for finding the Kemeny median has been implemented in graphic pro-gramming package LabVIEW and a correspond-ing example is given.

Since the Kemeny Median Problem usually has multiple solutions one needs to define a sin-gle solution aggregating them in some accept-able way. For this aim, we choose the Condor-cet’s principle and appropriate algorithm is also presented in LabVIEW language.

1 Consensus relation determination The idea that a group consensus can be ob-

tained by counting a distance between any two rankings is the most important directions of re-search in the theory of group consensus.

Suppose we have m rankings on set A = a1, a2, ..., an of n objects. Then we have the relation set Λ = λ1, λ2, ..., λm, where each of m rankings (preference relations) λ = a1 a2

...~ as ~ at ~ an may include , a strict pref-erence relation π, and ~, an equivalence (or in-difference) relation ν, so that λ = π∪ ν.

ff f

Such a relation λ is generally called a weak order. The relation set Λ is titled a preference profile for the given m rankings. We can deter-mine a single preference relation that would give an integrative characterization of the objects. Let a subspace Π be a set of all n! linear (strict) or-der relations on A. Each linear order corre-sponds to one of permutations of first n natural numbers Nn. We use a permutation Π of the alternatives to represent the prefer-ence profile and call it consensus ranking [1].

f

1, aa∈β

n,...,a2

Let λ be represented by a relation matrix R = [rij]

⎪⎩

⎪⎨

⎧

−=

ji

ji

ji

ij

aaaaaa

rp

f

if1~if0

if1

.

The distance between rankings and

or Kemeny distance is kλ lλ

∑<

−=ji

lij

kijlk rrd )λ,λ(

.

Kemeny median β, a consensus relation, is defined by formula

∑=

=m

kkd

1

)λ,λ(minargβ . (1)

The relation β corresponds to a transposition of rows and columns of the profile matrix P = [pij]

∑=

=m

k

kijij dp

1, (2)

where

0, if

1, if ~ .

2, if

k ki j

k kij i j

k ki j

a a

d a

a a

⎧⎪⎪= ⎨⎪⎪⎩

f

p

ka

In correspondence to the expression (1),

sum of elements of the upper triangle submatrix of the matrix P is minimal. In other words, β is in a least distance to profile Λ among all other pos-sible liner orders.

Recursive algorithm for finding Kemeny me-dian β has been described in [2]. In this paper, we use the same branch and bound (B&B) algo-rithm implemented in LabVIEW.

2 Software of B&B algorithm Let us consider an example of an automated

building fire alarm system described in [1]. The state of a plant is under control of six sensors of heterogeneous properties (location importance, temperature, rate of temperature increase,

44


Section II: Instrument making sprinkle status, human presence). For the sake of simplicity, we consider only seven nodes of the sensor network. Each network node has the said six sensors.

The information from these sensors can be used for building the following preference profile:

75421636

75164325

71463254

14725633

71642352

14763251

~~~~~:λ~~~~~:λ

:λ:λ:λ

~:λ

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

f

f

ffffff

ffffff

ffffff

fffff

(3)

The preference profile (3) serves as an input

data (initial rankings) for B&B algorithm in Lab-VIEW (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1 The front panel of B&B algorithm in Lab-VIEW

The front panel is the interactive user inter-

face, and the block diagram is the source code (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2 The some part of the block diagram of B&B algorithm in LabVIEW

The algorithm results are four following solu-

tions (Kemeny medians): 71462534

71462353

17462532

17462351

ββββ

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

ffffff

ffffff

ffffff

ffffff

====

. (4)

We need to define a uniting solutions (4)

single solution. 3 The data fusion methods for determin-

ing a single relation In order to find a single relation, let us con-

sider two data fusion methods taken from the Voting Theory: Borda Count and Condorcet’s methods.

Both of these are based on democratic elec-tion strategies. Each alternative is given a num-ber of points depending on a place in the rank-ing: 0 points for placing last, 1 point for placing next to last, and so on, up to n – 1 points for placing first. The Borda maxi-mum count corresponds to a winner.

Condorcet’s method is the following asser-tion: in each comparison, the preferred alterna-tive is the alternative preferred by a majority of voters, i.e. ai aj iff sij sji. In other words, if the alternative ai ob-tains a majority of votes in pair-wise contests against every other alternative, the alternative is chosen as the winner. It is widely recognized that the Condorcet’s method gives the best con-sensus relation.

ff

4 Condorcet’s methods in LabVIEW The approach from Section 2 obtains all

possible solutions. In our example we have four solutions (4), but it may be more (ten, twenty and so on) in other situation. It is unacceptable for solving some problems. We need only one sin-gle solution for working with an automated build-ing fire alarm system.

We use Condorcet’s method implemented in LabVIEW. The front panel and the some part of the block diagram of our programme showed in Fig. 3.

Fig. 3 Condorcet’s method in LabVIEW

45


The solutions (4) serve as an input data (ini-tial rankings) for Condorcet’s method in Lab-VIEW. The result of Condorcet’s method is the single solution with equivalence relations be-tween a and a , a and a 3 5 1 7

7146253 ~~λ aaaaaaa ffff= (5) The following from solutions (5) we can

judge that the nodes a3 and a5 are the most im-portant (for example, there are fire in these rooms) for problem-solving.

Conclusion In this paper, we presented approach that

can be useful not only for data transmission

management in wireless sensor networks but also for estimation of quality, finding bioconsen-sus, information retrieval systems and others.

References 1. Muravyov S., Mun Choon Chan, M.

Khomyakova. Prioritizing sensed data transmis-sion by consensus relation in wireless sensor network. - 12th IMEKO TC1 & TC7 Joint Sympo-sium on Man Science & Measurement, France, September 3, 2008

2. Muravyov S.V. Rankings as ordinal scale measurement Results. - Metrology and Meas-urement Systems, Vol. 13, No. 1, 2007, pp. 9-24.

CLASSIFICATION OF METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF THE COMMERCIAL ACCOUNT OF GAS AS CONVERTERS OF THE CHARGE

Chebykina T.


Tomsk polytechnical university, Russia, Tomsk, 634034, 30 Lenin str.


Advantages of this method include: - Versatility. Individual selection requires only orifice device, pressure sensor, etc. may apply any and do not depend on the type of measurement environment; - Low cost. The disadvantages of this method also may include the following:

It is know earlier the small attention was paid to the commercial account of gas. Transition of econ-omy to market attitudes has forced consumers to search for ways of decrease in unreasonable ex-penses on gas that is why this item is of very high importance.

The most profound problem is to look throurh several methods of measuring gas flow its advan-tages and disadvantages.

- Sensitivity to external disturbances of the flow and mechanical vibration of pipeline;

- Small dynamic range measurements of the flow. The next method of gas flow, this volumetric method. In the present method to flow converters include: whirlpool, rotary, ultrasonic and DR.

The most famous and one of the first is the method of the pressure generated in the narrow devices. In this method as a flow transducer (PR) is an orifice device. These devices reduce include: diaphragm, nozzle, osrednyayuschie tube. The principle of this method is based on the establish-ment of a local narrowing of the measuring pipe flow using diaphragms, nozzles and osrednya-yuschih tubes, part of the potential energy which goes into kinetic energy, the average flow velocity at the point of narrowing increases and static pres-sure is less than the static pressure before the ori-fice device.

Volumetric method with the vortical flow trans-ducer based on the formation in the wake of poorly streamlined body of a chain of vortices (Karman tracks) under the action of the gas stream. The frequency of vortex formation depends only on the Reynolds number (ratio of inertia forces acting in the flow, to the forces of viscosity), as defined by the size of the transverse flow around the body. Stability of vortex formation is provided by the spe-cial form of flow around the body. Pressure difference (pressure drop), the

greater the more the gas flow, and hence it can serve as a measure of expenditure.

The frequency of breakdown of vortices is fixed detector vortex - a sensitive element in a channel cross flow around the body.

46



Advantages of this method are as follows: - Tolerance to pnevmoudaram; - Tolerance to the transducer interaction of its com-ponents with the flow.

The disadvantages of this technique include: - The lack of stability factor that determines the relationship between costs and frequency of breakdown of vortices; - The sensitivity of the flowmeter to the distortion of the flow of external mechanical vibration and pip-ing.

The method, based on the rotary converter flow is the interaction of two or one pair of rotors of a special form of permanent adhesion under the influence of gas flow.

As the rotor rotates shall be shut off gas vol-ume equal to the volume of the metering chamber between the shell and the rotor. From the measur-ing chamber gas displaced by the rotor of the con-verter mouth. For a complete turnover of the two rotors of the output cavity in the mouth moving vol-ume of gas flow, proportional to the volume of the measuring chamber.

Advantages: - Wide dynamic range of flow measurement; - Tolerance to the distortion of the flow transducer.

Disadvantages: - Sensitivity to pnevmoudaram.

Volumetric flow rate measurement method, based on ultrasound OL is based on the passage of the ultrasound beam to flow and to flow with the definition of the difference in time for the two beams.

Advantages: - Low error of measurement;

- Tolerance to the transducer interaction of its components with the flow;

- Wide dynamic range of flow measurement; - Possibility of installation of the flow meter without decompression pipeline.

Disadvantages: - Sensitivity to external disturbances of the flow and mechanical vibration of pipeline; - High cost.

Next, is not small, an important method of gas flow is massive. By converters flow of this method include the following: Coriolis, termoanemetriches-kie.

The method, based on the Coriolis OL is based on the passage of the flow on the oscillating loop with a constant frequency converter.

Advantages: - No sensitivity to the environment both low-and high-viscosity; - Low accuracy measurements.

Advantages: - No sensitivity to the environment both low-and high-viscosity; - Low error of measurement; - Tolerance flow meter flow distortions.

The method, based on termoanemetricheskom PR, based on the relation between the amount of heat lost heated body placed in a flow of mass and velocity jet circumfluent it. In the pipeline is placed sensor, heated to a certain set temperature. The value of this temperature is kept within the sensor. If the flow through the pipeline, which has its own temperature, much lower than fixed, is cooling the sensitive element. Bulb has sensors that measure temperature, refrigerated, remove the sensitive element and compare it with given. For changes (from the difference of these temperatures) can be seen on the flow environment.

Advantages: - Wide dynamic range of flow measurement; - Tolerance to pnevmoudaram.

Disadvantages: - Additional error due to the presence of speakers of the converter.

Thus, the review methods of measuring gas flow showed that all methods can be divided into three broad groups: - The method of alternating pressure; - The method of volumetric flow rate; - Method of mass flow.

Each method is based on different flow con-verters.

Altogether, In all we need to compare the qual-ity of the accounting methods, which are presented in Table 1, and also give a quantitative description of the relationship of these indicators, which are given in Table 2.

47

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 Table 1. Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting

method is volumetric flow rate method is mass flow Show-tor

method

change-tion of the pres-sure

vortex rotary Ultra-sound

korioltsovy

Tnrmoanem-

etrichesky Dy-

namic range meas-ure-

ments of

flow

Nar-row Narrow Wide Wide Narrow Wide

Sensi-tivity to

pnevmou-da-ram

No No Yes No Yes No

Sensi-tivity to the vis-

cosity of the envi-ron-ment

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Sensi-tivity to

distort the flow

Yes Yes No Yes No Yes

Sensi-tivity to

exter-nical vibra-tion

Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Accu-racy of

meas-ure-

ments

Greater Greater Greate

r Small Small Greater

The Low Low Aver- High High Average

cost of

measuring

age

Table 2. The Quantitative parity of quality indica-tors of methods of the account

method is volumetric flow rate method is mass flow Showtor

method change-tion of the pressure

vortex rotary Ultrasound korioltsovy

Tnrmoanem-etrichesky

Consump-tion of gas, Nm3/h

From 6 to 200 000

From 6 to 200 000

From 23 to 40 000

From 0 to 200 000

From 30 to 70 000

From 0 to 200 000

Dynamic range measure-ments

to 1:14 to 1:60 to 1:160 to 1:400 to 1:20 to 1:260

Excess pressure, MPa

From 0,06 to 25

From 0,05 to 25

From 0,2 to 1,6

From 0 to 22

From 0,1to 16

From 0 to 10,3

Accuracy of measure-ments SI, %

From ±0,6 to ±3,3

From ±0,6 to ±2,8

From ±1,1 to ±4,4

From ±1,1 to ±2,8

From ±0,6 to ±0,8

From ±1,7 to ±3,3

References:

1. Zolotarev SA, Osipov AS Modern industrial units of commercial gas. Brief history and immedi-ate prospects / / Energoanaliz and energy effi-ciency - 2005, 4.

2. GOST 303198.0 Gas Natural. Methods for calculating physical properties. General Provisions.

3. www.npptec.ru 4. Zolotarevsky SA, Osipov AS For in matters

of choice of units of commercial gas / / Gas Indus-try of Russia - 2006, 1.

AUTOMATION OF MEASURMENTS COMPUTER MASS SPECTROMETRY A.G. Chugunov, M.A. Shalutov, L.N. Orlikov, M.S. Voronin.

ТUSUR, Tomsk, Lenin 40, (3822)413939, [email protected].

The carried out researches. The summary. In the given work the measuring device of

partial pressure on the basis of a multimeter in-terfaced to the COMPUTER is considered.

Adjustment of the voltmeter for signal read-ing.

The software is developed, for remote ad-justment and management of the voltmeter by means of the COMPUTER, by using of language Pascal. It allows to operate voltmeter V7-78 by means of an international language of com-mands SCPI (Standard Command for Program-mable Interface) to receive and keep on the COMPUTER the information from the measuring device, and also to analyze the obtained data at graph construction.

Problem essence. For processing of measurements, digital

representation of the parameters is perspective, allowing to raise speed and accuracy of meas-urement [1].

The method of solution. Measurement of signals was made with

frequency of 1-2 Hz by multimeter V7-78 with signal processing on the COMPUTER by means of the developed software.

48

http://www.npptec.ru/


Commands of language SCPI have hier-archical structure. Related commands are grouped in the general knot. Syntax of command language shows the majority of commands in the form of sets capital and lower case letters. SENSe is a command keyword. VOLTage and FREQuency - keywords of the second level. DC and VOLTage - keywords of the third level. FETCh - a command of transfer of indications from internal memory of the device in the mem-ory of the COMPUTER.

The description of experimental installa-tion.

Experimental installation represents a omegatron measuring device of partial pressure, connected to voltmeter V7-78 interfaced to the COMPUTER.

Voltmeter V7-78. Voltmeter V7-78 is the modern measuring

device possessing wide functionality. Ability quickly and precisely to fix in memories of value of an entrance signal, presence of joints of communication, allow to solve by means of the given device a number of applied problems.

The device provides speed of measure-ment to 50 indications in a second. The buffer of memory of the device is capable to keep 512 values, suitable for reading on algorithm FIFO (first input first output). The maximum speed of data transmission on interface RS-232 is equal 9600 bits a second

The description of the developed soft-ware

It is possible to present the developed software as 3 modules: the basic, communica-tions with the voltmeter and the buffer, which in turn can be divided into submodules. On fig. 1 the scheme of interaction of modules of the soft-ware is represented.

Fig. 1. – The scheme of interaction of modules of the software.

Basis the module (it is allocated by a con-tinuous rectangle) carries out link functions be-tween submodules and carries out the basic logic of the program. The basic module to func-tional signs shares on 7 submodules (are allo-cated by dotted rectangles) carrying out prob-lems:

1. Giving of commands to the voltmeter; 2. Display of data to the screen for viewing; 3. Display of the help on software use on the

screen; 4. Saving of data on the COMPUTER hard

disk; 5. Clearing of the buffer of the accepted val-

ues; 6. Displaying to the screen of the graph of

function: the accepted values from time; 7. Maintenance of a correct exit from the pro-

gram; The module of communication with the volt-

meter provides transfer of commands from the operator to the voltmeter and receiving of data on the communication interface RS-232.

It is possible to present work of the module of communication with the voltmeter as 3 stages:

1. Port Initialization; 2. Data writing in port; 3. Data reading from port. All work with port is conducted by means of

language Assembler. Port initialization assumes definition of val-

ues of all necessary for work of the interface of parameters. These parameters are port number, speed in bods (bits per second), and parameters according to a format of bits of the register of management of a line - LCR (Line Control Regis-ter).

At system initialization BIOS brings base ad-dresses in the special area of data which are to 0:40 address. Usually base COM1 address mat-ters 3F8H, COM2 - 2F8H.

Data writing in port is carried out by proce-dure: Procedure WriteCOM (B:Byte); assem-bler;

Asm Mov Dx, BaseAdr Mov Al, B Out Dx, Al End; Variable BaseAdr - stores the base address

of port equal 3F8H. Variable B - stores the trans-ferred byte of the information.

Data reading from port is carried out by func-tion:

Function ReadCOM: Byte; assembler; Asm Mov Dx, BaseAdr In Al, Dx End;

49


Variable BaseAdr - stores the base address of port equal 3F8H. Variable B - stores the ac-cepted byte of the information.

It is necessary to notice, that operation of reading (record) of data is made during an order 0.1мкs. This time can be not enough that the communication channel has passed in a condi-tion of readiness for reception (transfer) of data. Therefore it is necessary to repeat record opera-tion in port a quantity of times, i.e. to add anal-ogy of expectation of readiness of a communica-tion channel for data transmission. It is neces-sary to add also processing of errors.

The read data are located in the buffer where they can be read for viewing from the monitor of the COMPUTER, constructions of the graph, saving on the COMPUTER hard disk.

On the scheme thin arrows designate logic exits and inputs in modules. Large arrows show logic of moving and use of data.

As a whole the principle of work of the soft-ware consists in the following:

1. Operator sets a command in conformity with language SCPI manually or by means of a standard set of functions provided in the soft-ware.

2. Command will automatically be trans-formed to a format suitable for transfer and sent to the voltmeter through the communication in-terface.

3. Software automatically interrogates the buffer of output of the voltmeter and keeps data in an operative computer memory.

4. Read data are accessible to processing. Experimental results. Analysis of structure of gas (spectrometry). For obtaining of a mass spectrum of ana-

lyzed gas the analyzer of a mass spectrometer by means of the generator adjust on ions with

various mass numbers and register their pas-sage through a collector in the form of series of peaks. The greatest peak is registered at coinci-dence of resonant frequency of excitation of an ion of certain weight (f) with frequency of the generator. On fig. 2 dependence of pressure in a spectrometer from time is shown.

Fig. 2. – Dependence of peak of pressure in a spectrometer from time.

Conclusions. Device tests have shown its perspectivity at

measurement of partial pressure for analogue devices in technological processes. In the long term software improvement will allow to raise frequency of processing of the signals, neces-sary for a number of practical applications.

Referenc 1. Agurov. P.V. Serial interfaces of PC.

Programming practice. - SPb.: BhV-Peterburg, 2005. - 496 pp.

50

Section III

TECHNOLOGY, EQUIPMENT AND MACHINE-BUILDING PRODUCTION AUTOMATION

51

Section III: Technology, equipment and machine-building production automation

SINGULARITY ZONES OF THE NONORTHOGONAL CNC MACHINE Zelensky А., Suominen O., Ritala R.

Tampere University of Technology, Department of Automation Science

and Engineering,

P.O. Box 692, FIN - 33101 Tampere, Finland

E-mail: [email protected] Abstract In this work the dynamic characteristics and

singularity zones of the nonorthogonal CNC ma-chine with two degrees of freedom intended for processing of planar objects [1] are analyzed. Analysis is based on a method that covers the work surface with straight lines. Hence the dy-namic characteristics and the singularity zones are studied in a general way. The method allows both optimization of the ratio of planimetric speed and accuracy of the working tool and identification of inactive zones.

1. Introduction Present CNC machines for processing of

planar objects apply Cartesian coordinate ma-nipulations in which the main speed vector is simply defined as . However,

such systems require high constructive redun-dancy and also have limited speed and accuracy characteristics.

2y

2x

2 VVV +=

CNC machines that use non-orthogonal co-ordinates have improved technical characteris-tics and lower constructive redundancy. How-ever the main speed vector of work coordinates has nonlinear characteristics in the non-orthogonal coordinates. As a result there are high variations in the speed and accuracy char-acteristics, even singularities, which hinder the development of these machines.

This article presents research on the dy-namic characteristics and singularity zones of the main speed vector used in the nonorthogo-nal CNC machine [1].

2. Method for definition of dynamic char-

acteristics of the nonorthogonal cnc machine Drawings for CNC machines may be done in

any graphics format on a computer. The graphic format is then interpreted linearly and expressed as a vector file [2]. Hence it is sufficient to ana-lyze the dynamic characteristics and singularity zones of the nonorthogonal CNC machine for straight lines. Figure 1 shows the work surface with radius R with a line L located on it. The points of beginning and end are defined as M1 and M2, respectively. We consider a family of

such lines, all with their center at point Mc of coordinates x = 0.707R, y = 0.707R. The family of lines is obtained by rotating around the center Mc by an angle U ranging between 0 and π .

X

У

O

O X

U

М2

М1

Мс

R

Work surface

L

Figure 1: A segment of the nonorthogonal CNC machine's work surface

Our method determines the dynamic charac-

teristics of the nonorthogonal mechanism on each of the work angles (β -arm angle, ϕ -work surface angle).

00.1

0.20.3

0.40.5

0.60.7

0.80.9

1

0

50

100

150

200-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

t

U

βω

Figure 2: Speed of coordinate β when L = R. Time axis: unit time is the time required to move from M1 to M2; speed along the line is constant

Starting from the equations for the angular coordinates of the nonorthogonal machine pre-sented in [1] the work angles were differentiated with respect to time t so as to derive the angular

53

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 velocities dt/dβωβ = and dt/dϕωϕ = at all possible values of U. Figure 2 and 3 show how the work angle speeds depend on time at all U.

00.1

0.20.3

0.40.5

0.60.7

0.80.9

1

0

50

100

150

200-30

-20

-10

0

10

20

30

t

U

φω

Figure 3: Speed of coordinate ϕ when L = R. Time axis as in Figure 2

These figures show that depending on the

location of the line on the work surface angular speeds vary largely. When the line approaches the center of rotation of the work surface the speed has a singularity.

3. Definition of singularity zones of the

nonorthogonal CNC machine conditioned by restrictions on speed

No singularities occur in classical CNC ma-chines working in the Cartesian system since the movement of the tool relating to a working sur-face is strictly orthogonal. In our work singularity zones are analyzed because in the physical re-alization of the two-mobile mechanism the ratio of angular speeds

βϕ ωω / may reach values critical from the point of view of mechanics and accuracy in practical applications.

Using the dependence of the angular speeds (Figure 2, 3) we have determined how the angu-lar speed ratio depends on angle U and on time along the line by using the modulus

βϕ ωωω /=

(see Figure4). The singularity zones now occur at the areas where either the speed ϕω passes the maximum achievable value or the arm is stopped and accuracy may deteriorate.

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1 0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

1800

10

20

Ut

ω

Figure 4: Modulus of the relation of the angular speeds restricted to 20MAX =ω

Figure 4 shows that when a piece of the line

approaches the center of rotation of the work surface, the value ω increases rapidly. We have chosen to define the singularity zone as situa-tions exceeding 20MAX =ω and marked the boundary of this region with the dashed line. It can be seen that if the main vector of planimetric speed is to be kept constant on the straight line the working zone must be limited from the center of the work surface according to the maximum

MAXω . 4. Conclusion In this work the singularity zones and dy-

namic characteristics of the nonorthogonal CNC machine have been presented. This research allows for the estimation of the basic technical advantages of the nonorthogonal mechanism and allows for optimization of speed and accu-racy when positioning the working tool taking into account restrictions on the working zone.

5. References 1. A. A. Zelensky, “Device for cutting flat

material with a turning table (Proceedings of the universities. North-Caucasian region. Technical sciences)” Rostov – on – Don: 2008. – Р.102 – 103

2. S. Suh, S. Kang, D. Chung, I. Stroud, Theory and Design of CNC Systems, Springer, 2008.

54


GENERAL INFORMATION ON PULSE WELDING M.A. Krampit

Scientific adviser A.G.Krampit, CS, associate professor

Yurga Institute of Technologies (branch) of Tomsk Polytechnic University,

652050, Russia, Kemerovskaya oblast, Leningradskaya st, 26

E-mail: [email protected] Arc welding is still being developed. There

are some stages of development such as im-proving of process stability and quality of prod-ucts, increasing of productivity.

Mechanized methods of welding in the me-dium of protective gases, specifically carbon di-oxide, were of great importance. But they had some disadvantages such as splashing of metal droplets, that needed further finishing and re-sulted a higher cost of a product. Also there was a problem of joining thin lists because burn-through probability was high.

In the 1960s methods of controlled transfer of electrode metal were developed. A method of short pulse pile-ups on the principal current suf-ficient for droplet detachment was developed. The lower limit of welding current decreased 2-3 times, that allowed to join thin materials [1].

Pulse processes can be classified as follows (see Fig.1).

Fig 1. Types of welding processes

The term “Modulated current welding (MCW)” is the most common term, and MCW is used for some purposes [2]:

- providing of controlled transfer of electrode wire; that increases stability of the process and reduce spraying;

- control of rate and crystallization of welding puddle; thermo-cyclic effect on HAZ;

- successful forming of welding seam in dif-ferent positions.

Current strength modulating is useful at welding in CO2; short circuit is applied to limit current strength at the moment when a metal droplet is near to drop. This method allows re-ducing splatter of metal to 40 – 50 per cent.

The two most applicable methods of welding are consumable electrode welding [3,4] and pulsed arc welding [5].

Consumable electrode welding provides con-trolled transferring of electrode metal; pulse arc welding affects properties of joints at the ex-pense of thermal effect on the welding puddle and heat affected zone. Current pulse at con-sumable electrode welding is f>25 Hz, at pulse arc welding it is f<25 Hz (see Fig.2).

Fig 2.

The main aspect of controlled transfer of

welding metal is droplet detachment by every pulse and possibility to control the frequency of their transfer. It is considered that pulse duration should be as long as to detach a droplet. If a droplet detaches at the current strength near to that of amplitude (see Fig.3), metal transfer is attended by a higher splashing. Droplet detach-

55


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 ment at the end of pulse act provides controlled metal transfer at all attitude positions with mini-mum loss of metal splashing. As compared with nonconsumable electrode welding, pulse arc welding increased productivity 3-8 times and reduced deformation with the same quality of welded joints. Pulse arc welding can be used for vital constructions made from different steels, nickel alloys and titanium of 1 mm thickness; also it can be used for welding in all attitude po-sitions.

Fig 3.

Pulse arc welding provides high quality of

joints. It allows controlling of electrode metal transfer and improves the stability of the process itself as well as the stability of arc burning and forming of joints in different attitude positions.

The most common protective gases are Ar and its mixture with carbon dioxide (CO2) espe-cially for welding of steels.

A number of investigations on process con-trol of pulse arc welding were performed at Yurga Institute of technologies of Tomsk Poly-technic University. It was determined that the welding condition is to be stabilized for stable arc burning, joint forming and metallurgy reactions [6].

Synergetic control systems for pulse arc welding modes have been developed recently. At this method of control of consumable elec-trode welding, generated current pulses are cor-related with rate of feeding of electrode wire. Amplitude, width and frequency of current pulses are programmed so that every pulse is attended by a droplet detachment at steady rate of elec-trode melting and constant arc length. In syner-getic system only one or two parameters are varied, but in common pulse arc welding control system there are much more variable parame-ters (see Fig.3) [1].

Fig 4.

Pulse arc welding has a disadvantage such

as a higher cost of welding devices and need for care cleaning of welded edges.

At pulse welding wire feeding, and electrode is given a pulse to the puddle, under the pulse a droplet of melted metal on the butt end gets an accessory kinetic energy, that, at instant stop of electrode, enable to cause forced droplet de-tachment or transfer it to the puddle. Short-time feeding pulses are overlaid on steady compo-nent of wire feeding rate; discreet pulses of feed-ing and reverse feeding of electrode wire are used [7].

Steady process of welding with pulse wire feeding can be employed in protective gases CO2, Ar and gas mixtures. At 100-400 A current and 1,2 and 1,6 mm wire pulse feeding, waste of metal and losses from splashing decrease al-most twice.

Seams are 20-30% wider and have more smooth transition with base metal. Welding with consumable electrode facilitates performing seams in different attitude positions and in-creases quality of metal sheets welding. The joints possess improved mechanical properties.

Pulse methods allow controlling of electrode metal transfer. The stability of welding process and arc burning are improved; welding joint for-mation in different attitude positions provides quality of joints.

Conclusion Pulse welding processes improve productiv-

ity; also they allow welding of thin sheets of metal without penetration. Splashing and ex-penses for cleaning surfaces from droplets are also reduced. Pulse welding processes have a wholesome effect on seam formation at the ex-penses of thermal exposure on welding puddle and HAZ.

56


5. Вагнер Ф.А. Оборудование и способы сварки пульсирующей дугой. М.: Энергия, 1980. 117с.

Literature 1. Лащенко Г. И. Способы дуговой сварки

стали плавящимся электродом. К.: “Екотехнологiя”,2006. – 384 с. 6. Крампит Н.Ю., Крампит А.Г., Князьков

С.А. Особенности импульсного управления процессом сварки длинной дугой в углеки-слом газе. Автоматизация и современные технологии. 2002. 9. С.12-15.

2. Заруба И. И., Лебедев В. К., Шейко П. П. Сварка модулированным током. Автомати-ческая сварка. 1968. 11. С. 35-40.

3. Ленивкин В.А., Дюргеров Н.Г., Сагиров Х.Н. Технологические свойства сварочной дуги в защитных газах. М.: Машиностроение. 1989. 264 с.

7. Воропай Н.М., Бенидзе З.Д., Бучинский В.Н. Особенности процесса сварки в СО2 с импульсной подачей электродной проволоки. Автоматическая сварка. 1989. 2. С.23-26, 36.

4. Потапьевский А.Г. Сварка в защитных газах плавящимся электродом. Часть 1. Сварка в активных газах. Издание 2-е, пере-работанное. К.: «Екотехнологiя», 2007. 192с.

FORECASTING PRODUCTIVITY OF PROCESS LAYERED LASER SINTERING

ON THE BASIS OF FORM AND ORIENTATION FACTOR Saprykin A. А, Walter A.V., Saprykina N.A.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, RUSSIA, 652050, Kemerovskaya oblast,

Yurga, Leningradskaya st., 26

E-mail: [email protected] In modern economics the competitive

strength of commodity is determined by quality and timeliness of appearance of a specimen product in the market. Specially acutely problem costs(stands) before engineering, as on firms, as a rule, low-productive methods of simulation and manufacturing of a technological equipment (press-tool die, models for a casting, electrode tool, designer prototypes will be used, the mas-ter etc.), that does not allow in oblate terms to conduct technical training of new productions. By one of paths of the solution of this problem is encompass byed applying of rapid manufactur-ing process of the prototypes by layer-by-layer synthesis of a physical copy of different objects on the basis 3D of CAD-model. Having simulta-neously by high flexibility, the rapid manufactur-ing processing of the prototypes allow to esteem the multivariate technological and designer solu-tions.

For today there is a wide variety of rapit pro-totyping technology. They are base on different physical processes and materials for creation of the prototypes. Most perspective is the process of a layer-by-layer sintering of a powder material by a laser beam. This technologies allows to

receive functional production, is practically non-waste technology and most universal, as has the most broad selection of model materials.

At the same the time of generation of model can vary from several hours about several days. Thus the above than tolerance requirement of model, the more durating process of its obtain-ing. Therefore raising the productivity of process layered laser sintering, including a laser sinter-ing, is an actual problem.

On productivity of process layered laser sin-tering exert influence set of the factors. It is the requirements of a reproduction accuracy, method of formation, scan velocity, property of a sintered material, orientation of model concern-ing a direction of synthesizing, time of verifica-tion, time of slicing (partitioning algorithm) etc. All indicated factors are to some extent interde-pendent.

The greatest influencing is rendered by thickness of a layer. it directly depends on com-plexity of the shape and requirements of accu-racy, that is from manufacturability of an work-piece.

During research of methods of a raising the productivity of a laser sintering process of pow-

57

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 der materials, the way prototyping with variable thickness of a layer was offered. At an value es-timation of reduction of time of the prototype manufacturing of as contrasted to by method of a laser sintering with constant thickness of a layer has become apparent, that with other things being equal (volume of an workpiece, demanded accuracy etc.) the datum depends on the shape of the made prototype. Thus the time T, expended on its manufacturing is proportional to quantity of layers N, on which one the work-piece is broken:

, (1) ⋅T = t NWhere t - mean time on manufacturing of

one layer of the prototype. In turn quantity of layers in inverse propor-

tion to average value of thickness of a layer Zm:

m

HN =Z , (2)

Where H - height of sintered model. If to consider some section of an workpiece

(Fig. 1), the maximum thickness of a layer Z, ensuring demanded accuracy of an workpiece h, will be determined by the shape of the prototype:

ϕhZ =cos , (3)

Where φ – angle of ascent of a nominal pro-file.

.

h

Z

ϕ

Fig.1

At transition to consideration of a volumetric

body the value Z will depend on relative orienta-tion of single normal vector to a surface of an workpiece n and unit vector of a direction of a technological axis z. The orientation can be ex-pressed through a following parameter:

×z np =. (4)

Then from the main identity of trigonometry we can receive maximum thickness of a layer for some surface segment of model:

2

hZ =1 - p . (5)

To determine mean thickness of a sin-tered layer on all surfaces of model, it is neces-sary to average and value of a parameter p. For this purpose we shall take advantage of repre-

sentation, adopted in the computer graphics of surfaces as a set of adjacent triangles (poly-gons) (fig. 2):

( )× ⋅∑

∑

z nn

i ii=1

n

ii=1

FP =

F, (6)

Where P - mean on all model value of orien-tation of normals parameter of model surfaces; ni - value of single normal vectors of polygons of surfaces of model; Fi - area of polygons of sur-faces.

nn n1

n2

n3

n4

Fig. 2

Thus it is necessary to allow, that the sur-

faces, normal which one are collinear axes z (on Fig.3 are selected by a heavy line), are reshaped irrespective of tolerance requirements of a sur-face and thickness of a sintered layer. Such sur-faces should not participate in definition of maximum thickness of a layer. Thus, at calcula-tion of a parameter P in expression (6) it is nec-essary to allow for normals and areas only of those polygons, for which one is satisfied condi-tion:

×z ni < 1 . (7) nZ

Fig. 3

Let's consider a mean time on manufacturing

of one layer of the prototype figuring in expres-sion (1). It can be defined from a following equa-tion:

⋅ ⋅O

St =k d v , (8)

Where S - average value of the areas of sec-tions of model, d - diameter of a spot of a laser

58

Section III: Technology, equipment and machine-building production automation beam; kO - factor overlap; v - scan velocity of a laser beam.

Average value of the areas of sections of model can be defined as follows:

ΦS =H , (9)

Where Φ – volume of model. In view of expressions (2 - 9) we shall

copy an equation (1) as follows:

⋅ ⋅ ⋅

2

O

Φ 1 - PT =k d v h . (10)

In a Fig. 4 some volumetric bodies with the applicable parameters of manufacturability are adduced. It is necessary to mark group of pris-matic bodies, for which one of P = 1 apart. At a formal substitution of a given data of a parame-ter of manufacturability in expression (10) we shall receive absurd on the maiden view out-come - time for manufacturing of such prototype will be equal to zero point.

Р=0,785Р=1 Fig. 4 Comparative estimations of a parameter of manufacturability P.

The reason of such outcome is gobed up in equations (2) and (3). The business that accu-racy h of such models will be provided in inde-pendence of a layer thickness, however physi-cally thickness of a layer is always limited or

technological capabilities of the equipment, or altitude of model. Therefore in the formula (2) quantities of layers can not be less unit. Despite of said above parameter P in any case allows the designer on a design stage of an workpiece to estimate as far as technologic it will be.

With reference to a layer-by-layer laser sin-tering, in view of technological modes of proc-essing, the formula for capacity rating, after a substitution in it of expression (10), start a follow-ing view:

1

1

( )n

DP NLi PPi

QT t

=

=

+ +⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ∑

2

O

Φ 1 - Pk d v h

T+,

Where: n - quantity of layers, TDP - time of data preparation. TPP - time of postprocessing, tNLi - time of no-load. Esteeming methods of an estimation of pro-

ductivity of laser sintering process it is necessary to note analogy to anyone by another of 2,5-coordinate by a method shaping.

As was marked above, the value of a pa-rameter of manufacturability P depends on a direction of a technological axis z. It is a conse-quent of a fact of common knowledge, that the run time depends on orientation of bar concern-ing coordinate system of a production equip-ment. Thus of P can represent itself as efficiency function by optimization of a position of bar on the machine tool from the point of view of mini-mization of costs of time on processing and shown tolerance requirements of an workpiece.

59

Section IV

ELECTRO MECHANICS

61

Section IV: Electro mechanics

THE INFLUENCE OF CABLE ARMOR ON THERMAL AGIN OF PLASTICIZED PVC

Anisimova O.A., Annenkov Yu.M.

Tomsk polytechnic university, Lenin avenue 30, Tomsk, Russia, 634050


Nowadays the first place is polyvinylchloride

(PVC) plastic in the Russian cable industry [1]. Plasticized PVC is widely used low and middle voltage cables as insulation and cover. The in-ternal factors are the reason of insulation and cover degradation and the reason of cable work-ing time decreasing.

On the one hand the aging mechanism of plasticized PVC depends on интенсивности и времени воздействия of internal factors (heat, electrical field, etc.). On the other hand it de-pends on plasticate composition. The polymer thermal aging is well known [2]. There is no reli-able in-situ method of polymer structure investi-gation. That is why polymer aging mechanism is estimated by mechanical and electrical proper-ties changing.

PVC plastic investigation [3-5] showed that PVC plastic color changing and properties changing during thermal aging is the reason of two processes:

1. Plasticate composition changing be-cause of diffusion and evaporation of its compo-nents;

2. PVC macromolecules thermo degrada-tion

These processes depend on plasticized PVS composition and temperature.

Cable core, armor, screen, braid, etc. influ-ence on these processes during cable service too. The influence of different cable elements on insulation and cover aging investigated not enough.

КВВГ 4 х 2,5 – 0,6 and КВБбШв 4 х 2,5 – 0,66 (GOST 1508-78) was taken for investiga-tion. These cables are different from steel zinced armor (fig.1).

The investigation of these cables will allow estimating a role of armor in thermal aging. Insu-lation and cover of cables are from plasticized PVC. It is necessary to say that cables are meet standards.

Thermal aging were during 600 hours ac-cording European standard IEC 8111-1-2 (Meth-ods for general application. Section two – Ther-mal aging methods).

After 70 – 80 hours fat condensate is formed between armor and cover in КВБбШв cable. Af-

ter 100 hour aging condensate wept from cables on oven floor.

There is no condensate in КВВГ cables (without armor).

Condensate creation starts from axis of ar-mor belt. The more aging time the more conden-sate is spread on belt surface. It can be explain if we will suppose that the maximum pressure of plasticizer evaporations is in place where armor belt joins closely to cable cover. Plasticizer evaporations mix with saturated air and conden-sate on the belt surface. By the action of the evaporation filler particles and other inorganic components are deleted from cover.

As a result free area is increase between cover and armor. Here is accumulated more and more condensate. As a result there are two ar-eas in plasticized PVC cover (fig.2).

Fig 1. (а) КВВГ cable; (б) КВБбШв cable. 1 – cuprum core; 2 – insulation; 3 – inner cover; 4 – zinced steel cable armoring; 5 – cover.

1

2

5

а)

б)

1

2

3

4

5

63


In the fist area (fig.2) there is gradient distri-bution of plasticizer due to diffusion and evapo-ration. The plasticizer concentration can be more than original concentration. Thus glass transition temperature will be different in different layers of first area.

In the second area (which contact with ar-mor) plasticizer is deleted by condensate. The more aging time the more micro cracks increase in the direction of cover surface (fig.2).

It is necessary to say that above mentioned processes will have a place under any tempera-ture. The less temperature the slowly processes.

К The aging conditions are different for inner cover. Firstly the temperature gradient is less. Under laboratory condition the heat is from steel armor. In practice the core is heat source. It is entirely possible that condensate will appear between inner cover and armor. Secondly inner cover is in contact with insulation. It is a reason of inter diffusion of plasticizer. Finally the evapo-ration pressure is blocked condensate diffusion under armor surface.

ВБбШв

These processes are the reason of low influ-ence of the condensate on inner cover thermal aging.

As a result the plasticizer inter diffusion of

insulation and cover materials is the main proc-ess for inner cover (fig.3). After aging inner cover hadn’t cracks. But it was impossible to separate cover from insulated cores.

Figure 3. Insulated cores with inner cover of armoring cables

After aging the cover of КВВГ cables did not

change almost (fig.4). The cover of КВБбШв cables had shrinkage. There were a lot of cracks on the surface of these cables.

The influence of cable armor on thermal ag-ing of plasticized PVC cover is follows: steel ar-mor is condensate of plasticizer evaporation. The condensate is corrosion environment for cable cover. It delete filler from PVC and it can be reason of molecules degradation. As a result the process of thermal aging start from cover inner surface which contact with steel armor.

а)

б)

1

2 КВВГ before aging

Figure 2. The plasticized PVC cover of ar-moring cables changing during the aging: (а) before aging; (б) after aging.

КВВГ after aging Figure 4. Photo of the КВВГ cover before and after aging

64


2. Тагер А.А. Физико-химия полимеров, М., Химия, 1968, с. 536.

It is necessary to emphasize that above mentioned processes are not the reason of de-fect cables. All investigated samples meet stan-dards. The reason of these processes is the ca-ble armor. To more clear understanding of poly-mers aging processes need investigations of inter influence of all cable construction elements.

3. Nedjar M., Boubakeur A., Béroual A., Bournane M. Thermal aging of polyvinyl chloride used in electrical insulation. Ann. Chim. Sci. Mat., v. 28, 2003, 97 – 104.

4. Nedjar M., Béroual A., Boubakeur A. In-fluence of thermal aging on the electrical proper-ties of poly(vinyl chloride). Journal of Applied Polymer Science, v. 102, 2006, 4728 – 4733.

The literature: 1. Миткевич А.С., Паверман Н.Г., Елаги-

на А.Н. Кабельные композиции на основе по-лиэтилена и поливинилхлорида. Тенденции развития в России. Кабели и провода, 1, 2007, 3 – 7.

5. Ekelund M., Edin H., Gebbe U.W. Long-term performance of poly(vinyl chloride) cables. Part 1: Mechanical and electrical performances. Polymer Degradation and Stability, v. 92, 2007, 617 – 629.

SENSOR LESS FIELD ORIENTED CONTROL OF PMSM

Saeidi Saeid, [email protected]

Supervisor: A. S. Karakulov

Tomsk Polytechnic University

634050 Tomsk. Usova 21/2

1. Introduction Fig1:The structure of a PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motors

(PMSM)s are of great interest especially for in-dustrial application and robotic in low-medium power range , since they have superior feature such as compact size ,high torque/weight ratio, high torque inertia ratio(selmon 1994).A PMSM abandons the excitation winding and the rotor turns at the same speed as the stator field. The PMSM’s design eliminates the rotor copper losses, giving very high peak efficiency com-pared with a traditional induction motor. The power-to-weight ratio of a PMSM is also higher than induction machines.

2. Field Oriented Control (FOC)of PMSM The FOC structure of the PMSM is shown in

Fig2.

Fig 2: The structure of FOC 3. Modeling of a PMSM motor Coordinates are defined in Fig. 2. The α−β

frame is defined as the stationary reference frame; the d–q frame is defined as rotational ref-erence frame.

65



Fig3: Rotor and stator Coordinates in PMSM

A mathematical model of synchronous mo-

tors on the stationary reference frame is written as (1). Ld is equal to Lq in SPMSMs.

[v v ]α β Voltages on the two phase station-ary frame;

[i i ]α β Currents on the rotating reference frame

sR Stator resistance

d qL L L= = s stator reluctance . P Differential operator.

reθ Electrical angle Then a mathematical model of a PMSM is:

0(1)

0

v iR pL d fs sv iR pL dts s f

ψ αα αψβ β β

+= +

+

⎡ ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⎡ ⎤⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

And as it is shown at Fig 2 :

cos( ) (2)

sin( )f re

f ref

ψ θαψ

θψ β=

⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

4. Estimation of rotor angle: From the model of PMSM the rotor flux

linkage equitation is given by:

0+

0

(3)rv R i L ir s s

v R i L is sr r

ψ αψ α α α αψ ψβ β β β β

−= −∫ −

⎡ ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

cos( )0 0 (4)sin( )00

rr

r

ψ α θψ

ψ θβ= ⋅

⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦

0 the initial rotor angle θ − The initial rotor position can be estimated us-

ing the permanent magnet characteristics [3],[5]. Then the rotor angle can be found as:

arctan( ) (5)rre

r

ψ βθψ α

=

This observer is an ideal integrator without any offset compensation. Because of the error of initialization of rotor position that exists in any practical implementation, an ideal integrator will always drift. This ideal integrator generally is replaced by 1

p ω+ (Fig. 3)

Fig4: Flux linkage observer

If the feedback coefficient is equal the elec-

trical speed of the rotor flux, then the steady state error of position estimation error is constant for all range of speeds.

θ 0.24 raderror = The constant error can be compensated. But

transient time of estimation would increase for low speed. A adaptive PID regulator with vari-able time constant is recommended to improve the speed control loop characteristics.

Fig. 5: Start up speed response with a adaptiv PID regulator

As fig5. Shows a with a adaptive PID regula-

tor it is possible to improve the speed closed loop characteristics for low speed.

5. Experimental results The experimental results are obtained us-

ing a 4-pole surface PMSM, and a fixed point digital signal processor (DSP), TMS320F2407 is used to run field oriented control and position estimation algorithms. The control and estima-tion period is 83.4 sμ . The SVPWM switching fre-quency for insulated gate bipolar transistor is 12 kHz. Fig 6 shows the speed response for 1000 rpm.

66


Fig 6: Step response for speed = 1000 rpm 6. Conclusion The presented work demonstrates that

the measured terminal currents and voltages together with the machine parameters can be used to obtain a controlled start up of the SPMSM under servo condition. The recom-mended method for position estimation is simple and can be employed with Fixed point DSP .

The estimated position can be used in drive systems with SPMSM that requires a controlled torque start up under high load using the rated current which eliminates the rotor swing problem and gets ability to run FOC for a wide range of speed control for a better performance and to

estimate rotor speed for a closed loop speed control as well.

References: 1. A General Algorithm for Speed and Posi-

tion Estimation of AC Motors. Lennart Harnefors, Member, IEEE, and Hans-Peter Nee, Member, IEEE

2. A New Instantaneous Torque Control of PM Synchronous Motor for High Performance Direct Drive Applications. Se-Kyo Chung, Hyun-Soo Kim, Chang-Gyun Kim, and Myung-Joong Youn.

3. Initial Rotor Angle Detection Of A Non-Salient Pole Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine. Peter B. Schmidt Michael L. Gasperi Glen Ray Ajith H. Wijenayake

4. Permanent Magnet Synchronous Ma-chine Model for Real- Time Simulation. A. B. Dehkordi, Student Member, IEEE, A. M. Gole, Senior Member, IEEE, T. L. Maguire, Senior Member, IEEE

5. Sensorless control of surface permanent magnet synchronous motor using a new method. Zhengqiang Song *, Zhijian Hou, Chuanwen Ji-ang, Xuehao Wei

DEVELOPMENT OF ELECTRIC DRIVE FOR LABORATORY TESTBENCH

A.S. Tililyaev, A.A. Prelovskiy, K.V. Obraztsov

Scientific adviser: Assistant K.V. Obraztsov

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, av. Lenina, 30


mo

ems, but it per

des of operation and methods of DC motor speed pulse control should be studied.

There are first results of development, tuning and characteristic research of the test bench for DC motor pulse control studying in this paper. Control system is based on “Motor control” type of microcontrollers TMS320, produced by “Texas Instruments”. In spite of high cost of specialized microcontrollers for motor control syst

Currently, requirements to educational and professional training of specialists in the field of electrical drives and electrical equipment are considerably high.

Therefore necessity of creation of test bench for studying pulse control systems, using modern microcontroller digital control systems, is ap-peared.

For more successful studying a number of disciplines, it is necessary to create laboratory works, which help to receive practical skills in working with microcontrollers, which control elec-tric motors. And their main characteristics,

manently decreases, and application of mi-crocontrollers is economically sound.

Because of the semiconductor devices de-velopment, actuating motor pulse control is widely used. Its essence is to control the motor

67

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 speed not by value of input voltage, but by dura-tion of motor feeding by nominal voltage. The ma

t only in the machine-tool con

differ-ent

cy of electrical driv

(IPM) was mas-tered. IPM includes switches protective equip-

me

d peripherals. That’s why all analog driv

ties of test bench, functional sch l drive for test bench was crea

idge; filter capacitors;

nsor;

– DC motor;

p-plyi

rters with pulse-width modulation (PWM) of output voltage com

ws considerably imp

Converter includes non-controlled rectifier, fil-ter (capacitors) and converter of output voltage.

in advantage of the pulse control is decreas-ing of medium power consumption at the ex-pense of decreasing of medium current. [1]

Electrical drives with digital microprocessor control are used no

struction, robotized industry, but in the household appliances, medical equipment and automobile industry.

There are many reasons of electrical drives with digital microprocessor control usage. First of all, algorithms appliance, programmed for spe-cific operations, which enable productivity im-provement of output devices. Secondly, system flexibility is increased by means of rapid change of control program or sensors changeover. Thirdly, object control quality is improved, be-cause modern controllers allow to realize

control algorithms, such as fuzzy-logics, zero-overshoot response [2]. Precision and speed range of motor control is improved.

Application field of electrical drive in industry, transport and in household permanently ex-pands. At present more over 60 percent of all produced electrical energy in the world are con-sumed by electrical motors. Therefore, an effi-ciency of energy saving technologies is to a large degree determined by the efficien

e. Designing high-duty, compact and eco-nomical drive system is the priority orientation of modern techniques development.

Last decade of XX century was marked by great progress in the power electronics – the in-dustrial production of isolated gate bipolar tran-sistors (IGBT), rower modules, based on them and intellectual power modules

nt and interfaces for direct connection to mi-croprocessor control systems.

Increasing of a complexity factor in micro-processor techniques and using single-chip solu-tions are backgrounds for transfer from micro-processors to microcontrollers with inboard set of specialize

es control systems changed by digital control systems.

In terms of requirements to the structure and functional possibili

eme of electricated (figure 1). Key for figure 1: T – transformer; VD1…VD6 – diode brС1…С4 –CS – current seF – filter; MBR – speed sensor. For high speed controlled electric drive with

wide range of regulation, high precision and good energy characteristics, the converter, su

ng DC motor, must have low time lag, two-way conductivity and low internal resistance.

Bridge bidirectional transistor conve

pletely satisfy these requirements. Usage of bidirectional transistor converters

with PWM of output voltage allorove characteristics of complete DC electrical

drives with high-torque motors.

Figure 1 – Functional scheme of electrical drive for test bench

68


Elements of power circuit have been calcu-lated and selected. As a power module was se-lected IPM, РМ10RSK060 type, produced by Mitsubishi Electric, for current up to 10 A and voltage up to 600 V.

Module of this type represents constructive completed item, which demands a small number of additional components for its application and consists of power IGBT keys, fabricated in single case, with protective reverse diodes, current sensor, voltage sensor, temperature sensor and input, output control drivers.

Module’s feature is an availability of built-in current, voltage and temperature protections.

Built-in scheme solutions also realize feeding voltage monitoring and prohibit work of power keys if voltage value is smaller than a defined value. [3]

During design phase for research electrical drive, a simulation model, created under MatLab environment, was used.

Results of designing and experimental re-search of different commutation laws algorithms for PWM converter’s transistors and their influ-ence on drive’s energy characteristics are pre-sented in report.

The error of results convergence in model and in experiment is smaller than 8 percent, it indicates, that the model is adequate and it is possible to use it in studying process together with test bench.

Literature 1. Электротехнический справочник: В 4

т. Т. 4. Использование электрической энергии / Под общ. ред. профессоров МЭИ В.Г. Гера-симова и др. – 8-е изд., испр. и доп. – М.: Из-дательство МЭИ, 2002. – 696 с. (Electrotechni-cal reference book: In 4 v. V. 4. Usage of electri-cal energy/ under the editorship of MEI profes-sors V.G. Gerasimov and others. – 8-th publica-tion, corrected and supplemented. – М.: Publish-ing house MEI, 2002. – 696 pages).

2. Energy Efficiency in Motor Driven Sys-tems / editors F. Parasiliti, P. Bertoldi. — Berlin : Springer-Verlag, 2003. — 565 p. : il.

3. Буркин Е.Ю. Основы преобразова-тельной техники: учебное пособие. – Томск: Изд-во ТПУ, 2005. – 88 с. (Burkin E.Y. Basics of converter techniques: tutorial. – Tomsk: Publishing house TPU, 2005. – 88 pages).

COST EFFICIENCY OF THE IMPROVED INDUCTION MOTORS AT

THE CHANGE OF MOTOR SPEED Tyuteva P.V.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 30 Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, Russia 634050

E-mail: [email protected] The problem of energy saving with the elec-

tric drive of pump units is actual to consider mainly with reference to the variable speed drive, at the same time the opportunity of the electric power economy due to rotation fre-quency regulation of the induction motor has been proved and rather long been realized. In the world practice alongside with the application of the variable speed electric drive there was realized a trend of the given problem solution due to designing and manufacturing of the im-proved induction motors [1]. The concerns To-shiba and Siemens produce the improved induc-tion motors with the improved energy parame-ters according to the accepted agreements - in the USA “Energy Policy Act” - EPACT, in the European Union specification CEMEP.

The purpose of the given work is the estima-tion of energy characteristics of the variable speed electric drive of pump units on the basis of the improved induction drive at the account of mechanical characteristics features of pump units as electric drive loading machines.

For effective energy saving maintenance at application of the variable speed drive with in-duction motor the following variants are possible: improvement of the induction motor without changing cross-sectional dimension; improve-ment of the induction motor while changing sta-tor and rotor geometry; the choice of general purpose induction motor of greater power. The offered direction realization of [1] induction motor improvements for the variable speed drive con-nected with increasing the mass and overall pa-

69


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 rameters allows to design the machine with im-proved power characteristics and smaller ex-penses falling on to operation life period. The greatest result in the given area was achieved by such concerns as ABB [2] and Danfoss [3], the usage developed by them frequency converters allows to save consumed energy, due to in-crease of an overall work efficiency of a drive at partial loading.

Energy characteristics such as efficiency, power factor, losses in the induction motor and the amount of the consumed energy allow to estimate the work of the system as a whole at the account of induction motor, pump and pipe-line characteristics such as mechanical charac-teristics.

The following types of the induction motors 4IIER132М4, 4IIER160М4, 4IIER180М4, 4IIER200L4 with rated power Р2r equal according to 11 kW, 18,5 kW, 30 kW, 45 kW have been chosen for carrying out the calculations. Im-proved induction motors which are designed on the base of basic machines possess the im-proved power and economic parameters which are answered the requirements СЕМЕР on effi-ciency levels of energy EFF1 and EFF2. The improvement of energy efficiency parameters are achieved due to increase in consumption of active materials at the change of stator and rotor cores length by (110÷130) % for a efficiency level EFF2 for motors with improved efficiency, and by (160÷210) % for a efficiency level EFF1 for motors with high efficiency, furthermore the number of coils of stator winding for EFF2 should be less than basic number of coils on 10 %, and for EFF1 on (20÷40) %.

Let’s calculate percent of the electric power economy energy for motors with high efficiency and motors with improved efficiency:

( ) ( 2)

( )

100%ee b ee EFFe

ee b

С СE

С−

= ⋅ ,

( ) ( 1)

( )

100%ee b ee EFFe

ee b

С СE

С−

= ⋅ ,

where – cost of the electric power con-sumed during the period of operation of variable speed drive with basic induction motor; – cost of the electric power consumed during the period of operation of variable speed drive with induction motors with improved efficiency EFF2;

– cost of the electric power consumed during the period of operation of variable speed drive with induction motors with high efficiency EFF1.

( )ee bС

( 2)ee EFFС

( 1)ee EFFС

On Fig. 1 the percent of the electric power economy from base value of the consumed elec-tric power cost is presented when motors with

high efficiency and motors with improved effi-ciency are used. The economy of the consumed electric power does not depend on energy price level.

Fig. 1 – Economy of the electric power for 2008-2017

For calculations of induction motor operation

consisting of the variable speed electric drive of the pump unit the real daily water consumption schedule (particular values of the water con-sumption charge can be received on the basis of prospective object tests) is accepted, the pump unit operates in structure of second rise station (the pump operates in the open system with a dynamic and static pressure). The efficiency of the frequency converter of and the pump unit during regulation of rotation frequency of the induction motor are accepted by constants. The following pump units are used for calculations: K 160/20а, K 150-125-250, K 150-125-315, K 200-150-315, the given pump units are consisted on considered induction motor.

For estimation of energy saving comparative calculation of electric power economy will be given at operation of variable speed drive pump station including pump unit, the frequency con-verter and the induction motor: the general pur-pose induction motor and the improved induction motor designed on the basis of general purpose motor [4]. The improved induction motor is re-ceived by modernization of the general purpose motor without changing cross-sectional geome-try of stator and rotor. Criterion of optimality of the designed induction motor was the parameter of expenses during the operation life duration taking into account the cost of materials and power parameters.

For pump units the application of various regulation laws is possible in the general view the law of regulation can be written down as

constfU k =+ 21 , where k - the factor depend-ing on the kind of mechanical characteristic of the pump, k=2…4, great values correspond to characteristics of the pump with greater static pressure component.

70


On Fig. 2 the percent of electric power econ-omy when induction motor with EFF1 level in comparison with general purpose induction mo-tor is presented at realization of various regula-tion laws. Apparently from Fig. 2 when power of induction motor is increased which is used in the pump unit there is a change of the most eco-nomic regulation law of the pump unit flow. At the same time the percent of the electric power economy does not depend on the electric power price for 1 kW. As may be seen from Fig. 6 in comparison with general purpose motor im-proved induction motor with EFF1 level at usage of any regulation law appear economically more advantageous. However in various pump units when various induction motors are used, and also at various mechanical characteristics of the pump unit the most economic is turned out vari-ous regulation laws of rotation frequency of the pump unit. So at usage of the pump unit К 160/20а and К 200-150-315 when rated power of the induction motor is equal to 11 kW and 45 kW accordingly the greatest value of electric en-ergy economy is turned out at the law U/f2,5=const and it gives 2,33 % and 2,55 % economy, at pumps operation of К 150-125-250 and К 150-125-315 when rated power of the in-duction motor is equal to 18,5 kW and 30 kW accordingly the greatest percent of electric en-ergy economy will become when regulation law U/f3=const is used, the percent of electric energy economy will make 2,43 % and 1,18 % accord-ingly from base electric energy consumption.

Fig. 2 – The electric power economy for 2008-2017 at the usage of the variable speed drive

Consequently, the given calculations show

importance of regulation law definition that used for particular operation conditions: rated powers of induction motors and also kind of the pump unit mechanical characteristic.

Apparently from characteristics the usage of the improved inductions motors with efficiency level EFF1 allows to decrease losses which oc-curred in variable speed drive. Decreasing in losses in advanced the improved inductions mo-tors with efficiency level EFF1 occurs owing to

reduction of active resistance of a phase of sta-tor winding, that happens due to reduction of number of coils in a phase of stator winding and increases in the area of wire cross-section. The maked electromagnetic calculation shows, that usage of improved inductions motors with effi-ciency level EFF1 allows to reduce electric losses for 3 … 4 % in comparison with the gen-eral purpose induction motor.

Complex consideration of pump and pipeline characteristics, as well as load cycle and energy characteristics of the induction motor allows to estimate operational characteristics at applica-tion of the variable speed drive in pump units. In the process of the growth of pressure static component the regulation range is reduced, at reduction in speed the moment decreases more intense than it was determined by square-law dependence. Thus, we can draw a conclusion that to determine pump working parameters by using similarity formulas is inadmissible, the cal-culation of mechanical characteristics should be made considering the real pump unit operating mode. The received characteristics are used for calculation of the overall performance system the pump unit - the induction motor.

The results of calculations show that using improved induction motors in variable speed drive of the pump unit with greater in comparison with general purpose motor mass and overall parameters allows to reduce the electric power losses occurring at induction motor operation in the variable speed drive of pump unit. Greater wire diameter and smaller number of coils in the stator phase winding allows to reduce the elec-tric losses appearing in windings of the induction motor. The cost of improved induction motors is more than at general purpose induction motor, the increase in the cost is compensated due to improvement of energy parameters and also to reduction of electric power consumed during operation. At the same time smaller losses in improved induction motor stator allow to lower temperature of the winding that increases reli-ability and life time.

The greatest effect of energy saving for ven-tilatory character of pump unit loading turns out to be at realization of law U/f2.5=const and U/f3=const for the pump units К 160/20а, К 200-150-315 and К 150-125-250, К 150-125-315 ac-cordingly, that proves importance of defining regulation law used for a specific kind of the pump unit loading characteristic.

The additional payback period at variable speed drive application on the basis of improved induction motor in comparison to general pur-pose motor is about 1 month when overall re-coupment period does not exceed 2 years.

71


References: 1. Muravleva O.O. Resoursce Saving Pros-

pects Based on Accuracy Theory. In Proceed-ings IEEE The International Сотnference EUROCON 2007 – September 9 – 12, 2007, Warsaw,Poland. – pp. 1845–1850.

2. ABB drive helps reduce treatment main-tenance costs by £2000 // World Pumps. – 2005. – Issue 469. – October 2005. – pp. 18–19.

3. Danfoss – 40 years in the water pump industry // World Pumps. – 2009. – Issue 508. – January 2009. – pp. 42.

4. Muravleva О.О., Tyuteva P.V. Induction motors improvement for a variable speed drive. Bulletin of the Томsк Polytechnic University. – 2007. – V. 310. – 2 – pp. 177–181.

72

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B6VJK-4HBB7D4-W&_user=10&_coverDate=10%2F31%2F2005&_rdoc=1&_fmt=high&_orig=article&_cdi=6097&_sort=v&_docanchor=&view=c&_ct=43&_acct=C000050221&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_userid=10&md5=cf07b573dab2560a24b5a9b3f8e25ad2

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B6VJK-4HBB7D4-W&_user=10&_coverDate=10%2F31%2F2005&_rdoc=1&_fmt=high&_orig=article&_cdi=6097&_sort=v&_docanchor=&view=c&_ct=43&_acct=C000050221&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_userid=10&md5=cf07b573dab2560a24b5a9b3f8e25ad2

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B6VJK-4V9S0NT-14&_user=10&_coverDate=01%2F31%2F2009&_alid=860655306&_rdoc=13&_fmt=high&_orig=search&_cdi=6097&_sort=d&_docanchor=&view=c&_ct=565&_acct=C000050221&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_userid=10&md5=5cad41a284de7eb912e36f3de5039742

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B6VJK-4V9S0NT-14&_user=10&_coverDate=01%2F31%2F2009&_alid=860655306&_rdoc=13&_fmt=high&_orig=search&_cdi=6097&_sort=d&_docanchor=&view=c&_ct=565&_acct=C000050221&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_userid=10&md5=5cad41a284de7eb912e36f3de5039742

Section V

THE USE OF MODERN TECHNICAL AND INFORMATION MEANS IN HEALTH SERVICES

73

Section V: The use of modern technical and information means in health services

NONINVASIVE METHODS OF BLOOD GLUCOSE LEVEL ANALYSIS Asadulina V.H., Nam I.F., Komarova L. D.

Scientific supervisor: Aristov A.A., PhD, associate professor

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050 Russia, Tomsk, Lenin av., 30


Introduction The problem of diabetes becomes more and

more actual last years, in connection with steady growth of morbidity. The constant control of blood glucose level is necessary for the timely prevention and treatment of diabetes. Therefore special interest represents development of the devices, capable to provide painless, infectious safe measurements of blood glucose level in an automatic mode.

In this paper there is the overview of the most perspective and noninvasive methods of blood glucose level analyses.

Impedance spectroscopy Glucose concentration in body tissue can be

determined using electromagnetic waves within the range 1 MHz - 5 GHz. Glucose concentration in body tissue can be measured using reflected signal, impedance of body tissue and phase shift between applied and reflected signal. Glucose molecules and electrolyte ions of blood deter-mine impedance of body tissue at frequencies below 1 GHz.

The Pendra device implementing this method is available from Pendragon Medical. Clinical testing of the device showed that mean absolute measuring error was 52%.

Photoacoustics To measure glucose concentration in blood

or intercellular fluid, a segment of the human body should be exposed to modulated electro-magnetic radiation. The wavelength of actinic light for generation of strong photoacoustic emission is selected to match the glucose ab-sorption spectrum (1520 - 1850 and 2050 - 2340 nm). Water and glucose absorption within these ranges is relatively weak and strong, respec-tively. Absorption of electromagnetic radiation by body tissues is of particular interest within a rela-tively thin layer.

On the basis of this method the company “Glucon Medical” develops the prototype of the device meeting all requirements FDA which error of measurements makes 9 %.

The analysis of exhaled air Acetone concentration in exhaled air can be

used for noninvasive measurement of glucose

concentration in blood. Acetone concentration in exhaled air can be measured using a Diabet-sensor gas analyzer. The parameters of the de-vice meet the requirements of clinical practice. Measured acetone concentration in exhaled air correlate with glucose concentration in blood according to the correspondence table.

Endogenous method Changes in endogenous physiological and

biochemical functions depend on blood glucose level. Changes in blood glucose level correlate with changes in the electrophysiological activity of certain peripheral nerves, e.g. the median nerve. The peripheral nerve is an endogenous glucose sensor.

Blood glucose level can be assessed by ap-plying a 2-100 μsec 3 mA electric pulse to en-dogenous tissues. The pulse-induced combined potential is detected and analyzed for calculating blood glucose level [1].

Method "photonic crystals" "Photonic crystals" — materials that signal

the presence of certain chemicals by changing colors.

The photonic crystal is actually a gel made up of a proprietary combination of boronic acid and other chemicals. The chemicals form an array of long polymer chains, which contain re-ceptors that bind to the structure of glucose.

The molecular spacing between the chains in the array changes as it comes into contact with glucose. The changes in spacing and vol-ume of the array effectively alter how light passes through the material.

High concentrations of glucose produce spacing that causes light to refract, or bend, to produce a purple color. Low glucose would re-fract the light to produce a reddish color. Normal glucose levels would produce a green color.

To put the given material it is offered on a site of a surface of contact lenses which be-comes covered by a eyelid. It is quite reason-able, as the plaintive liquid washing an eyeball, also contains glucose, diffuse there from blood [2].

Method of biosensor detectors on the

skin surface

75



The principle of this type device operation is to contact the skin with gel plate (disk) that con-tains a special enzyme, which selectively inter-acts with glucose. Glucose molecules move through the integument to plate due to a weak electric field, generated by electrodes installed by adjacent side of the device on the skin.

Before starting usage of the device you want to bring it on hand for about three hours to en-sure that the flow of molecules through the skin are fixed on the stationary level. After that the device is calibrated by the analysis of blood taken from a finger [3].

Bioelectromagnetic resonance The company “Calisto Medical” has devel-

oped a device "Glucoband" on the basis of bio-electromagnetic resonance. The technology is based on the detection of the body electric im-pedance measurements by means of externally applied electromagnetic wave specific to glu-cose.

Clinical tests of the Glucoband device showed that measuring error was 19 mg/dl [1].

Method “Smart Tattoo” For the 5 years the group of scientists had

been involved in creation of a tattoo which will show concentration of glucose in blood of diabe-tes sick people.

This innovative technology involves chemi-cally sensitive polyethylene glycol beads that are coated with fluorescent molecules. That can be implanted under the skin of diabetic patients on the forearm or other areas. Upon illumination with a specific wavelength of light, the color of the beads indicates the glucose level in the in-terstitial fluid which, in turn, is related to blood glucose levels. The light source and "reader" is envisioned as a compact device that could be worn on the wrist, similar to a wristwatch. The beads thus form the basis of a minimally inva-sive glucose monitoring system, also named the "Smart Tattoo" [4].

There are also other noninvasive methods of

definition of glucose in blood, such as: nuclear magnetic resonance, an optical coherent tomo-graphy, the analysis of a diffused light, mechani-cal stimulation of tissue, definition of a level of sugar in blood on systolic and diastolic to arterial pressure. But the devices constructed using given techniques are only at the stage of devel-opment.

Optical methods Now the big attention is paid to optical meth-

ods of glucose definition. As the given methods are the most informative, and also these are not required introductions of electrodes in a tissue.

These methods use a light beam which is passed through a body. In a tissue light changes the characteristics, after passage through a tis-sue. Optical characteristics of tissue composition are taken from disseminated in a tissue light which has passed through the tissue. The ab-sorption of light in a tissue occurs for presence in blood and a skin of water, hemoglobin, melanin, fat and glucose.

Concentration of glucose can be measured from changes of optical characteristics of light: length of a wave, polarization or intensity.

Method of optical activity and Polarimetry Optical polarimetry of the anterior chamber is

a promising noninvasive approach to measure-ment of blood glucose level. Optical polarimetry is used as a quantitative method of measure-ment of optically active substances concentra-tion (e.g., glucose). If a linearly polarized light beam passes through solution of optically active substance, the angle of polarization rotation is proportional to the concentration of the optically active substance:

α = [α]·l·c, where α is optical rotation of glucose; l is op-

tical path length within the sample; c is glucose concentration in the sample. Because glucose concentration in the anterior chamber is equal to its concentration in blood, glucose concentration in blood can be calculated from l and α [1].

Conclusion The given methods are complex because the

surrounding tissues, dispersive properties of en-vironment and other parameters which reduce useful component responsible for the glucose content are influence on the basic value. There-fore for a blood glucose level it is desirable to use transparent environments, for example re-search of a level of glucose appearing through eyes sclera, definition of glucose on the basis of research of sweat. But also there are complexi-ties in these methods, for example if take analy-sis of sweat then getting of necessary quantity of liquid without additional inconveniences will not be possible, so development of tools for the analysis of environments directly on a surface of the human skin without a sample acquisition is necessary. The given development will allow creating and using the device for monitoring a blood glucose level.

In particular our group make similar re-searches on the basis of an estimation of the sweat analysis. We consider that this method is perspective enough for realization the devices of monitoring.

But it should be noted that one of the most important advantage of these methods is that it noninvasive which provides painlessness, infec-

76

http://www.calistomedical.com/eng/?p=glucoband

http://multitran.ru/c/m.exe?t=1146779_1_2

http://multitran.ru/c/m.exe?t=3294_1_2

Section V: The use of modern technical and information means in health services tious safety of a blood glucose level measure-ment. More over these methods can help to re-duce risks of development of the diabetes chal-lenged with high complication probability and lethal outcomes.

References 1. N. A. Bazaev and S. V. Selishchev. Non-

invasive methods for blood glucose measure-ment: Biomedical Engineering, Vol. 41, No. 1, 2007, pp. 42-50.

2. Color-Change Lenses Check Blood Sugar -http://abcnews.go.com/Technology/FutureTech/story?id=97664&page=1.

3. Hight technology to help diabetics.-2003.- http://www.computerra.ru/xterra/biomed/27534/.

4. Method and Apparatus for Noninvasive Analyte Detection (Glucose) Using Intradermally Implanted Chemically Sensitive Particles-http://otc.tamu.edu/technologies.jsp?casecode=1240TEES98.

THE DEVICE FOR PHOTOMETRIC RESEARCH OF THE BIOLIQUID DROP SAMPLE

1Rafalskiy A.. S., 2Bushuev A. V.

The scientific supervisor: Aristov A. A, PhD, associate professor 1Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina av., 30

2Novosibirsk State University, 630090, Russia, Novosibirsk, Pirogova street, 2.


Abstract. Research of the biofluid drop sam-

ples will allow to obtain data necessary for mathematical modeling of light dispersion which has transmitted through the drop sample and also to get an insight into process dynamics in it and to study the influence of these processes on energetic characteristics of the sample. So it will allow developing devices for biofluid analysis with following advantages:

• Possibility of small volume sample re-search, the order is about 20 mkl.

• Carrying out the various tests without preliminary sample preparation or minimize it.

• Significant decreasing of time demand for carrying out of analysis.

The methodic description. As processes in

the sample led to changes of its optical charac-teristics the photometric research technique were taken to the data obtaining. Processes in-duce the dispersion of light transmitting through the drop sample and lead to changes of disper-sion picture parameters. The dispersion picture shows dependence of the light intensity on the angle of deflection. At blood analysis processes the erythrocyte aggregation which carrying in it will influence on dispersion of a passing lumi-nous flux.

Also energetic characteristics are influenced on optical properties of the drop sample includ-ing the surface-tension level and consequently also the shape of the given drop. During such processes as erythrocyte aggregation, bacteria opsonization by appropriate antibodies, an en-globement, formation of complexes of antigens - the antibody, result in change of surface-tension level. The drop composition appreciably effect on surface-tension. The composition of biological fluids includes a great number of low - and high-molecular compounds (electrolytes, proteins, lip-ids, carbohydrates). These materials are capable to adsorb through fluid phase boundaries, to alter the surface-tension and the interfacial tension of fluid and thus to influence on transport processes of materials and energy through biological mem-branes [1,2-4,5], these are surfactants. The con-tent of these materials can vary because of de-velopment of pathological processes in an organ-ism, which accordingly influences on surface-tension of the fluids they are kept in.

Energetic characteristics of the drop sample and their changes can be estimated from an in-vestigation of geometrical parametres of lying drop sample (LDS), such as a contact angle, a radius of a surface curvature, drop altitudes, and also the dependence of horizontal cross-section

77


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 LDS radiuses from the distance between LDS base and the given cross-section.

Comparison of information obtained during these researches will allow detecting depend-ences between processes in LDS of biofluids and their effect on energetic and optical proper-ties of investigated sample.

The block diagram of the system which used to drop sample analysis is shown on fig. 1.

Fig. 1. The block diagramme of system for research LDS of biofluid.

1 primary converter, 2 radiation source, 3 ra-

diation detector, 4 thermal sensor, 5 heating ele-ment, 6 source of a stable current,

7 temperature regulator, 8 stepping motor, 9 amplifier,

10 ADC, 11 stepping motor control system, 12 investigated drop sample, 13 personal com-puter, 14 videocamera, 15 power supply.

Carrying out the experiment it is necessary

to minimize affecting of external factors on the sample to eliminate their influence on investiga-tion results or to reduce it a minimum. For this purpose it is essential to apply the sealed cham-ber of the primary converter 1 in which the con-stant temperature (37С) and high level of hu-midity is supported by working of 4, 5, 7 blocks.

For measure of indicatrix of dispersion the system consisting of a radiation source 2 which is connected to a source of a stable current 6 and radiation detector 3 is used. The radiation detector 3 can shift over the sample on the angle between 0 to 180 that allows finding out the dependence of the light intensity passing through LDA from an angle of scattering. For radiation detector moving the stepping motor 8 and the control system of the stepping motor 11 which is connected to the personal computer 13 are used. The signal from the radiation detector is amplified by amplifier 9 and digitized by the block of the analogue-digital converter 10 further the signal is transmitted in the personal com-

puter where by means of the special software the radiation intensity value is linked to value of stepping motor shaft angle shift.

The video canal is used for an estimation of energetic characteristics of the sample. Due to videocamera 14, we take the image of LDS pro-file which enters to the personal computer, through a video frame capture card.

Further the image processing is realized by means of specially developed software. During this processing the LDS edges are outlined, and defines its geometrical characteristics (a contact angle, a radius of a surface curvature, diameter of the LDS base and altitude and also the de-pendence of horizontal cross-section LDS radi-uses on the distance between LDS base and the given cross-section). The given software also links the data gained from the photometric canal and results of drop image processing. The work-ing window of the program is shown on fig. 2.

Fig. 2.

The given program has been written using programming language C++, it has allowed to obtain high-speed operation.

Operation algorithm of an image process-ing program. After loading the image from the video camera the pan recognition starts, then the LDS base is determined, its centre and radius is calculated. From the LDS base centre some half rays are drawn, their quantity depends on re-quired accuracy of LDS edges outlining. Further intersection points of these half rays with upper edge of the drop sample are identified. From these co-ordinates of the points the program constructs the LDS outline and carries out measurements of its geometrical parametres. For the contact angle measurement the program draw tangent to the LDS outline from an extreme point of the LDS base. The program can be cus-tomized both automatically, and manually if pa-rametres of the taken image have been changed, that will allow using this program for an image processing taken under various condi-tions.

The program interface is simple enough and does not demand special skills to start work. The

78

Section V: The use of modern technical and information means in health services data obtained during the experiment can be kept in Microsoft Excel format, and taken image in a file with “*.bmp” extension format.

Conclusion The development of the given device will allow carrying out a number of ex-periments with the bioliquid drop samples (to obtain data of dispersion of the light passing through the drop sample and its energetic char-acteristics). Results of the given experiments can be useful for development of the laboratory tools for photometric research of small size bio-liquid samples.

References: 1. Is there a predictable relationship be-

tween surface physical-chemical properties and cell behaviour at the interface? / J. Vitte, A. M. Benoliel, A. Pierres, P. Bongrand // European Cells and Materials, 2004. – Vol. 7. – P. 52-63.

2. Dynamic interphase tensiometria - a new method of studying of biological liquids / V.N.Kazakov, R.Miller, O.V.Sinjachenko, etc.//Vestn. New medical technologies, 1997. - Permanently delete. 4, 4. - P. 100-103.

3. Dynamic surface tension of biological liq-uids in medicine / V.N.Kazakov, O.V.Sinjachenko, V.B.Fajnerman, etc. - Donetsk: Publishing house medical un y, 1997. - 296 with.

4. Interphase tensiometria biological liquids: questions of the theory and usage perspective in medicine / V.N.Kazakov, O.V.Sinjachenko, V.B.Fajnerman, etc.//Arh. A wedge. eksperim. Medical, 1998. - Permanently delete. 7, 1. - With. 5-12.

5. Enforced Detachment of Red Blood Cells Adhering to Surfaces: Statics and Dynamics / Pier-rat, [et al.] // Biophysical Journal, 2004. – Vol. 87. – P. 2855-2869

79

Section VI

MATERIAL SCIENCE

81

Section VI: Material science

STUDY ON HARDNESS AND WEAR RESISTANCE OF HDPE-G-SILANE AND UHMW-PE MIXTURE

1Sompong Piriyayon, 1,2S.V. Panin, 2 L.R. Ivanova, 2,3L.A. Kornienko 1Tomsk Polytechnic University, Mechanical Engineering Faculty

2 Institute of Strength Physics and Materials Sciences SB RAS, [email protected] 3 Russian Materials Science Center, Tomsk, Russia

Abstract UHMW-PE (Ultra High Molecular Weight

Polyethylene) is expansive polymer with a num-ber of unique properties but hardly bonding with any substances. One of perspective ways to bond UHMW-PE with filler is its grafting. There is one more interesting approach, when graft HDPE (High Density Polyethylene, which is for sure cheaper) is added to UHMW-PE in order to react both with latter and filler, since PE and UHMW-PE are both from chemistry structure of ethylene. In this paper we attempted to increase the compound ability of UHMW-PE for enhanc-ing its wear resistance properties.

We employed HDPE powder chemically modified with Styrene Maleic Anhydride (HDPE-g-SMA) copolymer and its mixtures with UHMW-PE. Mixture was HDPE-g-SMA 0.5 and 10 wt%. Specimens were tested by Shore hardness and wear resistance by the “Block-on-Roller” tech-nique.

The results of the hardness and wear resis-tance show that hardness decreases when vol-ume fraction of HDPE-g-SMA is increased in the compound. However, in contrast with this result, wear resistances is increased when amount of HDPE-g-SMA in the compound is enlarged.

Key words: HDPE-g-SMA, UHMW-PE,

wear resistance, hardness, mixture. Introduction Polyethylene (PE) is one of the most widely

used polymers. Since it does not include any polar group in its chain, many researchers try to mix other substance to PE in order to increase the strength properties and wear resistance. One of the techniques is chemical modification. By preparing PE mixtures with silane and further treatment at control temperature and pressure one can obtain silane grafted PE. This material allows to overcome successfully the problem on PE interfacial adhesion with other substance. In the literature there are number of reports on ny-lon/clay nanocomposites with excellent me-chanic properties (for instance, developed by the Toyo group [1]).

Experimental Materials We used the HDPE-g-silane by OLENTA

(Russia). UHMW-PE was purchased from Ti-cona Corp. The molecular weight of UHMW-PE powder used makes 2.6×106.

Preparation of HDPE-g-silane and UHMW-

PE mixture The graft copolymer (HDPE-g-silane) and

UHMW-PE were mixed sintered in the mold by hot pressing at the temperature of 190°C and compression pressure of 10 MPa. Exposure time was 120 minute. Ingots were obtained in the form of plates of 8 mm thickness. The volume fraction of HDPE-g-silane was set as i) 0; ii) 5 and iii) 10 wt% to give three materials denoted HDPEg 0, HDPEg 5 and HDPEg 10.

Characterization Hardness The meter of rheological characteristics “Im-

pulse-1R” was applied for testing and compara-tive analysis of physical-mechanical properties such as hardness (Shore A, IRHD ISO 48, ISO 1400). Specimen size made 50×50×8 mm3. The device is shown in figure 1.

Figure 1. Impulse-1R meter for hardness test-ing.

Wear resistance testing Wear tests were run using “SMT-1” friction

machine without lubrication according to the “block-on-roller” scheme (ASTM G77). Specimen size made 8×8×10 mm3; the roller diameter is 62 mm; revolution rate is 100 rpm; and loading is 160 N. In doing so, two specimens were fixed in a holder (fig. 2). Images of friction track were investigated by shooting photographs between loadings by optical microscope “Carl Zeiss Stemi 2000–C” and measuring friction track area by

83


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 software “Rhinoceros version 3”. A characteristic image of friction track is shown in figure 3.

Figure 2. “Block-on-roller” wear tests.

Figure 3. Wear track from wear tests.

Results and discussion Hardness HDPEg / UHMW-PE compound is formed by

hot pressing in a mold. According to literature data the cross linking of both components may happen during sintering [2].

Figure 4. Hardness of HDPE-g-silane and UHMW-PE mixture Results on Shore A hardness measurement

by “Impulse 1R” meter shown in Fig. 4 illustrates that the latter is decreased when volume fraction of HDPEg is increased. At HDPEg amount of 10 wt% it is less than 96, while for HDPEg 0 and HDPEg 5 one can not find substantial difference between their Shore A hardness.

Wear resistance The wear resistance of compounds is in-

creased when HDPE-g-silane is mixed with UHMW-PE.

HDPEg 5 has stable wearing at steady-state wearing stage t=50-180 min (fig. 5). One can distinguish two pronounced portions at wearing diagram of HDPEg 10. But in fact, steady-state wearing starts after 50 min. of loading. In doing so, wear resistance of HDPEg 10 is several times higher in contrast with two other speci-mens.

Figure 5. Wear resistance of HDPE-g-silane and UHMW-PE mixture.

Conclusions During hot pressing of HDPE-g-UHMW-PE

specimens it was found that flow ability of com-pound is increased when HDPE-g-silane is added to UHMW-PE. In doing so, HDPEg 10 has higher flow ability in contrast with HDPEg 5, while the lowest flow ability is characteristic of HDPEg 0. The results obtained are promising if to think about changing the specimen forming process from hot press molding to injection molding. Next steps can be filled for increase both strength, fracture toughness and wear re-sistance.

Acknowledement This research was performed within SB RAS

6.1.1 project. References: 1. Wang H, Fang P, Chen Z, Wang S, Xu Y

and Fang Z, Polymer Int. 57:50 (2008). 2. Steven M. Kurt, The UHMW-PE hand-

book, Elsevier 2004, p 109.

84


SURFACE MODIFICATION OF ULTRA HIGH MOLECULAR WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE BY ALBX ION IMPLANTATION

1 T. Poowadin, 1,2S.V. Panin, ,2V.P. Sergeev, 2 L.R. Ivanova, 2,3L.A. Kornienko 1Tomsk Polytechnic University, Mechanical Engineering Faculty

2 Institute of Strength Physics and Materials Sciences SB RAS, [email protected] 3 Russian Materials Science Center, Tomsk, Russia

Abstract The aim of this research is increasing wear

resistance of the ultra high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMW-PE) specimens via ion implantation treatment. Aluminum boride (AlBx) ion implantation has been used to modify sur-face of the specimens in order to estimate the effect of the ion dose variation onto wear resis-tance and surface hardness of UHMW-PE specimens. In this work, we also interested in improvement of UHMW-PE properties by pre-liminary mechanical activation. The modified specimens were examined in terms of wear re-sistance by the “block-on-roller” wearing test and compare with pure UHMW-PE (without treat-ment). It was found that specimen surface hard-ness are increased when the AlBx ion implanta-tion dose is increased. Also, the AlBx ion implan-tation resulted in good wear resistance at the steady-state stage and increased it up to 2.7 times compared with the pure UHMW-PE.

Keywords: UHMW-PE; ion implantation;

wear resistance; surface hardness Introduction UHMW-PE comes from a family of polymers

with a deceptively simple chemical composition, consisting of only hydrogen and carbon. The International Standards Organization defines UHMW-PE as having a molecular weight of at least 1 million g/mol, which results in a minimum degree of polymerization of n ≈ 36.000 per chain, while the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM D 4020) specifies that UHMPWE has an average molecular weight greater than 3.1 million (n≈111,000 per chain). [1]

UHMW-PE is a promising polymeric material for machining engineering combining such prop-erties as low coefficient of friction, resistance to hostile media, ability to vibration absorption.

Nowadays, improvement of UHMW-PE properties can be achieved by chemical or by radiochemical reactions. AlBx ion implantation is a low-temperature processing which make the treatment suitable for low melting materials such as polymers. Furthermore ion implantation is

widely spread to improve surface hardness of materials. This treatment is characterized by easy processing a complex shaped object. Therefore it is very proper for many industries.

Increase of strength and wear resistance of composite polymeric materials by means of me-chanical activation in planetary mill that provides uniform distribution of micro- and nanosized par-ticles of fillers in material bulk, partial formation of bonding between polymer and filler, as well as mechanical alloying polymeric powder by nanoparticles. AGO-2 planetary mill was em-ployed in most of the researches reported in the literature [2].

In this work, the AlBx ion implantation has been used to modify the surface of UHMW-PE specimens. We study dependence of the influ-ence of different rate ion implantation on wear resistance of UHMW-PE specimens formed by hot pressing.

Experimental Materials and specimens preparation UHMW-PE powder with molecular weight of

2.6*106 g/mol was used in this study. The me-chanical activation of UHMW-PE was performed by industrial planetary mill “MP/0.5x4” within 20 minutes. Steel balls with the diameter of 8 mm were used for the treatment. Then several meth-ods were used to prepare the specimens, com-pression pressure of 10 MPa by compression machine “MC-500”. Exposure time at temperature of 190ºC made 120 min. Specimens cooling were realized in the mould at cooling rate of 3–4ºC/min. The specimens of rectangular shaped plates of 55×60×5 mm. Specimens were performed by the AlBx ion implantation under the 60 kV accelerat-ing voltage in vacuum chamber with residual pressure 1*10-3 Pa by the “DIANA” vacuum-arc impulse ion source at the 50 Hz frequency of current pulses, 250 µs of its duration, while the ion doses varied from 0.5*1017 up to 2*1017 cm−2, the treatment temperature was controlled at the rate of below 70oC.

85



Figure 1. Scheme of wearing test “block on roller”

Wearing test Wearing test was performed with the use of

friction machine “SMT-1”. Tests were run without lubrication according to the “roller-block” scheme shown in the fig.1. Specimen size made 8×10×5 mm, the roller diameter was 62 mm, revolution rate – 100 rpm under loading of 160 N. The test lasted for 3 hours.

The friction track area of the specimen was analyzed with shooting photographs by optical microscope “Carl Zeiss Stemi 2000–C” and by friction trace area measuring with the software “Rhinoceros version 3” .

Results and Discussion Wear resistance The effect of different doses of AlBx ion im-

plantation on wear resistance of UHMW-PE is shown in Fig. 2. At steady-state stage, wear in-tensity of specimen with ion dose of 2*1017 cm−2 and 0.5*1017 cm−2 look similar being smaller than ones of specimens with the dose of 1*1017 cm−2 and pure UHMW-PE respectively. The highest wear resistance is characteristic feature for specimen with ion dose of 2*1017 cm−2 that is 2.5 times higher in contrast with pure UHMW-PE specimen.

Figure 2. Wearing of UHMW-PE specimens with different dose of AlBx ion implantation

Figure 3. Wearing of UHMW-PE specimens preliminary treated by mechanical activation with different dose of AlBx ion implantation.

The effect of varying the doses of AlBx ion

implantation on wearing of mechanical activation treated UHMW-PE specimens is presented in Fig. 3. It is seen that at steady-state stage de-crease of wearing at the dose of 0.5*1017 cm−2 is less than one at the higher doses of 2*1017 cm−2, 1*1017 cm−2 aas well as for specimen without the irradiation (UHMW-PE MA20 min). The highest wear resistance at ion dose of 0.5*1017 cm−2 was up to 2.3 times higher as compared with UHMW-PE MA 20 min. and up to 2.7 times higher in contrast with with pure UHMW-PE.

Surface hardness The effect of the AlBx ion implantation on the

surface hardness of UHMW-PE is shown in Ta-ble.1 It is seen that the AlBx ion implantation can significantly increase the surface hardness of UHMW-PE. Shore A hardness also increases gradually at increasing of the implantation dose. The highest surface hardness was obtained at ion dose of 2*1017 cm−2. Table 1

Conclusion The AlBx ion implantation has been used to

modify the surface of UHMW-PE specimens. At the steady-state stage wear of UHMW-PE was mostly reduced at ion implantation dose of 0.5*1017 cm−2. The surface hardness was slightly increased when implantation dose was in-

86


creased. Elevation of surface hardness was not due to structural changes but mainly due to sur-face layer deposited by AlBx ion implantation. According to this study AlBx ion implantation can slightly improve wear resistance of UHMW-PE.

Three important results are listed below: 1. AlBx ion implantation is effective for treat-

ment of UHMW-PE and can increase its surface hardness in case of increase the implantation dose.

2. AlBx ion implantation provides good wear resistance at the steady-state stage.

3. Preliminary mechanical activation for 20 minutes can slightly improve wear resistance for ion implanted UHMW-PE specimens.

Acknowledgement Authors thank A.V. Byakov for the technical

assistance in carrying out experiments. Reference: 1. C.M. Rimnac and S.M. Kurtz, Ionizing ra-

diation and orthopaedic prostheses, Nuclear In-struments and Methods in Physics Research B 236 (2005). P. 30-37.

2. Patent of USSR 975068. Planetary mill. / Avvakoumov E.G., Potkin A.R., Samarin O.I., et.al, 1982, 43.

3. http://80.94.164.225/VDev/Impuls1r /impuls1r.html

INFLUENCE OF MECHANICAL ACTIVATION TIME ONTO WEAR RESISTANCE

OF CARBON NANOFIBER FILLED UHMWPE S. Wannasria1, S.V. Panin1,2, L.R. Ivanova2, L.A. Kornienko2,3, A.G. Tkachev4

1Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Tomsk Polytechnic University, Tomsk, Russia 2Institute of Strength Physics and Materials Sciences SB RAS, Tomsk, Russia

3Russian Materials Science Center, Tomsk, Russia 4Tambov State Technical University, Tambov, Russia

Introduction Increase of strength properties and wear re-

sistance of polyolefin was traditionally carried out by adding reinforcing particles of inorganic mate-rials. Nowadays, increasing strength and wear resistance are also carried out by adding nanosized fillers, since they have redundant sur-face energy. Furthermore, small size of the fillers provides very fine and homogenous structure of Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHMW-PE) composite specimens.

Also, a lot of attention recently was paid to increasing strength and wear resistance of com-posite polymeric materials by mechanical activa-tion. In this work we stress on the combination of adding carbon nanotubes as fillers and me-chanical activation to affect tribological proper-ties of UHMWPE specimens formed by hot pressing.

Experiment procedure Materials and specimen preparation UHMWPE powder with particle size of 50-

70 μm (by Ticona) was used for preparing specimens. Molecular weight of the UHMWPE

powder used makes 2.6*106. Carbon nanofibers in the form of multiwall nanotubes with external diameter of 10-60 nm, internal diameter of 10-20 nm and length of 2-3 μm were employed for filling.

Carbon nanotubes and UHMWPE were mixed using high speed homogenizer “MPW-302”. Mechanical activation was performed at different durations 0 - 40 minutes by industrial planetary mill “MP/0.5x4”. Steel balls of 8 mm diameter were used for the treatment. After me-chanical activation, UHMWPE powder was used to prepare test piece specimens by compression machine “MC-500” and hot-pressing mould “ITM” at compression pressure of 10 MPa at tempera-ture of 190ºC for 120 minutes. Specimens cool-ing were realized in the mould at cooling rate of 3-4ºC/min. The specimens obtained in the shape of rectangular plates of 45×5×50 and 45×8×50 mm3.

Physical mechanical properties Friction coefficient was measured with the

use of tribometer machine by ball-on-disk scheme (according to ASTM G99 и DIN 50324)

87

http://80.94.164.225/VDev/Impuls1r

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 with the fixed steel ball of 3 mm diameter at the indenter tip. Viscoelasticity tests were performed with the use of the meter of rheological charac-teristics “Impulse-1P.”

Table 1. Physical-mechanical and tribotechnical

properties of UHMWPE+2 wt%CNF

Specimens.

MA

. (m

in.)

Den

sity

(g/d

m3 )

frict

ion

coef

ficie

nt (µ

)

Mod

ulus

of e

last

icity

(M

Pa.

)

Yie

ld s

treng

th, σ

0.2

(MP

a.)

UHMWPE+ 2%CNF 0 0.924 0.137 640.476 14.483

UHMWPE + 2%CNF+MA 10 0.932 0.139 621.693 14.333 UHMWPE + 2%CNF+MA 20 0.935 0.127 625.556 14.233 UHMWPE + 2%CNF+MA 30 0.934 0.134 611.869 13.867 UHMWPE + 2%CNF+MA 40 0.923 0.146 681.563 15.867

The three point bending and compression tests were performed with the help of electro-mechanical testing machine Instron – 5582. Specimen size made 13×5×50 mm3 and loading rate of 0.5 mm/minute (for three-point bending), while under the compression test specimen size were 6×6×10 mm3 and the loading rate made 0.3 mm/minute.

Wear tests Wear tests were performed with the use of

friction machine “SMT-1”. Tests were run without lubrication according to the “block-on-roller” (ac-cording to ASTM G77). Specimen size made 7×7×10 mm3, the roller diameter is 62 mm, revo-lution rate was 100 rpm, and normal loading was equal to 160 N. Images of friction track were in-vestigated by shooting photographs between loadings by optical microscope “Carl Zeiss Stemi 2000–C” and measuring friction track area by software “Rhinoceros, version 3” (Thailand).

All specimens contain crystalline β-polyethylene phase of n-Noacosane. Crystallinity degree of UHMWPE was decreased respectively from 88.7% at initial state to minimum value of 82.9% at mechanical activation time of 30 minutes then is raised up to 87.9% at the treatment time of 40 minutes. This correlates well with variation of the elasticity modulus and yield strength as were described above.

Analysis of permolecular structure Phase structure and crystallinity degree were

investigated by X-ray diffraction spectrometer “Shimadzu XRD 6000” The analysis of permo-lecular structure was performed by scanning electron microscope (SEM) “Phillips SEM-515” which scans over the silver surface (replica) that was sprayed on the fracture surface of UHMWPE specimens. Cleavage facets were actualized on the brittle fracture surfaces of the specimens immediately after extracting them from liquid nitrogen.

SEM-micrographs to characterize permo-lecular structure of the specimens are shown at figure 1. It is seen that permolecular network has lamellar pattern with a lot of viscous fibrils at fracture surface that results from specimen rap-ture after extruding from liquid nitrogen (fig 1, a). After mechanical activation permolecular struc-ture still possesses lamellar character but of dif-ferent density and packaging pattern (fig 1, b-d).

a) b)

c) d)

Results and Discussion Table 1 illustrates data on physical-

mechanical properties of UHMW-PE specimens after mechanical activation. It is seen that den-sity is gradually increased from 0.924 at initial state to maximum of 0.935 at mechanical activa-tion time of 20 minutes and then slowly drop down to 0.934 and 0.923 respectively with in-creasing of mechanical activation time. Friction coefficient was decreased from 0.137 at initial state to minimum value of 0.127 at mechanical activation time of 20 minutes with further rising up to 0.134 and 0.146 respectively at the treat-ment time of 30 and 40 minutes. Modulus of elasticity and yield strength are decreased from 640.5 and 14.5 MPa at initial state to minimum value of 611.9 and 13.9 MPa at mechanical acti-vation time of 30 minutes with further increasing up to 681.6 and 15.9 MPa respectively at the treatment time of 40 minutes.

Figure 1. Permolecular structure of hot pressed UHMWPE+2 wt%CNF specimens: initial state (a); after planetary mill treatment during 20 (b), 30 (c) and 40 minutes (×300)

Friction tests have revealed the difference in wearing pattern for the UHMWPE+2 wt%CNF specimens with different time of the mechanical activation. At the first stage (running in stage) the area of friction track for all treated specimens is smaller in contrast with one of the specimen in initial state.

88


Figure 2. Intensity of wearing of UHMWPE+ 2 wt%CNF specimens at initial state and after mechanical activation versus testing time.

After testing time of 100 minute (steady state

wearing) the area of friction track for all UHMWPE+2 wt%CNF subjected to mechanical activation starts to growth intensively nearly reaching the same value as one for the speci-men in initial state. To our mind the reason of intensifying wearing is related to low adhesion between matrix and filler and losing continuity due to localized deformation in the tribocontact area (see figure 2).

Conclusion Mechanical activation in combination with

adding carbon nanofibers is not very useful for improving physical mechanical, viscoelastic and tribological property of UHMWPE because it ef-fects to decrease all the properties and loosing bonding between nanofillers and matrix material. At the same time, when adding 2wt% CNF to UHMWPE without mechanical activation or at mechanical activation without adding CNF wear resistance of UHMWPE are increased by several times. This means that it is necessary to get deeper knowledge on structure modification to occur under such complex treatment as well as to inspect changes to happen in the UHMWPE powder during planetary mill treatment in mixture with carbon nanofibers. It is the matter of our research in the nearest future.

Reference: 1. Patent of USSR 975068. Planetary

mill / Avvakoumov E.G., Potkin A.R., Samarin O.I., 1982, 43.

2. Ultrahigh molecular weight polyethylene of high density. / Ed. by I.N. Andreeva, E.V. Veselovskaya, E.I. Nalivaiko, et al. Lenin-grad, Izdatelstvo Khimia (Chemistry), 1982, 80 p.

3. The UHMWPE handbook / Steven M. Kurtz Elsevier academic press, California, USA, 2004.

http://80.94.164.225/VDev/Impuls1.

СATHODELUMINESCENCE OF THE BRAZILIAN TOPAZ Gabaydulina E.T.

Research supervisor: docent Polisadova E.F., Mylnikova T.S.

Tomsk Polytechnical University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenin Avenue

E-mail: [email protected] Today the topaz becomes a wide spread

crystal used in different industries. Its popularity is due to its low price, special internal change of light and transparency. Also the topaz is easy to process.

The features of the topaz structure, its inter-nal structure, form, and properties depend on physical and chemical formation conditions of the crystal. The analysis of the luminescent properties of the topaz and the nature of the centers of luminescence make it possible to re-

veal its typomorphic attributes. These attributes make it possible to decode the genetic informa-tion of its crystal structure and to find out specific characteristics of the environment the topaz was formed in.

The topaz is a perspective material to be used in thermionic dosimeters [1]. Crystals of the topaz are interesting to research from the point of view of its application as an active medium in optical quantum generators.

89



Technique of the research The optical spectrometer was used to re-

search the luminescence of the topaz. The func-tioning of this spectrometer is based on lumines-cence excitation by electron beam that creates a number of benefits in comparison to other types of excitation sources.

High capacity of the electron beam and a super short time of the exciting pulse increase the luminescence signal without destruction of the sample. The factor essentially expanding methodical opportunities of the luminescent spectrometry is the opportunity to variate the electron excitation density within a wide range. The dependence of the luminescence on the electron excitation density gives additional in-formation about the properties of the lumines-cence centers, about the properties of the tested material and its distinctive features.

The electrons of high energy provide volu-metric excitation of the object, therefore all the luminescence centers are excited within one act.

The sample is irradiated by the electron beam (Fig.1). Than luminescence occurs. The radiation goes to the monochromator, where it decays into a spectrum. The registration of the luminescence is made by the measurement of the kinetics at each wavelength by the photo-electronic multiplier and a high-speed oscillo-scope.

The purpose of the research is to study the luminescence of the colorless Brazilian topaz in exciting by the electron beam. The goals are to investigate the luminescence spectrum at room temperature; to investigate the time characteris-tics of the luminescence and to find out the fea-tures of the luminescence of the colorless topaz.

Fig.1Sceme of the spectrometre 1 is a pulse generator; 2 is a dynamitron; 3 is the crystal under investigation; 4 is a lens; 5is a monochromator; 6 is a photomultiplier; 7 is a power supply unit of the photomultiplier; 8 is an oscilloscope; 9 is a control panel; 10 is a cryostat.

Results The intensive luminescence in ultra-violet

and visible region of the spectrum can be ob-served when irradiating the crystal of the Brazil-ian topaz by the electron beam. Two bands can be seen in the spectrum after irradiation. Their maxima at 295 and 350 nm and peak in the re-gion of 380 nm can be observed (Fig.2).

It has been found, that the kinetics con-sists of two components and it can be well de-fined by the exponential law.

0

4

8

12

16

20

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Fig.2 Spectrum of the cathode luminescence of the colorless topaz, measured after electron ex-citation.

While comparing the luminescence spectrum

of colorless, blue and wine-yellow topazes (Fig.3) it can be noted, that:

The luminescence band in the ultra-violet re-gion with the maximum at 295 nm is being regis-tered in topazes spectra in both x-ray excitation, and irradiation by electrons. It means that this band is characteristic for both colorless, and painted crystals.

It has been found, that in the spectra of blue and wine-yellow crystals measured in nano and a microsecond time range short and longtime components are displaced 5 nm from each other. In the colorless Brazilian topaz the maxi-mum of the spectrum at 295 nm after attenuation is displaced to a more long-wave region, e.i. 300 nm. In Volynsk topazes the spectra of short and longtime components are displaced in the same way.

34

5 6

9 7

81

2

90


Fig.3 Spectrum of the luminescence of a blue topaz (a), wine-yellow (b) topaz at Т=293К [13]: 1is after excitation; 2 is through 50 μs; 3 is after 1 ms.

The main band of the luminescence with the

maximum at 350 nm in the colorless topaz spectrum cannot be observed in color crystals. Thus, the spectrum of a short time component makes it possible to distinguish different to-pazes [2].

The spectra of blue, wine-yellow and color-less topazes are similar in a microsecond range: one band can be observed and the form of the band appears to be identical to that of a color-less topaz. The positions of the maxima differ in 5-10 nm [3].

The comparison of the attenuation kinetics for topazes is of a special interest. The attenua-tion time of a microsecond component in the investigated colorless topaz crystal = 200 μs, in Volynsk blue and wine-yellow topazes it = 60 μs. It means that the colorless topaz has longer time luminescence. This property can also be used for identification of topazes.

The distinctive property of the colorless Bra-zilian topaz is the absence of luminescence in the region of 350-550 nm with 1ms resolution time, which is characteristic for color samples.

Discussion While comparing the results obtained and

the results which have already known it can be assumed that ultra-violet bands are of intrinsic nature.

The intrinsic centers of luminescence are re-sponsible for the luminescence in the region of 285-290 nm. It is obvious, that the radiation band in the topaz spectrum with the maximum of 295-300 nm is caused by its intrinsic defects. At the same time the long time of the luminescence and the distinction in the position of nano and microsecond components are connected with the properties of the crystal lattice of the color-less crystal. It depends on a small quantity of the impurity in the crystal, and the conditions of the crystal formation.

The bands with a time of attenuation more than 1 ms are registered in the spectra of painted topazes in a visible region at a room temperature, and the bands and time of attenua-tion are individual characteristics for each of the samples. Similar characteristics of the lumines-cence for colorless topazes have not been re-vealed. And this is a distinctive property of the investigated sample.

Summary It has been revealed, that the luminescence

spectrum of the colorless Brazilian topaz con-sists of components with nanosecond and mi-crosecond time attenuation;

It has been found, that spectral and time characteristics of the ultra-violet band correlate with the properties of the luminescence for painted Volynsk crystals;

General and individual luminescent proper-ties of the topaz can be applied to identify and distinguish types of topazes, to reveal the typo-morphic properties of crystals from various de-posits.

References: 1. Dosimetric Properties of Natural Brazilian

Topaz: A Thermally Stimulated Exoeletronic Emission and Thermoluminescence Study D.N. Souza, M.E.G. Valerio, J.F. de Lima, L.V.E. Caldas Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Re-search Section B: Beam Interactions with Materi-als and Atoms, 166-167 (2000),

2. On the Thermoluminescent Properties and Behaviour of Brazilian Topaz E.G. Yukihara, E. Okuno Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Re-search Section B: Beam Interactions with Materials and Atoms, 141 (1998),1-4.

3. Luminescent Property of Topaz M.V. Korovkin, O.A Ivanova., E.F. Polisadova, V.I. Korepanov // Isvestia TPU, 2003. – Т. 306, 1. – С. 50-58.

91


RESEARCH OF STRENGTH, WEAR - RESISTANCE AND HARDNESS OF COMPOSITES ON A BASIS OF UHMW - PE

Mulenkov A.N., Vasendina E.A.

The scientific chief: Kondratuk А.А., Candidate of Technical Science, reader

Tomsk polytechnic university, 30 Lenin av., Tomsk, 634050, Russia


Ultrahigh-molecular polyethylene (UHMW-PE) received by polymerization of polythene on complex metalloorganic catalysts at low pres-sure, and this product differs from others ther-moplasts by a series of rather valuable proper-ties. Cracking and shock loading resistance, ex-clusive chemical resistance to influence of acids, alkalis and other aggressive environments can be attributed to them. Besides, radiotolerance and ability to conservation of mechanical proper-ties at superlow temperatures (up to -240 0С) are observed.

The base types of UHMW-PE let out as a powder, with nonstandardized granulometric composition, without additions, colorless and having values of average molecular weight with more than 1·106 (g/mole). UHMW-PE is proc-essed into products by methods of sintering, hot-pressing, plunger extrusion, spraying, gel-spinning of fibre.

In connection with small density of UHMW-PE (less than 1,0 g/sm3) and relatively high me-chanical characteristics, the opportunity of appli-cation of compositions on its basis is very per-spective as materials for constructional purpose, instead of traditionally used.

The insertion of filler-modifiers into composi-tion of polymeric compositions made of these materials, allows to change properties of prod-ucts, including operational.

In this work some functionalities of compos-ite materials on a basis of UHMW-PE, having a fine-dyspersated powder electrolytic copper as the filler -modifier, are considered.

For researches a samples from compositions containing a copper with quantities 3, 7, 10 and 13 % by weight, were made by a method of hot pressing, and the powder UHMW-PE is used as a matrix which was made in ltd "Tomsk petro-chemical centre".

Formation of new materials with the special properties, in particular for using in electrotech-nical direction, has predetermined borders of the given work.

According to the accepted gradation, all sol-ids are subdivided, depending on value of spe-cific volume resistance (ρV), into three groups:

dielectrics, semiconductors and conductors. In an initial condition the UHMW-PE is a dielectric (isolator). It is known that the insertion of poly-meric materials of highconductive fillers into composition (silver, медь, никель) allows the given compositions to transfer into the category of conducting materials. The given effect is reached at the certain percentage ratio of «di-electric matrix - highconductive filler». The re-search of electrical conductivity of the received compositions were carried out by the authors, and it was established what a value of ρV de-creases from 4,84·1010 to 6,29·109 (Оm·sm) at quantities of modifier are 3 % and 13 %, respec-tively. However, the received data allow un-equivocally to attribute a researched composi-tions to dielectric group.

Especially it is necessary to note an impor-tance of change of such mechanical characteris-tics as a strength, hardness and wear-resistance of compositions according to their structure and in process of use. These researches were car-ried out and are submitted as the diagrams.

Measurement of wear-resistance is carried out on installation «IIP - 1», and the research of samples on a stretching is carried out by the re-search machine "Instron". Measurement of hardness per Sor is carried out on installation «Impulse-1R», and it is carried out at realization of Brinell’s method on hardometer «TSh - 2» with using effort of 250 kg and indenter (ball by a diameter of 10 mm).

The results of researches of the above men-tioned four compositions on wear are given in a fig. 1. Analyzing the given dependences it is possible to make a conclusion that the increase of quantity of filler over 3% influences on in-crease of wear of materials. However a sharp increase of wear-resistance occur at the con-tents of the modifier more than 10% and it is ex-pressed by the diagram “UHMW-PE + Cu 13 %)”. The duration of operating time made 90 min.

92



Fig. 1 Dependences of wear material accord-ing to friction time at abrasive friction

The samples (made in respectively with all-

Union State Standard) were lead up to destruc-tion at a stretching at research of strength char-acteristics. It is necessary to note that deforma-tions of destruction εR of given compositions were in a range from 317 % up to 342 %, it con-siderably exceeds a values of plastics which use today.

Values of limiting strength σR (МPа) are given in a fig. 2.

Fig. 2 Breaking stress dependence according to filler percentage

As it above was marked that hardness is im-

portant operational characteristic of materials. At research a hardness of polymeric materials is determined by a Sor’s method which based on penetration depth of scleroscope indenter under load. However experiments have shown that hardness of our composites is on border of a possible maximum for the given method. There-fore similar researches were carried out by Brinell’s method at above described conditions.

The results of supervision are given in a fig. 3 and fig. 4. It is necessary to note that the ranges of values of Sor can compare with ranges of values of hardness by received prints by the Brinell’s method, but linear correlation is not present. Nevertheless, the general analysis of dependences in both figures shows that hard-

ness decreases with increase of filler quantity and the minimal value is reached at filler per-centage about 10 % by weight. The further in-crease of filler content has shown an increase of compositions hardness which determined by this two methods.

Fig. 3 Hardness dependence per Sor (А) ac-cording to filler percentage

Fig. 4 Hardness dependence per Brinell ac-cording to filler percentage

The received results of this research can be

used as the recommendations at creation of ma-terials with similar composite structure and mod-eling of functional borders of their application.

Literatura: 1. Ultrahigh-molecular polyethylene of high

density/ Ed. by I.N. Andreeva, E.V.Veselovskaya, Е.I. Nalivayko and etc.-L.: Khimiya, 1982. – 80 p.

2. Radimiselsky I.D., Sherban N.I. Some features of condensation of powders at various stages of condensation. Poroshkovaya metallur-giya, 1980, 11, p. 12 - 19.

3. Mulenkov A.N., Kondratuk A.A., Zenin B.S. Mechanical proporties of ultrahigh-molecular polyethylene which is processed into products by hot pressing. XIII International STC

93

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 «Modern engineering and technologies». - Тomsk: TPU, 2007. – v. 2 - p. 166 - 168

4. Kondratuk A.A. Research of variation of characteristics of polymeric composition materi-als. All-Russian STC «NMТ-2008». - Мoskow,

2008. – v. 1. - p. 134 - 135

SPECTROSCOPIC PROPERTIES OF Dy3+ DOPED PHOSPHATE GLASS

V.M. Lisitsyn, E.F. Polisadova, H. A. Othman

Supervisor: V.M. Lisitsyn, Professor Doctor of physico-mathematical sciences,

Tomsk polytechnic university, 30 Lenin Avenue, Tomsk 634050, Russian Federation


Abstract Ultraviolet and visible absorption meas-urements P2O5-Li2O-ZnO:xDy2O3 glasses were pre-

pared by melt-quench technique. Spectroscopic absorption and cathode-luminescence were measured, the observed peaks were investi-gated. Decay behavior of the emission lines shows two exponential components which can be attributed to indirect excitation of the Dy3+ ion via absorption of the host lattice.

The optical absorption spectra in the ultravio-let, visible and near infrared region were recorded at room temperature. The measurement were conducted on highly polished and parallel faces glass samples using a Jasco V-570 UV/VIS/NIR spectrophotometer in the wavelength region 190-2500 nm.

Luminescence spectra and decay time

measurements Introduction Rare earth (RE) -doped glasses are interest-

ing materials for optical devices such as lasers [1], fiber amplifiers [2], ultraviolet (UV) detectors [3] and hole-burning high-density memory [4]. Doping of glasses with europium (Eu), samarium (Sm) or dysprosium (Dy) leads to light emission in the visible range so can be used in many ap-plications. As usual, excitation of Dy3+ ions in glasses occurs in the visible and soft-UV energy range by means of weak absorbing (parity for-bidden) transitions within the 4f shell [5]. Under high energy electron radiation, fast non-radiative energy transfer from the RE ions to the host ma-terial can results in two exponentials decay pat-tern of the emitted line.

The luminescence spectra were measured at room temperature. Samples were excited with pulses of accelerated electrons (Ee=0.25 Mev, j=8 A/cm2, t1/2 =15 ns). The spectral kinetic study of the cathode luminescence was carried out by a pulse optical spectrometer with monochroma-tor MDR-3, photomultiplier FEU-106 and oscillo-scope GDS-2204 [6] in the spectral range 400-600 nm.

Results Spectroscopic absorption

500 1000 1500 2000 2500Wavelength (nm)

0.00

0.40

0.80

1.20

1.60

2.00

Abso

rpan

ce (a

.u)

Experimental Glass preparation P2O5-Li2O-ZnO:xDy2O3 glasses were pre-

pared from laboratory reagents grades of Analar phosphorus pentaoxide P2O5, lithium Carbonate Li2CO3 and Dysprosium oxide Dy2O3, by melt quench technique. This yielded a series of P2O5-Li2O-ZnO:xDy2O3 glasses where x ranging from 2 – 5.0 wt % Dy2O3 content.

Fig.1. Absorption spectrum of Dy3+ doped-glass.

94


Optical absorption spectra of the samples consist of a cut-off edge in at about 350 nm (Fig.1.) due inter-band transition, and well de-fined peaks of the f-f transitions of the Dy3+ ions. The obtained spectra for all the samples are similar in character (i.e. the peaks positions and the number of observed lines are the same) ex-cept that their intensities are dependent on the Dy3+ content. Transitions from the ground state to various excited states gives rise to absorption lines as follows, from the ground state to (4I15/2 at 452), (6F3/2 at 736), (6F5/2 at 792), (6F7/2 at 894), (6H7/2 at 1084), (6F11/2 , 6H9/2 at 1268) and to (6H11/2 at 1682) nm. Obtained glass spectra show good transmission quality in the visible range of the spectrum making it promising for the use as visible laser active material.

Emission spectra, and kinetic

Fig.2. Cathode-luminescence spectrum, of Dy3+-doped glass, measured at 240μs after excitation pulse.

Fig.3. Decay curve for 4F9/2 - 6H15/2 , transition for P2O5-Li2O-ZnO: 2wt% Dy2O3

Cathode-luminescence spectrum of the

samples,( as shown in Fig.2.) consists of blue and yellow emission lines which can be assigned to the f-f transitions of the Dy3+ ion as follows (from 4F9/2 to 6H15/2 at 481 nm) and (from 4F9/2 to 6H13/2 at 575 nm). The decay pattern of the emission lines shows two exponentials compo-

nents and were fitted using the formula; I(t) = a*exp(t/τ1) + c*exp(t/τ2). With τ1 ranging from about 350μs to about 210 μs for the 4F9/2 - 6H15/2, transition at 481 nm, and from 185μs to 125μs for the 4F9/2 - 6H13/2 at 575 nm, which can be re-lated to the decay of the 4F9/2 excited level, while τ2∼30μs for both of the transitions, which can be related to non-radiative energy transfer from the excited RE ions to the lattice.

1 2 3 4 5 6Concentration (wt%)

0

100

200

300

400

Dca

y tim

e (m

icro

-sec

ond)

Decay time for the:peak at 481 nm

peak at 575 nm

Wavelength (nm)

Intensity (a

.u.)

Fig. 4. Variation of the decay time of the emitted lines with Dy3+ concentration.

Linear dependence of the decay times on

the Dy3+ content was observed as shown in Fig.4, the inverse proportionality of the decay time of the observed peaks, suggests a gradual increase in the transition rates of the 4F9/2 to the two lower levels, 6H15/2 and 6H13/2, According to the relation: Ai=1/τi, [7] where Ai, is the transition probability of the i-level.

Conclusion Spectroscopic absorption of Dy3+doped-

glasses shows that the obtained glass have a high transmission quality in the visible region of the spectrum, and a cut-off edge in the UV por-tion of the spectrum due to transition of the host glass electrons across the band gap. The well defined peaks that observed are assigned to the f-f transitions of the rare earth ion. The emission spectrum shows two bands in the visible region centered at 481, and 575 nm due transitions from 4F9/2 level to 6H15/2 and 6H13/2 respectively. The decay pattern has two exponentials compo-nents and this can be attributed to non-radiative energy transfer from the excited Dy3+ ions to the host lattice. Decay time of the observed peaks, linearly and inversely proportional to the concen-tration of the RE ion. This leads to gradual in-crease of the transition probabilities from the 4F9/2 to the 6H15/2 and 6H13/2.

Time (μs)

Intensity (a

.u.)

95


4. Evidence for long- range interactions be-tween rare-earth impurity ions in nanocrystals embedded in amorphous matrices with the two-level systems of the matrix /R.S. Meltzer, W.M. Yen, H. Zheng, et al// Phys. Rev. B 64 (2001) 100201.

Acknowledgement The authors gratefully acknowledge Profes-

sor Doctor V.Yu, Yakovlev, for the continuous help and fruitful discussion.

5. The synthesis of rare earth borate

glasses and their luminescence properties /Z. Li, P. Wu, X. Jiang, et al // J. Lumin. 40 (41) (1988) 135.

References: 1. Neodymium-doped silica single-mode fi-

ber lasers/ R.J. Mears, L. Reekie, S.B. Poole, D.N. Payne // Electron. Lett. 21 (17) (1985) 738.

2. Low-noise erbium-doped fiber amplifier operating at 1.54 μm /R.J. Mears, L. Reekie, I.M. Jauncey, D.N. Payne // Electron. Lett. 1026 (1987) 23.

6. V. Yakovlev, A. Meleshko, L. Trefilova. Color centers in heavily irradiated CsI(TI) crys-tals// J.of luminescence 128 (2008) 1447-1453.

7. Wolfgang Demtröder, Laser Spectros-copy, Springer, Berlin, 2008. ch-2,p27. 3. M. Schem, M. Bredol, The use of glass

fibers coated with terbium doped sol–gel films in UV sensors // Opt. Mater. 26 (2004) 137.

THERMO-RHYSICAL CONDITIONS OF FORMING GAS-THERMAL COATING ADHESION

Chabanets A.A.

Scientific adviser: Zenin B.S., associate professor

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina avenue, 30


A common feature of all thermal spray coat-ings is their lenticular or lamellar grain structure resulting from the rapid solidification of small globules, flattened from striking a cold surface at high velocities [1].

Coatings generally have poor strength, duc-tility and impact properties. These properties tend to be dictated by the "weakest link in the chain" which in coatings tends to be the particle or grain boundaries and coating/substrate inter-face. Coatings are limited to the load they can carry, and thus require a substrate for support; even then, coatings are poor when point loaded [2].

The main parameter of every spray coating’s functions is adhesion. The magnitude of adhe-sion is determined by a number of thermal – physic characteristics and thermal spray condi-tions. Particularly, one of these conditions is temperature of basic layer. For example it esti-mates the intensity of adhesion formation on basic layer – particle boundary (contact tempera-ture - Тc, the complete crystallization period – tc),

magnitude of stresses (gradient of temperatures on the border area and it’s changing in time) [3].

The task is to estimate how thermal – physic characteristics of basic surface (density, heat capacity, thermal conductivity) and surface heat-ing degree influence on contact temperature, complete crystallization period and changing adhesion strength in coating – basic layer sys-tem. In this work the task is solved by means of computer programs ТЕМPOINT and SPLAT. Computer program ТЕМPOINT is used for calcu-lation thermal field and program SPLAT is ap-plied for calculation relative adhesion strength.

Problem has been calculated under the fol-lowing conditions: particles diameter D=0.1 mm, particles velocity in moment collision with sur-face V=100 m/s, initial surface temperature То = 300К.

The results of numeral model of influence thermal – physic characteristics of basic surface (density - ρ , thermal capacity- С, coefficient of thermal conductivity - λ ) on parameters of basic layer – particle boundary (contact temperature -

96


Тc, complete crystallization period - tc) are dis-played on graphics (Fig. 1,2,3). As standard conditions was accepted: model material particle ( mT = 2200К, L = 120 кJ/kg, ρ = 10400 кg/m 3, С = 1,63 кJ/(kg К), λ = 220 W/(m К)), material of basic surface is steel, which some characteris-tics vary in assigned limit.

The results of numeral model, given before, sho

tics

imp

w, that augment of thermal-physic character-istics of basic layer material reduces the Тc and elevates the tc. The analysis exposes that the changing of thermal-physic characteristics of basic layer material has the largest influence on the complete crystallization period. That is to say, the triple increase of any those characteris-tics leads to the same increasing of the complete crystallization period, as opposed to changing only by 200 degrees of the contact temperature.

The influence of thermal-physic characteris-of particles material on parameters of parti-

cle – basic layer boundary (Тc, tc) was investi-gated in this research work [4]. The results of numeral model given above show that thermal – physic characteristics of basic layer material have opposite action on Тc and tc, in contrast to the one of the characteristics of particle material.

The initial temperature of basic layer is an ortant engineering parameter influencing on

magnitude of the contact temperature and the period of complete crystallize time of particle. Therefore, this parameter influences adhesion strength.

0500

1000150020002500

0,1 1000

3000

4000

6000

8000

100

014

000

1800

020

000

2500

0

ρ, 10^

0012

00

3 kg/m³

Tk, К

0,00E+002,00E+004,00E+006,00E+008,00E+001,00E+01

0,1 1000

3000

4000

6000

8000

1000

012

000

1400

018

000

2000

0

ρ 10^3 kg/m³

tk, 1

0^-6

s

Fig.1. Dependence of contact temperature a ndcomplete crystallization period on basic material density.

0500

10001500

20002500

5 35 75 125

200

250

300

400

λ, W/mК

Tк, К

0,00E+00

5,00E+00

1,00E+01

1,50E+01

2,00E+01

5 35 75 125

200

250

300

400

λ, W/mК

tk, 1

0^-6

s

Fig. 2. Dependence of contact temperature and complete crystallization period on basic material coefficient of thermal conductivity.

0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

100 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

C, кJ/kgК

Tк, К

0,00E+00

5,00E+00

1,00E+01

1,50E+01

100 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000

C, кJ/kgК

tk, 1

0^-6

s

Fig. 3. Dependence of contact temperature and complete crystallization period on basic material thermal capacity.

Let’s retrace the dependence adhesion on

the temperature of basic layer during spraying of different materials onto basic layer. For this re-search the computer program SPLAT is used. Iron is chosen as a basic layer in view of its spe-cial role in machine building as a lot of details are manufactured with iron alloys. Gas – thermal coating is very useful for increasing durability, quality and reliability of these details aluminum, nickel, zirconium, iron, silver and copper have been chosen as particle materials.

From the above research it is obvious that basic surface temperature can influence greatly on adhesion. For some materials when basic layer is heated, adhesion arises considerably for every 100 degrees. Maximum adhesion is ob-tained at heating by 100 – 120 degrees. There is only one exception which is aluminum. Its pecu-

97

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 liarities are high thermal capacity and little den-sity. These characteristics are assumed to influ-ence on the process of adhesion formation at basic layer – particle boundary.

Conclusion. The influence of characteristics of basic layer material on thermal – physic condi-tions of the process of gas – thermal coating formation was analyzed in this work. The results show there are two ways for adhesion increas-ing. The first one consists in heating of basic layer and the second deals with changing its thermal – physic characteristics. The last way can be implemented by changing of basic layer by means of intermediate layer coating method or thermo-chemical treatment.

References: 1. Hasui A., Morigaci О. Welding and spray-

ing. / Translation from Japanese by V.N.Popova, audited by. V.S.Stepin, N.G.Shesterkina - М.: Machine building, 1985.

2. http://www.gordonengland.co.uk/tsc.htm 3. Borisov U.S., Borisova A.L. Plasma pow-

der coating. К.:/ Technica, 1986. 4. Zenin B.S., Eroshenco A.U, Stoy N.V. De-

sign automation gas – thermal coating with given properties: Mechanics and machine building: collected papers - Tomsk 2000.

98

Section VII

INFORMATICS AND CONTROL IN ENGINEERING SYSTEMS

99

Section VII: Informatics and control in engineering systems

BUSINESS PROCESS DESCRIPTION USING BPMN AND BPEL4PEOPLE Nguyen Hoang Trinh

Scientific advisor: Ponomarev A. A., candidate of science, associate professor

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin, 30

Email: [email protected]

Abstract – This thesis will introduce method using business process modeling notation and business process execution language for people which are contemporary popular notation and specification to de-scribe business processes.

1. Introduction It is vague understanding in an organization

as to document circulation exists or not. If the organization can exist in conditions of informal management, obviously it does not need any document circulation. Presently, if organizations want to compete in the market, they have to change their administrative mechanisms. Or-ganizations need to have ordered documentary basis using document circulation system. The earlier the firms use such system, the faster they can get their expected result.

Document circulation is understood as movement of documents in the organization, from the moment they are created or receipted to the moment they are acknowledged. The uni-fied mechanism of working with the documents which are presented in electronic form is called as electronic document circulation. Electronic system allows organizations to reduce costs and to increase result effectively. Consequently, the operating efficiency of organization is raised. There are many software products which allow users to create and supervise document circula-tion system, for instance PayDox from Paybot LLC, Docflow. However, such systems have a big disadvantage: routes of documents are not visual. Therefore, it is very difficult to design business processes and the time taken to create them.

Document circulation system is a part of business process. Hence, the task of designing and modeling document circulation is special case of business process modeling. Business process is a collection of related, structured ac-tivities or tasks that produce specific service or product for a particular customer. In other words, business process is logically connected se-quence of actions which are used in realization of assigned task. There are two approaches to describe business processes. The first one is based on direct transfer from one business func-

tion to another without the intermediary which is called choreography. The executor sends results in performance of function to following executor directly or web service. The second one is based on orchestration. It is possible to tell that, the coordinator is added further to the basic partici-pants of business process and this coordinator is a business process. This coordinator sends messages, inquiries to executors, including web services, receives from them reciprocal mes-sages, analyzes them and on these bases, makes the decision on further course of busi-ness processes. In this approach, executors and web services do not cooperate with each other. They communicate only with the coordinator in reference to the name of business process. An example of such approach is business process execution language (BPEL). All BPEL-processes are described in terms of communication with web service and the blocks in it are strictly de-fined, e.g. receive, invoke, reply.

2. BPMN and BPEL, BPEL4People asso-

ciation The BPEL specification focuses on business

process activities which are assumed to be in-teractions with web services. BPEL4People [1] is the WS-BPEL extension for people, it inherits all features from BPEL, and furthermore, BPEL4People consists of people activities and human tasks which are described in WS-HumanTask [2] specification. This possibility allows users to describe human roles in busi-ness processes which does not allow in BPEL4WS. For example, process of delivering bank loans. This process is accessible on their respective bank sites, using the network inter-face. Clients can use this interface to enter data for their review and to initiate the approval proc-ess. This process involves some checks, and finally informs the client that his or her personal inquiry is approved or rejected. Processing is often automatic and does not demand any hu-man resources. However, there are cases which require bank personnel to be involved in this process. An example of such process is online creditable check which returns ambiguous re-sults. In this case, instead of rejecting the re-quest automatically, the bank employee can

101

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 check up inquiry and decide, approve it or re-duce it. Other examples would be the same if the inquiry exceeds the sum of money which can be approved automatically. In this case, it is possi-ble only with involvement of the bank personnel.

Association between BPMN [3] and BPEL4People brings users abilities to model business process via graphics notations and text description. Especially, BPEL4People fully sup-ports BPMN [Table 1].

Table 1. BPMN, BPEL4WS [4], BPEL4People features BPMN BPEL4WS BPEL4PeopleTask I/O

+ + +

Task Ad-dress

+ + +

Quality Attrib-utes

- - -

Proto-col

+ + +

Control Flow

+ + +

Data Han-dling

+ + +

In-stance Identity

- + +

Roles + + + Events + + + Excep-tions

+ + +

Trans-actions

+ + +

Graph-ics Po-sition

+ - -

Statisti-cal Data

- - -

Human Task

- - +

BPMN (Business process modeling notation)

is well-known as a standard of OMG organiza-tion. It provides four basis categories of ele-ments: flow objects, connection objects, swim-lanes and artifacts.

3. BPMN-BPEL Mapping There are two examples, figures [Fig. 1],

[Fig. 2] which present the mapping from BPMN to BPEL [5].

Fig. 1. While, repeat

Fig. 2. Switch

4. Example of using BPMN and BPEL4People

In the figure [Fig. 3], we can see that there are no solutions when sum of loan is larger than that allowed. In this case business process will immediately stop. Client cannot approve any money.

Fig. 3. Loan approval without people activities

This problem can be solved via integration of

people’s roles in business process [Fig. 4]. If problem occurs, system administrator or the re-sponsible person will take part in business proc-ess. They will decide whether process will con-tinue, or they can send some request with some conditions to user for continuing process or stopping this process without any information. But there is one problem that BPEL4WS does not support schema in [Fig. 4], so we must use BPEL4People instead of BPEL4WS.

Fig. 4. Loan approval

102


5. Program BP Expert As a result of research, the program “BP Ex-

pert” [Fig. 5] has been developed. The purpose of this program is visualization of business proc-esses and granting the possibility of supervision to enhance their performance.

Fig. 5. Program BP Expert

This program was written in C# language,

using Visual Studio 2008, DBMS - MS SQL Server 2005, with technology LINQ, XML, seri-alization.

6. Further work Following developments are offered to im-

prove the current project: - Using BPMN and BPEL4People to de-

scribe business processes. Include human task in business process.

- Load and read file of other softwares, such as ActiveVOS Designer, eClarus Business Proc-

- Create W

ess Modeler.

eb-services for working with this

user to visually model and control

clusion l approach allows users

d

eferences:

program. - Allow

business process via Windows application and web application.

- 7. Con1. Using graphica

to save time and increase operating efficiency. 2. Association between BPMN an

BPEL4People gives users more possibilities to model and control business processes.

R1. BPEL4People specification version 1.0 -

2007. http://www.oracle.com/technology/tech/standards/bpel4people/index.html

2. WS-HumanTask specification v.1.0 2007 http://www.oracle.com/technology/tech/standards/bpel4people/index.html

3. Business Process Modeling Notation v.1.1 – 2008 http://www.bpmn.org

4. Jan Mendling, Gustaf Neumann, Markus Nuttgens, “A comparison of XML Interchange Formats for Business Process Modeling”

5. Logical/Executable BPMN-BPEL mapping and

S.com roundtrip

http://activeVO

103


MODELING OF MIXING PRODUCTS AUTOMATED DISPENSING

Gatilov D., Sap’yan A. Scientific advisor: Michailov V, Yurova M.

Tomsk polytechnic university: 30, Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia E-mail: [email protected]

FESTO laboratory complex contains bottling station which is represented in a following draw-ing:

Fig.1. FESTO laboratory complex

The bottling station fills bottles with liquid.

The liquid is pumped into the metering tank from the main tank. Filling level of the metering tank is detected in the filling station by an analogue fill-ing level sensor. The controller regulates the filling level to the required value via the dynami-cally controlled pump. Bottles are transported to the filling position via conveyors. Pneumatic separator separates the bottles filled with differ-ent filling quantities from the metering tank ac-cording to the selected mode.

The basic sequence of actions in this auto-mation project of dispensing is following:

Fig.2. Sequence of actions in the project

Let’s consider the whole procedure of the automation project developing on the example of end-product dispensing industrial process auto-mation based on FESTO equipment and present considered process of dispensing in the form of separate functional zones and tasks. (fig. 3, ta-ble 1).

Fig.3. Functional zones of dispensing process Table 1. Equipment of functional zones

Functional zone

Used equipment

Ingredient Main tank. Pump. Capacitive proximity sensors.

Dispensing Metering tank. Acoustic sensor. Float switch for bottle level.

Conveyor

Pneumatic feed separator. Bottles. Through-beam sensor.

Filling 2/2-way dosing valve.

Describing each zone and task in the proc-

ess, not only functioning of each zone is defined, but also various elements which operate this zone. They are:

• Electric, mechanical and logic inputs and outputs for each task;

• Deadlocks and relations between sepa-rate tasks.

Industrial process of dispensing uses pneu-matic pump, conveyor belt and 2/2-way dosing valve in the given example. This equipment must be precisely described to define performance characteristics and type of deadlocks necessary in an operating time. An example of the equip-

104

Section VII: Informatics and control in engineering systems ment used in industrial bottling process is given below (table 2). Table 2. Description of conveyor’s engine Engine of conveyor 1. The engine moves conveyor belt with bottles to filling place and further to the conveyor end. • Engine rated brake power: 36W at 65rpm. 2. The conveyor engine is controlled from the operator's station. The quantity of start-ups is counted with the view of maintenance. Counters as well as indicators can be dumped with one button. 3. For work of the conveyor engine the following conditions should be met: • bottle is located in the conveyor start; • filling level sensor in the metering tank does not give out a signal "Level in metering tank be-low minimum"; • 2/2-way dosing valve is closed; • the emergency switch is not active. 4. The conveyor engine is switched off if the bot-tle is present at the conveyor end.

Having executed the physical description of

the devices which are subject to operate we will present the diagramme of inputs and outputs for one of devices (fig. 4). These diagrammes cor-respond to the logic blocks which are subject to programming.

One feeding pump and two conveyor belts are used in our example of industrial process of dispensing. Each engine is operated by own logic "engine block", identical to three devices. This block requires six inputs: two for starting and stopping the engine, one for cleaning a mainte-nance display, one for responsing about engine work (the engine works/does not work), one for response's time, and one for number of the timer, used to measure time.

The logic block also requires four outputs: two for indication of the engine working condi-tion, one for display of disrepairs and one for in-dication of engine's maintenance.

The separate input/output is necessary for start engine also. It is used for engine operate, but at the same time is edited and changes in the program for "the engine block".

Fig.4. Diagramme of inputs and outputs for con-veyor engine

In the described industrial process of dis-

pensing, each device can be started or stopped by pressing the button located on an operator's control panel (fig. 5). The panel contains indica-tors which display a condition of bottling station devices performance.

Fig.5. Operator's console

Last step of the project is decision-making

concerning the operating equipment type which is required for the project.

Choosing modules for use, we also define the programmed controller structure. We will make the configurational diagramme defining the following aspects:

• CPU type • number and type of input/output modules • configuration of physical inputs and out-

puts The example of used equipment configura-

tion to implement an industrial process of end-product dispensing is presented in fig. 6.

105


Fig.6. Configuration of used equipment

References: 1. Bernhard Schellmann, Jürgen Helmich.

Festo Didactic’s Learning System. Bottling sta-tion. Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG, 73770 Denkendorf, Germany, 2006.

2. Программирование с помощью STEP 7 V5.0. Siemens AG 1998.

CREATION OF AN AUTOMATED

STUDENT SURVEY SYSTEM. Zinovyeva N.E.

Research supervisors: Mokina E.E., Asadullina L.I.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, pr.Lenina, 30


The survey of students’ opinions on the work

of teaching staff is a very important activity that should be carried out by any educational estab-lishment. It allows tracing the results of work of a teacher or of a whole department. The automa-tion itself contributes to a more efficient distribu-tion of a teacher’s work load, which earlier in-cluded manual checking and calculating the re-sults. Moreover it becomes more comfortable for students to fill out the blanks and for the head of department to overview the results.

Today the department of Control Systems Optimization has no such software.

So there is a necessity to create the applica-tion for an automated student survey system.

Main principles of the survey system are: 1. Using three-level architecture. The first layer is the layer of database man-

agement system. For this purpose DBMS Oracle is used. The intermediate layer is the server part. And the third – client interface. Such architecture affords to draw a very clear border between business logic and graphic interface. Business

logic is implemented on the server part. The cli-ent application in its turn functions as a graphic representation and is in fact the very means of the survey.

2. Integration with the Global Information System (GIS) of Tomsk Polytechnic University (TPU).

Nowadays this integration is accomplished on the level of database management system. It means that all of the TPU GIS subsystems use the same database and work with shared codifi-ers.

3. Existence of an internal database of the department.

Moreover on the department server there is the own department database created which keeps all the data connected with the survey and partly replicates data of the TPU GIS. This is necessary for providing an access to data unaf-fected by the TPU GIS communication channel quality.

One of the basic moments of the student survey system is the introduction of a PIN – a

106


Section VII: Informatics and control in engineering systems special password given to every student of a concrete group to rate a concrete teacher. At the same time it has its period of validity after expira-tion of which it might be used again. It works the following way: to start a blank the PIN should be entered which is then checked for its actuality and if the result is positive the student might get over to the very filling out.

After the PIN check the student passes on to the page with a list of criteria such as:

- ability of clear topic presenting; - demonstration of accuracy in statements

and standards of speech;

- creative approach to teaching; - interest in students’ successes; - respectful attitude towards students; and so on, each of which should be rated.

The survey will not be finished until all of the fields are filled out.

Moreover there is an extra field providing students with a possibility to express their own opinion.

After this stage the results are sent to the server and saved in the department database.

This process is introduced below.

Illustration 1. PIN-Functioning Diagram

The teachers in turn are able to see the re-

sults. They enter their username and password, the period of time and the number of the group whose rating poses the greatest interest for them. After this the results of the survey are handled and all the necessary information is dis-played on the screen.

In addition the system requires the work of an administrator. His or her task is to support a correct system work. This includes filling in the database initially and in case if the data in uni-versity’s GIS is insufficient.

Another, not less important, task of an ad-ministrator is data actualization. Besides PIN there is one more innovation – “State of activity”. It is a Boolean variable, which possesses values

“0” and “1”. Concerning a group, “1” means that its students still study and have a right to take part in survey. Concerning a teacher it is that he or she still works and holds some disciplines for groups of this department. This “State of activity” is changing as the time flows, so administrator is to watch after actuality of this parameter.

Also on this stage there should be other da-tabase data checked – it should be compared with GIS and in case of deviation corrected or changed by a teacher request.

Another task is PINs’ administrating. It can be divided into three subtasks: creation, expira-tion date control and removing all of the obsolete ones. This also happens as required or by a teacher’s demand.

Illustration 2. PINs administrating

To implement all these processes there

should be a list of SQL queries written. Its main advantages can be presented in the following list:

- SQL standards and a number of com-

patibility tests contribute to stabilization of the language;

- portability across computer systems: SQL-based database products run on computer systems ranging from mainframes and midrange

systems to personal computers, workstations, a wide range of specialized server computers, and even handheld devices;

- Microsoft commitment (SQL Server, ODBC, and ADO): when Microsoft began its ef-fort in the late 1980s to make Windows a viable server operating system, it introduced SQL Server as its own SQL-based offering. SQL Server continues today as a flagship Microsoft product, and a key component of its .NET archi-tecture for web services;

107


- relational foundation: SQL is a language for relational databases, and it has become popular along with the relational database model. The tabular, row/column structure of a relational database is intuitive to users, keeping the SQL language simple and easy to under-stand;

- high-level, English-like structure: SQL statements look like simple English sentences, making SQL easy to learn and understand;

- interactive, ad hoc queries: SQL is an in-teractive query language that gives users ad hoc access to stored data. Using SQL interactively, a user can get answers even to complex questions in minutes or seconds, in sharp contrast to the days or weeks it would take for a programmer to write a custom report program.

- programmatic database access: SQL is also a database language used by programmers to write applications that access a database.

- multiple views of data: using SQL, the creator of a database can give different users of the database different views of its structure and contents;

- dynamic data definition: using SQL, the structure of a database can be changed and ex-panded dynamically, even while users are ac-cessing database contents;

- client/server architecture: SQL is a natu-ral vehicle for implementing applications using a distributed, client/ server architecture; [1]

Client part of application is being written in

Java language. It’s concerned with the fact that

development system of Java is very simple so it can be used by a wide circle of developers, it is object oriented which fits the modern views of programming. It is also a built-in graphical Swing library which presents a wide variety of control items with an attractive interface. Using all these features assists in making an intuitively under-standable interface.

Java-program can be used to work with ex-ternal databases. For this purpose classes to access the database are included into Java.

Interaction of a Java-program with external database server is implemented with the help of special protocol providing the compatibility of Java with other databases (Java Database Con-nectivity, JDBC). [2]

The system client interface is represented as a web-page with different variants of interaction. If the user is a student he or she is supposed to enter his or her PIN, to choose a teacher and his or her group and then passes to the very survey blank filling. If the user is a teacher, then to overview survey results he or she is to enter his username and password.

Implementation of the Automated Students’ Survey System is planned to be accomplished during the spring term of 2009.

Sources: 1. “Introduction To SQL” by McGraw-

Hill/Osborne - www.devarticles.com; 2. Polyakova L.N. “SQL Fundamentals”,

Internet-University of Information Technologies – www.intuit.ru, 2007.

ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEMS Kostenyuk N.A., Rusyaeva D.A.

Scientific advisor: Samsonova E.S.


30, Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia


ERP stands for Enterprise Resource Plan-ning. ERP is a way to integrate the data and processes of an organization into one single sys-tem. Usually ERP systems comprises many components including hardware and software, in order to achieve integration, most ERP systems

use a unified database to store data for various functions found throughout the organization.

The initials ERP originated as an extension of MRP (material requirements planning; later manufacturing resource planning) and CIM (Computer Integrated Manufacturing). It was introduced by research and analysis Gartner firm

108

http://www.devarticles./

http://www.intuit.ru/


http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acronym_and_initialism

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Material_requirements_planning

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manufacturing_resource_planning

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Computer_Integrated_Manufacturing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gartner

Section VII: Informatics and control in engineering systems in 1990. ERP systems now attempt to cover all core functions of an enterprise, regardless of the organization's business or charter. In the past, ERP systems were used in larger industrial types of companies. However, the use of ERP has changed and is extremely comprehensive, today the term can refer to any type of company, no matter what industry it falls in. In fact, ERP systems are used in almost any type of organi-zation - large or small. These systems can now be found in non-manufacturing businesses, non-profit organizations and governments.

In order for a software system to be consid-ered ERP, it must provide an organization with functionality for two or more systems. While some ERP packages exist that only cover two functions for an organization (for example, Pay-roll & Accounting), most ERP systems cover several functions.

Today's ERP systems can cover a wide range of functions and integrate them into one unified database. For instance, functions such as Human Resources, Supply Chain Management, Customer Relations Management, Financials, Manufacturing functions and Warehouse Man-agement functions were all once stand-alone software applications, usually housed with their own database and network, today, they can all fit under one umbrella - the ERP system.

Integration is an extremely important part to ERP's. ERP's main goal is to integrate data and processes from all areas of an organization and unify it for easy access and work flow. ERPs usually accomplish integration by creating one single database that employs multiple software modules providing different areas of an organi-zation with various business functions.

Although the ideal configuration would be one ERP system for an entire organization, many larger organizations usually create and ERP system and then build upon the system and external interface for other stand alone systems which might be more powerful and perform bet-ter in fulfilling the organizations needs. Usually this type of configuration can be time consuming and require lots of labor hours.

An ideal ERP system is when a single da-tabase is utilized and it contains all data for vari-ous software modules. These software modules can include:

− Manufacturing: functions of engineering, capacity, workflow management, quality control, bills of material, manufacturing process, etc.

− Financials: accounts payable, accounts receivable, fixed assets, general ledger and cash management, etc.

− Human Resources: benefits, training, payroll, time and attendance, etc

− Supply Chain Management: inventory, supply chain planning, supplier scheduling, claim processing, order entry, purchasing, etc.

− Projects: costing, billing, activity man-agement, time and expense, etc.

− Customer Relationship Management: sales and marketing, service, commissions, cus-tomer contact, calls center support, etc.

− Data Warehouse: a module that can be accessed by organizations customers, suppliers and employees.

Before ERP systems, each department in an

organization would most likely have their own computer system, data and database. Unfortu-nately, many of these systems won’t be able to communicate with one another or need to store or rewrite data to make it possible cross com-puter system communication. For instance, the financials of a company were on a separate computer system than the HR system, making it more intensive and complicated to process cer-tain functions.

Once an ERP system is in place, usually all aspects of an organization can work in harmony instead of every single system needing to be compatible with each other. For large organiza-tions, increased productivity and less types of software are a result.

Implementing an ERP system is not an easy

task to achieve, in fact it takes lots of planning and consulting. Implementing ERP software is typically not an "in-house" skill, so even smaller projects are more cost-effective if specialist ERP implementation consultants are employed. Length of time to implement an ERP system de-pends on the size of the business, the scope of the change and willingness of the customer to take ownership for the project. A small project (e.g., a company of less than 100 staff) may be planned and delivered within 3-9 months; how-ever, a large, multi-site or multi-country imple-mentation may take years.

ERP implementation is considerably more difficult (and politically charged) in organizations structured into nearly independent business units, each responsible for their own profit and loss, because they will each have different proc-esses, business rules, data semantics, authori-zation hierarchies and decision centers.

Many organizations did not have sufficient internal skills to implement an ERP project. This resulted in many organizations offering consult-ing services for ERP implementation. Typically, a consulting team was responsible for the entire ERP implementation including planning, training, testing, implementation, and delivery of any cus-tomized modules. They help an organization go

109


Some security features are included within an ERP system to protect against both outsider crime, such as industrial espionage, and insider crime, such as embezzlement. A data-tampering scenario, for example, might involve a disgrun-tled employee intentionally modifying prices to below-the-breakeven point in order to attempt to interfere with the company's profit or other sabo-tage. ERP systems typically provide functionality for implementing internal controls to prevent ac-tions of this kind.

live with their new system, with product training, workflow, improve ERP's use in the specific or-ganization, etc.

Customization services work by extending the use of the new ERP system or changing its use by creating customized interfaces and/or underlying application code. While ERP systems are made for many core routines, there are still some needs that need to be built or customized for an organization.

Support services include both support and maintenance of ERP systems. For instance, trouble shooting and assistance with ERP is-sues.

Disadvantages of ERP Systems While advantages usually outweigh disad-

vantages for most organizations implementing an ERP system, here are some of the most com-mon obstacles experienced. Usually many ob-stacles can be prevented if adequate investment is made and adequate training is involved, how-ever, success does depend on skills and the experience of the workforce to quickly adapt to the new system.

For most mid-sized companies, the cost of the implementation will range from around the list price of the ERP user licenses to up to twice this amount (depending on the level of customi-zation required). Large companies, and espe-cially those with multiple sites or countries, will often spend considerably more on the implemen-tation than the cost of the user licenses - three to five times more is not uncommon for a multi-site implementation.

− Customization of the ERP software is limited;

− Re-engineering of business processes to fit the "industry standard" prescribed by the ERP system may lead to a loss of competitive advan-tage;

Advantages of ERP Systems In the absence of an ERP system, a large

manufacturer may find itself with many software applications that neither talk to each other nor interface effectively. Tasks that need to interface with each other may involve:

− ERP systems can be very expensive (This has led to a new category of "ERP light" solutions);

− Integration among different functional areas to ensure proper communication, produc-tivity and efficiency;

− ERPs are often seen as too rigid and too difficult to adapt to the specific workflow and business process of some companies;

− Design engineering (how to best make the product);

− Many of the integrated links need high accuracy in other applications to work effectively. A company can achieve minimum standards, then over time "dirty data" will reduce the reliabil-ity of some applications;

− Order tracking, from acceptance through fulfillment;

− The revenue cycle, from invoice through cash receipt; ERP Systems centralize the data in one

place, example customer and financial data. This can increase the risk of loss of sensitive informa-tion, if there is any security breach.

− The ability to streamline different proc-esses and workflows;

− Tracking the three-way match between purchase orders (what was ordered), inventory receipts (what arrived), and costing (what the vendor invoiced);

In general, ERP software combines the data

of formerly separate applications. ERP Software solution helps to integrate tasks across manufac-turing, logistics, distribution, inventory, shipping, invoicing, accounting, marketing and human re-sources management. This simplifies keeping data in synchronization across the enterprise as well as reducing the complexity of the required computer infrastructure. It also contributes to standardizing and reducing the number of soft-ware specialties required within IT departments.

− The accounting for all of these tasks: tracking the revenue, cost and profit at a granu-lar level.

ERP Systems centralize the data in one place, for example customer, financial data. This eliminates the problem of synchronizing changes and can reduce the risk of loss of sensitive data by consolidating multiple permissions and secu-rity models into a single structure.

110

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Engineering

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Invoice

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Purchase_order

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inventory

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cost

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Accounting

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Revenue

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cost

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Profit

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Security

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Industrial_espionage

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Embezzlement

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internal_control

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Workflow


SOFT AND METHODICAL COMPLEX FOR DEVELOPMENT ACS SOFTWARE Krasovskaya E.K., Musrepov E.A.

Scientific supervisor: Skorospeshkin V.N., Ph.D., the associate professor,

Asadullina L.I., the senior teacher, Urova M.V., the teacher

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, pr. Lenina, 30


Nowadays it’s very hard to imagine any

technological process without automatic or automated control system (ACS) because the availability of this system provides high quality control and management of technological proc-ess and optimization of project cost.

Development of automated control system is sufficiently difficult and painstaking work of a highly-qualified specialist engaged in designing and debugging such systems. Modern specialist must have skills of industrial controller program-ming and creation of visualization program based on different Scada-systems.

Visualization of this automated control sys-tem is the important design stage of automated control system of technological process and it’s realized with SCADA-systems. Application of SCADA-systems allows to simplify substantially the development of the software, to reduce time-frame of development, and also to provide high quality of regulation.

Thereupon preparation of specialists with high qualification in the field of automated con-trol system of technological process requires educational laboratories equipped with industrial microprocessor controllers and software prod-ucts and demands methodical support to ac-complish laboratory and course projects. The purpose of the given work is the development of the software and educational support to work on the project in the course of «Automated informa-tion-control systems», which allows to acquire theoretical knowledge in the field of automated control system and to receive practical skills of programming control, regulation and alarm proc-esses, realized by industrial microprocessor con-trollers. This also allows to study SCADA-packages and use them for regulation process visualization.

Modern automated control systems of tech-nological process are realized on a basis of in-dustrial microprocessor controllers. There are a lot of controllers which are widely used in prac-tice such as Remicont, Lomicont, Kross, Trassa, etc. Laboratory of automatics and computer sys-tems department of Tomsk Polytechnic Univer-sity is equipped with industrial microprocessor

controller Kross-500 which is a modernized and advanced version of Kross controller for distrib-uted open systems, known for its high reliability and productivity. The use of the given controller at work on course project allows to check the efficiency of created software and to debug it.

In the modern world market of the software there are a plenty of the firms, which produce SCADA-packages: Trace Mode, FIX, Citect, RealFlex, InTouch, Genesis, MasterScada and others.

MasterScada is not simply one of modern SCADA-packages, it’s the conceptually new tool for development of automated control system of technological process where the set of means and the methods providing sharp reduction of labour expenditures and increase the reliability of created system is realized.

MasterScada is the full-function SCADA-software package with expanded functionality. Reception and transmission data and messages on the basis of ОРС standards are built in a ker-nel of a package. The maximal support of all standards (XML, HTML, ODBC, OLE, COM/DCOM, ActiveX, etc.) provides all neces-sary opportunities for joining external programs and systems.

Software and methodical complex for devel-opment of «The software of automated control system of technological process realized on the basis of controller Kross-500» course project is presented in this work.

The methodical part contains a complex of methodical instructions for studying:

The controller Kross – 500; Software package Isagraf for realization

of the regulating program; ОРС technology for construction of com-

puter-controlled systems; Russian package MasterScada. The software contains the regulation process

visualization, control and alarm programs. Visu-alization program allows to realize the following functions:

To visualize the change of regulating system parameters in the digital and graphic form;

111


To change regulator adjustment parame-ters, admissible thresholds and adjustable size;

To alarm in cases of infringements of admissible limits;

To research the work of regulating sys-tem at the presence of revolting influences.

The check of efficiency for created regulating program, study of the alarm and protection sys-tems at work are carried out on a laboratory complex presented as a diagram in figure 1.

The given complex consists of Kross-500 controller, AVK-6 analog computer complex, an alarm board and the personal computer repre-senting a camera station. The electronic model assembled on AVK-6 analog computer complex is used as the object of control.

Fig.1. The block diagram of laboratory complex

The regulating program is constructed on the

basis of the project created in Isagraf environ-

purpose of this project is PID regulation. The interrelation of MasterScada and Isagraf is car-ried out by means of the OPC-server. The visu-alization program allows to change adjustments of regulator, to supervise excess the adjustable parameter limits, and also to research the work of regulating system at presence of interfer-ences. Using this program, it's possible to inves-tigate dynamic properties of regulating system with various regularities.

The interface of the v

ment in FBD and ST languages and the main

isualization program is pre

work will allow students to fam

get

sented in figure 2. The results of this iliarize with the modern industrial controller

Kross-500 known for its high reliability and pro-ductivity, to study the methodology of program-ming in a different languages of modern control-lers determined by the international standard IEC 1131-3, to master OPC technology of build-ing automated control system of technological process and let familiarize with MasterScada known for its developed functional possibilities and conveniences of realizing dynamic function.

Executing this course project students will not only theoretical knowledge but gain prac-

tical skills of realizing the main functions of com-puter-controlled systems.

Fig.2. Interface of the visualization program.

112


AN ANALYSIS OF PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY OF A VIDEO HEAD TRACKING SYSTEM O. Krivtsov, A. Korikov

Advisor: A. Korikov, Doctor of Science, Professor

Tomsk State University of Control Systems and Radioelectronics

634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina st., 40


Introduction In [1] we presented a system that is intended

to track user’s head on a video sequence (http://headtracking.googlepages.com). In our system the head (or face) is modeled using one of four available geometric 3D surfaces (fig. 1) mapped with a texture image.

Figure 1. Head models (from left to right):

Candide-3, 3D cylinder, 3D ellipsoid, 2D rectan-gle.

User’s head is tracked as follows. On the

first video frame we detect an approximate face rectangle using a 2D face detection algorithm. Then a head model is initialized using informa-tion received from face detector. For each sub-sequent pair of frames we determine inter-frame head motion parameters and 3D location of head model is updated to best fit current video frame. Head texture is created for the first frame and not updated for subsequent frames (this is also called a static template).

The rest of this paper describes an experi-ment which we use to analyze the head tracking system’s performance and accuracy.

Experimental Setup We use a set of video clips publicly available

on site of Robotics institute of Boston University (http://www.cs.bu.edu/groups/ivc/HeadTracking) as input data for our experiment. There are five persons presented on video clips, shortly de-noted as jim, jam, llm, ssm и vam. Each clip con-tains 200 video frames. We have 9 clips per per-son, 45 clips in total. A user is located in front of the camera placed on a PC monitor. The user moves and rotates his head. Illumination condi-tions are constant. The video sequences have associated measurements of head rotation an-

as i

gles pitch, yaw and roll – let’s denote them

α , iβ and iγ , respectively – around eye co-dinate system for each i-th video frame. The

measurements were produced by the «Flock of Birds» tracking device positioned on top of user’s head. In our experiment we use those values as ground truth.

The experiment is performed on 2 PCs: Pen-tium

or

and

IV 3GHz (denoted as PC1) and on a more powerful AMD Athlon 64 Dual Core (let’s denote it PC2). We have the following steps:

1. First we set Candide-3 as current head model and track head on every 45 input video sequences. The following values per each proc-essed i-th frame are saved to a text file:

a. current head rotation angles iα , iβ iγ pro e );

sist

modsec.) if we per-

form ng o

35-40% on PC1 and

duced by our system (measured in d grees b. frame processing time proc

it (sec.), con-ing of face detection/head tracking time,

model position rendering time, the time of meas-urements recording to a text file and the time of resulting video frame recording to an AVI file;

c. face detection+model initialization time init

it (sec.) if we perform face detection and el initialization on i-th frame; d. head tracking time track

it ( interframe head tracki n a pair of (i-1)-th

and i-th video frames. 2. Step 1 is repeated for the 2-nd, 3-d and 4-

th head model (cylinder, ellipsoid and rectangle). Let’s also note our program’s approximate

processor time usage.

erformance Evaluation PThe CPU usage is about 25-30% on PC2. Expected frame processing time for k-th

head model is determined as

∑=

=kN

procproc tMt 1 , where is the total

es for ead model. Calculated expected value proc

kMt , standard

ii

kk N 1

count of processed fram

kN

k-th h

113

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 deviation proc

ktσ , and mean fra er- second rate (FPS) resented in table 1. We see that the frame processing frequency is about 20 fps on PC1 and about 40-50 fps on PC2. This shows that the system is able to process frames in real time.

Because of size limitations the rest of this pap

mes-p ace detection/Model Initialization Time tec-

tion time

e “face detection+model initi

are p

er presents calculations for PC1 only.

FExpected value init

iMt of face de+model initialization for k-th head model

is presented in table 2. We see that the stagalization” in a relatively slow one. However, it

doesn’t affect the resulting performance since it is (usually) utilized for the first video frame only.

Table 1. Expected value and standard deviation of frame processing time. PC1 PC2

k Head Model kN proc

kMt , sec procktσ , sec kFPS ,

1/sec kN prockMt , sec proc

ktσ , sec kFPS , 1/sec

1 Candide-3 9000 0.05 0.03 20.9 9000 0.02 0.01 49.81

2 Cylinder 9000 0.05 0.02 20.51 9000 0.02 0.02 41.23

3 Ellipsoid 9000 0.05 0.02 20.54 9000 0.02 0.01 44.77

4 Rectangle 8972 0.04 0.02 24.94 8998 0.02 0.01 54.47 Interframe Head Tracking Time Expected value and standard deviation of in-

ter-frame head tracking time for k-th head model is presented in table 3. The right column of table 3 shows that head tracking takes about 73-80% of frame processing time.

Accuracy Evaluation Let’s denote deviation of angle (produced

for i-th frame in our system) from angle iα

iα (measured by «Flock of Birds» device) as

ii α−α=αΔ ˆ . Then the expected value of head rotation angle measurement error is calculated

as

i

∑=

αΔ=αΔ k NM

kN

, where is a total

number of processed video frames for k-th head model. Calculated values are presented in table 4.

ii

k 1

1kN

Let’s plot histograms of angle error distribu-tions. The fig. 2 shows the histograms of angle error distributions for Candide-3 head model. Dashed curves are normal distributions having the same mean M and standard deviationσ val-ues.

Conclusion We have presented results of an experiment

of tracking user’s head on 45 video sequences using four head models: Candide-3, cylinder, ellipsoid and rectangle. The ground truth values of pitch, yaw and roll head rotation angles were known for the video sequences. Approximate system performances were about 20 fps on CPU Pentium IV 3GHz and about 40-50 fps on CPU AMD Athlon 64 Dual Core. Face detection/head model initialization time and inter-frame head

tracking time were evaluated. System accuracy was evaluated by calculating expected values and standard deviations for head rotation angle errors. Histograms of error distributions were plotted.

Table 2. Face detection/model initialization time. Head model kN init

kMt , sec initktσ , sec

Candide-3 45 0.06 0.01

Cylinder 45 0.07 0.02

Ellipsoid 45 0.07 0.01

Rectangle 45 0.07 0.01

Table 3. Interframe head tracking time.

Head model kN

trackkMt

, sec

trackktσ

, sec proc

k

trackk

MtMt

Candide-3 8955 0.04 0.02 0.75

Cylinder 8955 0.04 0.02 0.78

Ellipsoid 8955 0.04 0.02 0.8

Rectangle 8927 0.03 0.02 0.73

Table 4. Head rotation angle measurement er-rors. Head model

αΔM

αΔσ βΔM βΔσ γΔM

γΔσ

Candide-3 2.27 5.26 1.64 7 3.52 -0.46

Cylinder -0.17 7.07 0.83 6.5 -0.25 4.28

Ellipsoid 0.68 9 1.3 5.97 -0.12 4.21

Rectangle .09 -1.86 13 1.31 18.48 0.23 4.94

114


Bibliography 1. Кривцов О. Отслеживание положения

головы человека в пространстве на основе анализа видеокадров / О. Кривцов, А. Кори-

ков // Доклады Томского государственного университета систем управления и радио-электроники. – Томск: Изд-во ТУСУР. – 2008. – 2(18), часть 2. – С. 32–39.

Figure 2. Head rotation angle error distributions for Candide-3 (from left to right): , and αΔ βΔ γΔ .

PAPERLESS RECORDER LOGOSCREEN 500 cf WITH COMPACTFLASH CARD

AND LIFE-CYCLE DATA MANAGEMENT Кругликова Е.Е.

Научный руководитель: Михайлов В.В., доцент каф. ИКСУ

Томский политехнический университет, 634050, Россия, г. Томск, пр. Ленина, 30


Paperless recorder with its program compo-nents is a closed system used for electronic reg-istration, storing, coding and processing of a large data level.

The appearance of the LOGOSCREEN 500 cf is dominated by a 5-inch color display, in which the measurement data can be displayed in a vertical direction, similar to ordinary chart re-corders. But unlike ordinary recorders, the LOGOSCREEN 500 cf does not need any chart paper for recording. Measurement data are stored electronically, and are available for evaluation on the spot as well as in the PC. The integrated life-cycle data management ensures fast traceability of process data referred to spe-cific installations. According to choice, the LOGOSCREEN 500 cf can be fitted with 3 or 6 electrically isolated measurement inputs. The recorder can be programmed from eight keys, or by using a PC via a CompactFlash card or one of the interfaces.

Pic.1 Block structure

115


Key features: - Measurement data presented numerically

as vertical diagrams (with scaling, numerical dis-play, or as a bar graph).

- Presentation of event traces such as “Bi-nary inputs”

- On-site availability of measurements in the FLASH memory.

- Measurement data are retained, even after a power interruption.

- Saving of data sets on the CompactFlash card.

- Instrument configuration through the keys or the setup program (CompactFlash card or interface).

- Evaluation of archived data with PC evaluation program

- Search function for history analysis. - Adaptation of the memory cycles to the

specific process, using normal, time-of-day and event operation.

- Freely configurable inputs. - Internal sampling rate 250msec for 3 or 6

analog inputs, minimum storage cycle 1sec. - Counters and integrators (6 channels). - Math and logic module (6 channels). - Integrated web server.

Pic.2 Operating principle Configuration is menu-led, using 8 keys.

Three of these have fixed functions assigned (Enter, Menu, Exit), and five alter their function and visual representation according to the menu. The currently active functions are shown on the bottom edge of the screen, so that key functions are always unambiguous during use. The con-figuration on the recorder is protected from un-authorized access by a code number.

Instrument configuration via the setup pro-gram for the PC is more convenient than using the keys on the instrument itself. The configura-tion data can be created on a data medium (CompactFlash card) and read into the recorder, or transferred to the instrument via one of the

interfaces. The PC can be used to output the settings to a printer.

The current process data, configuration data and special instrument data can be read out via the RS232/RS485 interface (extra code), via the Ethernet interface, or through the setup interface that is fitted as standard. The archive data (FLASH memory) can also be read out, in con-junction with the PCC software.

When using the RS232 interface, a maxi-mum cable length of 15m is permitted. A cable length of 1.2km is allowed for the RS485 inter-face. Connection is by a 9-pole SUB-D connec-tor (for RS232/RS485) on the back of the in-strument, or on the front (via the setup interface). Modbus and Jbus protocols are available, and the transmission mode used is RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). The changeover between the RS232 and the RS485 interface is made through the program (configuration).

Connection is by a RJ45 socket on the back of the instrument. Modbus/TCP is used as a pro-tocol. The maximum transmission rate is 10Mbit/sec.

The PC evaluation program (PCA3000) is a program that runs under Windows NT/2000/ XP, and is used to manage, archive, visualize and evaluate the recorder data that have been stored on a CompactFlash card.

- The data from the LOGOSCREEN 500cf are read in by the evaluation program and saved in an archive file. The lifecycle data management ensures that, if needed, all the data throughout the lifetime of a system can be saved in an ar-chive file. Changes to the configuration are shown separately, together with the correspond-ing measurement data.

- The user can gain access at any time to certain data sets (configuration), which can be distinguished by supplementary information. In addition, it is possible to restrict the time periods to be evaluated.

- Any analog channels or event traces of a paperless recorder can subsequently be com-bined into PCA groups in PCA3000.

- Since each group is displayed in a sepa-rate window, several groups can be shown si-multaneously on the screen and compared.

- Operation by mouse or keys. - The export filter makes is possible to ex-

port the stored data for processing in another program (e.g. Excel).

- The PCA3000 evaluation program sup-ports network capability, i. e. several users can obtain data from the same database in the net-work, independently of one another.

The measurements from the analog inputs are acquired continuously in a 250msec sam-pling cycle. These measurements also serve as the basis for limit monitoring. The measurements

116


If the instrument is not in event operation and not in timed operation, then normal opera-tion is active by default.

are transferred to the main memory of the in-strument, according to the configurable storage cycle and stored value (average, momentary value, maximum, minimum, or peak value). - Timed operation.

Timed operation is active on a daily basis, within a programmable time period.

The data stored in the main memory are regularly copied to the Compact Flash card in 4 kbyte blocks. The main memory is written to as a ring memory, i.e. when it is full, the oldest data will automatically be overwritten by new data. The memory capacity is sufficient for approx. 350,000 measurements.

- Event operation. Event operation is activeated/terminated by

a control signal (binary input, combination alarm). As long as this control signal is active, the instrument is in event operation.

The operating modes have different priori-ties:

The data are stored in coded form in a pro-prietary format. If the CompactFlash card is re-moved from the instrument, no data will be lost immediately, as these data are still stored in the FLASH memory.

Operating mode Priority: Event operation 1 (higher), Timed operation 2, Normal operation 3 (lower). An over/underlimit condition will trigger an

alarm. The alarm can be output through a relay or used as a control signal for changing over the operating mode from normal/timed operation to event operation. The storage cycle and stored value can be configured separately for all three operating modes.

References: 1. Paperless Recorder LOGOSCREEN 500

cf with CompactFlash card [Electronic resource]. – access mode: http://www.jumo.spb.ru/type/70.6510, free.

2. Paperless Recorder LOGOSCREEN 500 cf. Operating Manual.

- Normal operation.

POLYMER OPTICAL FIBER LINK OPTIMIZATION

ON THE BASIS OF SIMULINK® SOFTWARE R. Kruglov, S. Loquai, B. Schmauss

Tomsk State Univ. of Control Systems and Radioelectronics,

Lenin ave. 40, 634050 Tomsk, Russia


1. Introduction In order to achieve a better performance of

polymer optical fiber (POF) communication a comprehensive modeling of the physical system layer is required. Using of CAD software allows to simulate the whole telecommunication system under the different conditions and find the opti-mum. The suitable solution for the given task could be Simulink® with additional user-defined blocks and models. The availability of Communi-cations Blockset™ extends Simulink to design and visual simulate communication systems and their components.

The purpose of the given work is a simula-tion of POF system on the basis of Simulink. In the framework of the given investigation applica-tion of different equalization techniques for high

speed POF transmission system has been con-sidered. Models of the SI-POF Toray PFU-CD1001 and Mitsubishi GH4001 based on the experimentally measured data and other system components have been realized in Simulink. The features of the POF models development have been discussed.

Application of the presented results can be found in development and simulation of the high-speed processor interconnections and short-range networks.

2. Framework of simulation The framework of the simulation includes

several separate modules which describe behav-ior of telecommunication system components (see Fig.1). Each module has local parameters

117

http://www.jumo.spb.ru/type/70.6510

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 and variables which can be changed by user during a simulation. These variables describe the physical parameters of the corresponding modules. In additional there are several global parameters (e.g. operating wavelength, bit rate, sampling rate, bit allocation) that are available for all modules of simulation.

Encoder/ Preproc. POF RXTX

Decoder/ Postproc.

Meas. devices

Global variables:Wavelength,Bitrate, etc.

Binary data;Coded signal (electrical);Optical signal;

Figure 1 – Framework of simulation The transmission of the global variables be-

tween modules are realized on the basis of the typical Simulink functions

find_system(<sys>, 'c1', cv1,…); get_param(<obj>, 'parameter') The data signal which is represented by one-

dimensional vector is evaluated by each module in consecutive order.

As measurement devices the blocks of Communications Blockset (e.g. eye diagram scope, scatter plot scope) can be used. Due to a Simulink environment the simulation has user-friendly interface with handy dialog boxes for each module; availability of the “drag and drop” technology allows to construct visual layouts of data transmission systems.

3. Description of POF system modules The developed modules describing the com-

ponents of POF transmission system are mostly based on a Level-2 M-file S-functions.

The basis of block describing POF behavior is the experimental data which contains informa-tion about fiber frequency response, output beam NA and attenuation coefficient depending on fiber length and excitation conditions [1]. This experimental data describes the behavior of the fiber up to 100 meters length. Known Gaussian approximation of the POF frequency response [2] have not been used in the given simulation, because it is not fit well in the high-frequency range which can be effectively used in the framework of discrete multitone (DMT) technol-ogy. Furthermore Gaussian approximation does not take into account the non-linearity of phase-frequency variation.

Transmitter module (TX) can be represented by LED and LD as well. In the given simulation the nonlinear effects of transmitter have been neglected. The options of LED that can be

changed by user include wavelength; NA; aver-age power; modulation index; clipping level; bandwidth. In additional to parameters men-tioned above user can adjust relaxation oscilla-tion frequency; laser damping constant; RIN for transmitter based on LD.

The bases of modules describing the opera-tion of the pin photodiode and amplifier are fre-quency responses of the corresponding units and their noise characteristics. The equivalent circuit of the photodiode is shown in fig.2. The operation of the photodiode up to 2GHz can be properly described by the following simple equa-tions. The photocurrent of pin photodiode is de-termined by [3]

( ) [ ] [ DDc

ph fjfch

Pi τπτπ ]ληω ⋅⋅−⋅⋅⋅⋅

= expsinc ,

where η is the quantum efficiency; Pc is the optical power incident on the photodetector; λ is the wavelength of the incident light; h is Planck's constant; c is the speed of light in vacuum; τD is the drift time.

Figure 2 – Equivalent circuit of the photodiode The dialog box of the pin photodiode in-

cludes the following tunable parameters: bulk dark current, surface dark current, bias voltage, i-layer thickness, photodiode capacitance, bon wire inductance, series resistance and diameter of the photodiode. The basic sources of the pho-todiode noise are quantum noise, bulk dark cur-rent and leakage dark current [3,4] which have Poisson statistics.

The amplifier type can be chosen by user during the simulation. There are two options: amplifier without a feedback (e.g. low-impedance amplifier) and transimpedance amplifier. The noise source of the amplifier is thermal noise. For instance the variance of thermal noise in a case of low-impedance amplifier is determined by total resistance Rt including load resistor RL and input resistance Rin of the amplifier, noise figure F(f), and frequency response of amplifica-tion stage Ht(f) and equalizer He(f) [3,4].

4. Simulation results and discussion In order to demonstrate capabilities of the

simulation program and compare modeling re-sults with experimental data the 2PAM transmis-sion over 100m Mitsubishi GH4001 has been realized in simulation software (see Fig.3).

118


a.

0.2 0.6 1 1.4 1.8Time [ns]

Eye diagram – experiment

b. Figure 3 – Eye diagram of 1390Mbps data stream: a – simulation result; b – experimental data

1390Mbps data stream have transmitted

over system consisted of LD (average optical power +6.7dBm, NA = 0.17, wavelength 650nm); POF Mitsubishi GH4001 (fiber length 100m, ~14.7dB attenuation); pin photodiode Hamamatsu S5052; transimpedance amplifier (bandwidth ≈ 1GHz); 3rd order passive equalizer (16dB depth of equalization). Experimentally measured BER is equal ≤10-9. Experimental and simulated dependences of BER on bit rate in the given system are shown in Fig.4

1400 1500 1600 1700 1800bit rate [Mbit/s]

-1-2-3-4

log(BER)

-5-6-7-8-9

-10

ExperimentSimulation

Figure 4 Results shown in Fig.3,4 demonstrate the

sufficient experiments compliance. That is why the developed models can be efficiently used in further simulation in order to achieve a better performance of POF communication systems.

Next step of the modeling is connected with application of a nonlinear equalization technique to achieve higher bit rate performance.

The decision feedback equalizer (DFE) al-lows to equalize a linearly modulated signal transmitted along a dispersive channel. In the given simulation the recursive least squares (RLS) algorithm [5] has been used to adaptively adjust the DFE tap coefficient vector in order to minimize the squared equalization error.

Figure 5 – Dependence of BER on received op-tical power in a case of using DFE (2Gbps bit rate)

The least-mean-square (LMS) algorithm for

calculation of the DFE tap coefficients also has advantages connected with computational sim-plicity. However, this technique has serious dis-advantage which is caused by slow conver-gence.

The calculation result of dependence of bit error ratio on received optical power with appli-cation of DFE technique is shown in Fig.5. Pa-rameters of the POF system simulated in the given example have not been changed in com-parison with previous calculation, but the bit rate has been increased up to 2Gbps. The obtained results show the feasible capacity of the tele-communication system based on polymer optical fiber. 2Gbps data stream can be transmitted over 100m POF Mitsubishi GH4001.

Acknowledgments This work is partly funded by Russian Foun-

dation For Basic Research (#09-02-99024). Ro-man Kruglov was supported by Bayerische For-schungsstiftung (PDOK-56-08).

References: 1. R. Kruglov, A. Bachmann, C.-A. Bunge,

H. Poisel, A. Zadorin, O. Ziemann, V. Appelt “Dynamic signal distortion in short lengths of SI POF”, 15th International Conference on Plastic Optical Fibre, Seoul, Korea, 2006, pp.531-535.

119


2. O. Ziemann, J. Krauser, P. Zamzow, W. Daum POF Handbook: Optical short range transmission systems. 2nd edition / Springer-Verlag, 2008.

4. L. Kasovsky, S. Benedetto, A. Willner Optical fiber communication systems / Artech house, Inc., 1996.

5. J.G. Proakis Digital communication, 4th edition / New York, Mc Graw-Hill, 2001. 3. K.J. Ebeling Integrierte Optoelektronik:

Wellenleiteroptik, Photonik, Halbleiter Springer-Verlag, 1992.

ONLINE VIDEO EDITOR “AXIMEDIA MOVIE STUDIO”

Kuzemchik V.D.

Supervisor: Sokolova V.V., PhD

Tomsk Polytechnic University , 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenina str.

[email protected]

In addition, the Win Mobile application that

allows customers to upload videos directly from mobile devices will be created. It will scan the directory with recorded videos and 2-3 taps send the video to the server, after that application al-lows submitting selected video to the popular video-sharing servers.

The objective of the project Aximedia Movie Studio is to create an online video editor without quality loss during video processing.

Functionality of the editor being developed includes video storing and processing. Process-ing features: video-clip part separation, consecu-tive junction of two videos, visual and audio ef-fects, transitions between videos, PiP (picture-in-picture) function, audio track covering and titling.

Video processing requires great effort. There is a tendency to use distributed computing for such problems solving nowadays. Video editor web-service which handles video processing on the server side is planned to be put into Win-dows Azure cloud. Azure will allow paralleling of tasks of online video editor[3]:

Online video editor is being implemented us-ing S+S (Software + Services) model. Therefore, it consists of two components: server and client. Server is being created as a web-service, client – as a web-site and as a number of applications for different operating systems, such as Win-dows, Mac OS X, Win Mobile. Development of client for Win Mobile will allow users of mobile devices to edit video of any resolution, which is hard to carry out for today’s mobile devices us-ing local capabilities. The “mobile client” devel-opment work will be started when Silverlight will support Win Mobile.[1]

• Video data transceiving; • Database managing; • Direct video editing. Video editing is based on DirectShow tech-

nology. Therefore, it will be available to put it into the cloud only when Windows Azure will start supporting unmanaged code.

120



Pic.1 “Aximedia Movie Studio Structure”

Pic.2 “Aximos client - Main page” Web-service will store registered users of

online video editor, their visit statistics, rights and video clips they uploaded. This problem is going to be solved using SQL Services. This part of web-service certainly will be put into Windows Azure cloud.

A cross-platform interoperating interface based on XML is being developed in order to connect server and clients. Such an approach allows creating clients for the web-service work-ing under any OS and under any platform. The key technology here is MS WCF.

121


First client of the web-service is a web-application developed using Silverlight 2 plat-form. Exactly this platform will be used to display user’s finished video on the client side. The overview of competitors showed that all the ex-isting online video editors are based on Abode Flash technology, while the system being devel-oped is the first video editor which uses Silver-light 2 platform for the similar tasks solution, namely to display video on the client side. [2]

The target group for the system consists of Internet users who own video cameras or other video capture devices. The video editor also can be used as a video converter, because it will allow uploading, processing and downloading video in a set of formats, such as .asf, .avi, .divx, .mov, .mpeg, .mpg, .mp4, .wmv, .3gp, .qt, .flv. High definition video (HDV) is also supported; therefore users of any cameras (including HD cameras) will be able to use the service being developed. The project requires data transferring channels with high bandwidth. Researches in this area are conducted intensively now (by Cen-tre for Ultrahigh bandwidth Devices for Optical Systems [CUDOS]). Research results will boost popularity of Aximedia Movie Studio.

As it was announced “the Azure Platform Prices will be competitive to other services”. The average cost of using Amazon EC for the mount

is about $14000 per 13000 users. So it will cost about $1.1 per user*month. On lower usage it would go up to $4 per user*month. The price model will be similar to Amazon shop: user could buy the functionality that he need.

As a result the online video editor will be cre-ated, which will allow users having low perform-ance devices and connection to the Internet edit video without looses of quality as if it had a pow-erful montage studio, and afterwards put it on the server available from all over the world and/or download it.

Refrences: 1. Microsoft Silverlight 2 for Mobile: Develop-

ing for Mobile Devices. [Электронный ресурс]. Режим доступа: http://channel9.msdn.com/pdc2008/PC10/, сво-бодный.

2. Microsoft portal site for the Silverlight de-velopment community. [Электронный ресурс]. Режим доступа: http://silverlight.net/, свобод-ный.

3. Azure Services Platform, Community Technology Preview. [Электронный ресурс]. Режим доступа: http://www.microsoft.com/azure/default.mspx, свободный.

AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM OF SAMOTLOR OIL FIELDS

TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES Laktuishin A., Musenko E.

Scientific advisor: Gromakov E., Yurova M.

Tomsk Polytechnic university, 30, Lenin avenue, Tomsk, Russia, , 634050. Automatic control system of Samotlor oil

fields technological processes - «Region -2000» is considered. The basic points of performance are discussed:

functions carried out by «Region-2000» automatic control system;

technical characteristics of «Region-2000» automatic control system;

functions of «Region-2000» automatic control system operator’s interface.

The project of SCADA systems «Region - 2000» developed by «NizhnevartovskASUneft LTD» is based on SCADA- programming pack-

age for operator’s interface in the automatic con-trol system of oil production technological proc-esses RSView32 developed by company Rock-well Automation and SCADA- programming package for the automatic control system opera-tor's interface of the oil refining enterprises - the project of company Rockwell Automation and Honeywell - ProcessLogix. These packages have wide popularity in the world, including for oil applications. SCADA system «Region - 2000» is developed for the decision of specific tasks on Samotlor oil fields while basic SCADA-packages

122

http://silverlight.net/

http://www.microsoft.com/azure/default.mspx

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 are used to solve a wider range of problems, and not only in oil and gas industry.

«Region-2000» automatic control system of oil fields technological processes was created in 1999.

The system is intended for the remote con-trol and handling a complex of oil and gas pro-duction activity technological objects, and also collecting, storing, processing and delivering of the technological information.The system sup-ports a set technological mode of oil extraction and casing-head gas and water pumping to maintain pressure in a productive layer.

The system is used to deliver information to the basic experts of technological services. The diagram of «Region-2000» automatic control system is represented in figure 1.

Functions carried out by «Region-2000» automatic control system. The operator’s inter-face of the automatic control system performs the following functions:

1. Collecting information on equipment work from oil-wells and gas lift compressor stations under the set regulations:

a process equipment condition; measurements from sensors of pres-

sure, discharge rate, temperatures, an engine current;

consumed electric power. 2. Control of mechanized and gas lift oil-

wells: pump start-up/stop; stop, closing or restoration of regulation; change of gas discharge regulation set-

points; deactivation of alarm signals.

3. Management of gas manifold: opening or closing of a blocking off

valve; change of thresholds on pressure of gas

of a high pressure; deactivation of alarm signals.

4. Control of a group measuring unit (GMU): setting a well on continuous, consistent

or immediate measurement; setting time of measurement.

5. Automatic observation over failures and events on oil extraction objects in a background mode with display of failures on the screen of the monitor and support of the sound alarm system.

6. Formation of trends on basic technological parameters.

7. Output of the basic technological parame-ters and equipment condition on a mimic.

Technical characteristics of «Region-2000» automatic control system of oil fields technologi-cal processes are:

1. Simultaneous service of 255 field control-lers of any type (СТМ-1, CТМ-ZK2, СТК-Z181,

МК-3ХХ, ТК-1616, ТМ-660, SLC, MicroLogix 1500 and others) in one extraction point;

2. Work with any microcontrollers of sucker-rod plutonic pump and electrical axifugal pump;

3. Work with all standard and non-standard exchange protocols;

4. Allows connecting more than 10 physical communication lines with fields of oil-wells at the same time;

5. Work with any type of radio stations; 6. A maximum quantity of parameters proc-

essed by system from one object (a field of oil-wells) is 500 signals;

7. The period of operational information stor-age is one year, archival - is limited to possibility of means;

8. Work with new measuring units (factory Neftemash - the city of Tyumen, factory Elektron - the city of Tyumen, Kurgan factory of pipeline armature "Ikar" - the city of Kurgan).

The system carries out an information trans-fer (both in automatic, and in a manual mode) about work of oil-wells in system of gathering and processing of the oil-field information «Oil-infosystem» and allows communication with any other systems. System «Region-2000» gives representation of the technological information in a kind of mimic, tables, schedules of dynamom-etry and wattmetry, schedules and tables on sta-tions electrical axifugal pump of any type, trends and various reports, enables automatic integra-tion of all oil and gas production activity data-bases in one central database and allows to carry out the analysis, research of data for any time period. The system carries out the control over such objects as compressor station, the field pump station, field sectional transformer substation and allows connection of any other objects. The system enables automatic observa-tion over failures and events on objects of oil extraction in a background mode with display of failures to the screen of the monitor and support of the sound alarm system.

Functions of «Region-2000» automatic con-trol system operator’s interface.

Continuous round-the-clock data ex-change with controllers.

Visualization of technological process and the equipment parameters in real time through mimic and tables.

Visualization of power consumption on separate cells.

Mimic of GMU contains full information on equipment work on separately taken object. It is possible not only to view, but also to make changes and control the equipment on objects of extraction, not leaving from mimics.

Processing of the received information. Presenting results in the form of diagrams.

123


Presenting processing results in the form of spreadsheet tables MS EXCEL.

Replication of data through a corporate network on a server of database MS SQL.

The server of database gives informa-tion to client places for viewing mimics, tables, trends in real time.

The system allows control of alarm signals. The type of appropriate equipment should be chosen to trace a signal of failures. After re-cording information about the failures in the table, there is a sound signal. The table repre-sents a number of parameters on each type: an index, equipment type, terminal number, event,

occurrence date, date of receipting, the receipt-ing operator’s name.

Development in oil - gas industry of Russia, increase in oil production in the country, a sus-tainable development of geological prospecting works - a necessary condition for economy of Russia to exit from crisis, improve standard of living of the population in the country.

References: 1. Department of the Automatic control

system of technological processes. OJC «NizhnevartovskASUneft» [Electronic resource]. - Access mode: http://scada.asuneft.ru , is free. - The title from the screen.

Figure 1. The diagram of automatic control system of Samotlor oil fields technological processes.

124

http://scada.asuneft.ru/


USE OF SCADA SYSTEMS FOR DEVELOPMENT OF COMPUTER-AIDED MANUFACTURING IN THE STUDENTS' PRACTICE

O.S. Lugacheva

Scientific adviser: S.V. Efimov, engineer, assistant; scientific adviser 2:

L.I. Asadullina, senior teacher

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 30 Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia


The Introduction The major aspect of the future engineer

preparation is students’ independent perform-ance of the tasks close to those, which they can face in their future practical activities. Student of speciality «Control and Informatics in Technical Systems» should receive skills of work with SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisi-tion) systems. Development of the research pro-ject can become one of the most important and interesting stages of SCADA systems develop-ment. During performance of the project student can got acquainted with the equipment used in the industry, learn to analyze features of control object and find creative strategy for the automatic control system creation.

Students should have a common repre-sentations about modern facilities for the devel-opment and management of manufacturing process like the integrated SCADA - systems.

The student should be able to use modern facilities of designing and modeling in SCADA systems environment and to analyze working process of control objects.

SCADA is the basic method of the auto-mated control systems in such areas, as indus-try, engineering and different public structures today. SCADA systems consist of three basic components: the removed terminal (where tasks are processed in a mode of real time), the main terminal (a dispatching control panel), link chan-nels. The concept of SCADA that is based on the computer-aided control engineering, allows to reduce the time of the automation in project engineering and the actual development costs. The SCADA selection for control system engi-neering is based on the probability of the as-signed task solution, as well as on the probability of the material cost and control system engineer-ing time reduction.

SCADA system requirements are the possi-bility of entering of various structures and algo-rithms of manufacturing process controlling ; the possibility of parametric variations supervision; functioning of the modelling environment in the real and fast- time scales.

In this work I consider the use of SCADA systems for development of computer –aided manufacturing for oil farm. Master SCADA (MS) can be an appropriate development environment for solution of our tasks.

The Problem Statement The purpose of the project is the improve-

ment of practical skills of SCADA systems crea-tion.

To understand the operation of industrial SCADA, consider the following system: Several pipes fill up oil tanks at some remote location, where human supervision may not be possible. Also it is difficult to monitor several pipes simul-taneously. SCADA systems are installed in such cases. When a particular tank reaches its over-flow level, the remote unit senses it and sends a signal to the master unit. An alarm is triggered at the master unit station and the operator is made aware of the condition. The operator can visual-ize the situation using the SCADA software and can appropriately regulate the valve of the re-quired pipe. [1]

We were given a task to develop a SCADA system of oil tank farm control for "Baykiten-ergo", village Baykit. Workable control system should be focused on real-time work and it should provide the system response for determi-nate events. The students’ task is to create a symbolic circuit filled with the major technologi-cal parameters.

The main ways of information use must be: visualization of the process parameters and process control results; warning lights and audio alarm of the process variable deviation, equip-ment status and power supplies status.

It is necessary to be guided by the results of control object analysis at the development of alarm subsystem. The alarm subsystem should inform about emergencies which can take place at control objects. Thus it is necessary to mean, that the set of emergencies is limited to a set of tags (a set of gauges and executive mecha-nisms).

125



The Task Solution We used the object-oriented Master SCADA

system by InSat in this work. Master SCADA system is a basis for realization of automatic control system. Master SCADA uses the uniform environment of engineering system. There are an environment and additional built-in modules working together. With the help of module Mas-ter Graph there has been created original sym-bolic circuit consisting of schedules and indica-tors. It is necessary to use an OPC server (OLE for Process Control) for visualization of control signals in the program environment. [2] Standard OPC variables, mnemonic lamps and schedules have been added.

And what is equally important it is a possibil-ity of hot system restart, all memory elements and system algorithms restoration after failure.

Symbolic circuit development. Symbolic cir-cuit is a set of alarm devices, images of the equipment and the internal connections of con-trollable object placed on dispatching boards, special panels or executed on a personal com-puter. It facilitates memorizing of object structure and action control modes. Symbolic circuit should contain only those elements which are necessary for the operator to control the object. Common associations of the operator were taken into account at configuration of the sym-bolic circuit. Common association is the connec-tion arising at the representations, received on the basis of the last experience. For example, the person has got used to display any process, representing its action in left to right. It is neces-sary to take into account this habitual represen-tation and to display development of technologi-cal process from left to right at configuration. The configuration of the Symbolic circuit was made so that the arrangement and appearance of rep-resented units of control object corresponded to the valid arrangement and appearance of these units

We can see animated three-dimensional model of the process with its varying real time numeric and graphic characteristic on the dis-play. We used the built-in library of ready objects (figure 1).

The subsystem of trends displayed on sym-bolic circuit is considered, trends of real time and historical trends are described in the system.

Thus the system includes indicating manu-facturing process symbolic circuits, warning lights and audio alarm of the process variable deviation, trends of parameters, event log and current parameters.

Figure 1- Symbolic circuit

Electric valves control is implemented dis-

tantly in the operator station when it is necessary to start or stop feeding a raw stock into the tanks. It can also be done automatically in the case of unforeseen emergency situations,

Thus, system performs such functions as: • data collection • remote manual and automatic control • control of the sets of process variables • system parameters viewing • process variables displaying on the

symbolic circuits of operator station • report generation • data archiving, representation in a table,

graphic (figure 2), reports or record form. One of key processes of SCADA is the abil-

ity of monitoring an entire system in real time.

Figure 2-Trend of temperature

The conclusion The use of the SCADA systems allows to

simplify the imitating modeling of manufacturing process, to develop various variants of manufac-turing process models quickly and simply. MS is the environment of development which meets the stated requirements.

126


References: 2. Master SCADA [Internet source]: Prod-ucts.-“InSAT”, access mode: 1. SCADA [Internet source]:.-“ Teledesign

systems”, access mode: http://www.teledesignsystems.com/scada.html http://www.teledesignsystems.com/scada.html

ROBOT TECHNOLOGY AND ROBOTICS IN MEDICAL SCIENCE Mel’nikova E.A.

Scientific advisor(s): Samsonova E.S.


E-mail: [email protected] During the past decades, robot technology

has decisively contributed to the introduction of efficient and cost-effective production methods in industrial manufacturing processes, and thereby to the preservation of jobs even in the European countries with higher salary levels.

The use of robots today however, is no longer restricted to just fully automatic industrial production, but it is also possible in applications where the worker is supported by automated handling.

Based on the existing requirements in indus-trial robot use, there is a considerable demand for innovation not only in the industrial use of robots in the future, but also with completely new challenges for assisting robots. These innova-tions in the future will open many new opportuni-ties for economic industrial production even in countries with high labour costs. In Germany, above all there is a great know-how in the devel-opment of robots and robot controllers. This ex-cellent basis offers best conditions for bringing to fruition trend-setting innovations. Walter Reis, founder and owner of Reis Robotics in Obern-burg, aims with the innovation prize for robotics to promote such fascinating new developments in robot technology and to show appreciation to outstanding works by awarding prizes to them.

Professor Ken Goldberg, Director of the Berkeley Center for New Media at the University of California at Berkeley, is the Vice President of IEEE Robotics and Automation, Technical Activi-ties. [1]

The current he and him assistants research in creating "smart buildings" and adjacent envi-rons utilizes sensor networks with processors, memory and wireless networks. Dr. Goldberg´s team is investigating the concept of an Actuator Network. This concept involves enhancing the passive sensing devices with distributed actua-

tion. In effect this means to emit different ampli-tudes and wave lengths of light or sound that effect the environment. Generally the Goldberg team aims to generate a "potential field" of at-tracting and repelling actuators.

In a security setting, the team is experiment-ing with a pulse of sound that gets the persons´ attention, thereby getting a better facial view. Other methods under study include use of bad odors, bright lights or annoying sounds to en-courage the person from a certain location or space. This is aimed at crowd control methods used by security service.

In a natural setting, the team is working on using light and sound to induce animals or birds to move to a certain location. In practice this as-pect of the research would be used in moving herds or allow better views of migrating birds.

One of the most innovated and useful appli-cations of the Goldberg team involve its use in emergency evacuation situations. The "smart net" technology would be pre-installed in smart buildings. In practice, the technology would guide firefighters and other rescue personnel to perform search and rescue operations. In a fire rescue scenario, sensors called "motes" would sense heat and light up red or green in different amplitudes to form a green corridor for fast exit. [2]

The range of innovations being explored by Dr. Goldberg and colleagues also includes de-velopments in medical science and the arts. The Flexible Needle is a collaborative project with the Berkeley Automation Science Lab, John Hopkins University and Queens University. The National Institutes of Health funded project will enable surgeons to utilize image guided intraoperative needle control.

The innovative needle steering approach has the potential to improve targeting accuracy for a

127

http://www.teledesignsystems.com/scada.html

http://www.teledesignsystems.com/scada.html


wide range of medical procedures. Some of the procedures include; chemotherapy, cell therapy, biopsy and tumor ablation. In addition, the Flexi-ble Needle innovation could conceivably improve existing procedures and provide alternatives to current invasive surgical procedures. [3]

Tele-medicine is an emerging field in its in-fancy. It will have tremendous growth, changing our lives, due to its unique property that it not only allows “Expert Care” to be available to rural areas, but also to inner-cities when and where such “Expert” intervention is meaningful. Fur-thermore, with the introduction of Robotic Sur-gery and its growth during the past decade, Tele- Robotic Surgery would benefit from the same concept.

Combining benefits and power of Telecom-

munication with Medical services, brings about Tele-Medicine. While presence of the physician next to the patient can have its own healing mer-its, nevertheless it is impossible to have compe-tent and expert medical practitioners to be pre-sent wherever their expertise is needed. Fur-thermore, as in the case of videoconferencing and web conferencing reducing costs by mini-mizing the need for travel, Tele-medicine can also benefit the population that otherwise will not have access to the expert medical care. Today Tele-diagnostics are a reality as they save costs, and provide immediate, round-a-clock service.

For example, the MRI of an emergency room patient in New York at 11:00 pm is sent elec-tronically to a competent radiologist oversees and results can be delivered within the hour. An-other powerful example is by providing Tele- care to prison inmates, where it would be chal-lenging at best to either transport the prisoner to the medical facility or to bring the doctor to the prison environment. [4]

There are numerous applications of Tele-medicine. Here are a few:

• Tele-dermatology • Tele-radiology • Tele-consultation • Tele-checkup • Tele-Surgery In conclusion, the ever expanding field of ro-

botics and automation is embarking on solutions in real time for the realities of our human ecology especially for human health.

Sources: 1. Wikipedia (in the Internet) 2. Ken Goldberg, Ron Alterovitz, Jean

Pouliot, “Sensorless Motion Planning for Medi-cal Needle Insertion in Deformable Tissue”.

3. Ron Alteroviz, Andrew Lim, Ken Goldberg “ Steering Flexible Needles Under Motion Uncer-tainty”.

4. NewsCenter (in the Internet) 5. The Internet

THE AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM OF TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES OF

THE CENTRAL OIL AND GAS ACQUISITION AND PREPARATION POINT Musenko E., Laktuishin A.

The scientific adviser: Gromakov E., Yurova M.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 30, Lenin's avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia.


Now the enterprises of oil and gas branch al-locate a considerable quantity of means for auto-mation technological processes and manufac-tures. The set of the objects which majority of the enterprise would like to automate is included in structure of one manufacture. One of such objects is the central oil and gas acquisition and

preparation point (CPG). CPG is intended for performance of following basic operations:

• Reception and division of production of an oil borehole into crude oil, crude gas and water;

• Preparation and pumping of separator oil through the main pipeline;

128



• Preparation of passing gas, its account and pumping for own needs and in the main pipeline;

• Preparation, gauging and pumping com-mercial (produced) water on group pumping sta-tion for injection it in a ledge;

• Chemical agent injection in raw materials for commodity output reception, reagents injec-tion for protection of the equipment and the pipe-line against corrosion.

The automatic control system of technologi-cal processes (ACS TP) CPG is intended for safe highly effective control of technological processes CPG in an automatic and manual mode, for automation of technological objects, automation of activity of engineers in the control and supervision of technological processes, and also for the operative information control of a technological mode on object as a whole and on separate subsystems..

The primary goals of automation CPG are: • Increase of technical and economic indica-

tors CPG at the expense of the rational control providing reception necessary on quantity and quality of an end-product at minimization of used raw materials, auxiliary materials and power ex-penses;

• Exact performance of requirements of production schedules, an exception of erroneous actions of the operative industrial personnel at process conducting, start-up and halt of manu-facture and separate technological devices;

• Improvement of working conditions of the operational personnel at the expense of centrali-zation of workplaces, various and convenient representation of the operative information, abo-lition of routine work of operators, uses of "pa-perless" technology of object control;

• Increase of safety of technological proc-esses at the expense of highly reliable means of the alarm system, blocking and protection with the minimum period of reaction;

• Increase of ecological safety at the ex-pense of the control over quality of marketable products, emissions in atmosphere and sewage;

• Realization of the remote control and su-pervision of all complex of constructions on technological platforms of CPG from the central control office.

ACS TP CPG should carry out following functions:

• Automatic control, supervision, diagnostics and protection of the process equipment of plat-form CPG;

• Automatic control of technological parame-ters;

• The account of the expense of oil, passing gas, water;

• The account of an operating time of pump units;

• The ecological monitoring on technological objects;

• Technological and alarm system of devia-tions of technological parameters and process equipment work;

• Maintenance of the set quality indicators of oil, gas and water.

As well as each automatic system (AS), to ACS TP CPG is shown a series of requirements. Basically requirements happen are directed on construction of architecture, structure, to techni-cal, program, linguistic and metrological mainte-nance the AS. Requirements are shown by the Customer the AS, however some updating are possible if there will be offers from the Executor of the order.

ACS TP CPG is developed as the open hi-erarchical distributed system with use of stan-dard protocols of interlevel exchange.

The system openness consists in high de-gree of unification of design decisions for the further possibility of escalating of its functionality.

Hierarchical levels of ACS TP CPG are pre-sented below:

• Level of control of the process equipment; • Level of supervision. The first level of system - the distributed de-

vices of interface of the industrial controller with objects (devices of the alarm system, the meas-urement, the electrified actuators), should in-clude technical and the software which are carry-ing out acquisition of signals of the emergency and technological alarm system, acquisition of signals of position and a condition of stop valve, pump units, measurement of technological pa-rameters in pipelines and objects CPG. Also at this level development of operating influences on actuators is carried out.

There is a acquisition and data processing about an equipment condition, course of produc-tions, reception of commands of the operator and their transfer on the first level the AS, regis-tration of actions of the operator, and also prepa-ration of accounting documents on the basis of the archival information on supervisor level.

For the control of technological processes in ACS TP CPG basically sensors and signaling devices of level, flow, pressure and temperature are used.

Interaction of the operator with system is un-der construction on a principle of supervisor con-trol and data acquisition. SCADA are used for realization of human-machine interface. SCADA represents process of acquisition of the informa-tion of real time from remote objects for the pur-pose of its processing and the analysis, and also control of remote objects.

129


SCADA allows: • Acquisition of the primary information from

sensors; • Storage, processing and visualization of

data; • Registration of operator actions, and also

alarm signals; • Control of system the lower level; • Connection with an information network of

higher level; • Automatic development of the software for

AS control. It is necessary to notice, that SCADA are not

unified and get out individually for everyone AS,

because choice is influenced by a series of fac-tors, such as type of supported controllers and interfaces, operational system, types of trends, ways of a conclusion of trends etc.

Every year, automation is more widely ap-plied in various areas of the industry for the pur-pose of increase as reliability and quality of func-tioning of systems, and for the purpose of effec-tive business dealing. In this article the basic approach is led to working out and realization of ACS TP CPG which can be introduced in manu-facture.

Figure 1. Functional scheme of CPG.

130


INTELLIGENT WELL SYSTEM WITH HYDRAULIC ADJUSTABLE CHOKES AND PERMANENT MONITORING

Naydukov I.А.

Scientific advisor: Yurova M.V.

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin avenue, 30


Installing an intelligent well system in an ex-isting completion can help operating companies accelerate production, increase ultimate recov-ery, and reduce interventions. It is of particular interest when all three of these benefits can be achieved in the same well.

The two main value drivers for implementing the intelligent completion were 1) the ability to commingle production from two zones to meet accelerated production goals while fulfilling gov-ernmental requirements of properly allocating production and 2) the ability to regulate water production from both zones during commingled production. Secondary drivers included reducing the need for well interventions, the desire to pull the completion easily to repair or replace the electric submersible pump (ESP), and the acqui-sition of additional knowledge regarding the per-formance of the upper zone.

The intelligent design chosen for well is shown in Figure 1. The completion concept cen-tered on a shrouded ESP and hydraulic intelli-gent well system with remotely operated, multi-position hydraulic chokes to control flow from each zone via a semi-automated surface control system. To complement the hydraulic system, Wellbore Instrumentation provided a suite of downhole sensors comprised of a low-cost ven-turi-type flow meter and pressure and tempera-ture gauges, all controlled via a single surface data acquisition unit. Control line flatpacks and cross-coupling protectors were also an integral part of the completion, as was a mechanical zonal isolation sleeve for shutting off the lower zone during a workover. This isolation sleeve was assembled below a simple retrievable seal bore packer separating the two zones. A pair of basic chemical injection mandrels rounded out the completion components.

An ESP normally operates by taking pro-duced fluid from the wellbore through the pump intake and discharging to the tubing. In order to enable remote flow control for each zone with the new intelligent completion design, the

ESP must be designed to take produced fluid from the tubing and discharge it back to the tubing. Commingled fluid from both zones is produced through the hydraulic chokes, up the

tubing, into the ESP shroud, and up between the ESP motor and the shroud until it enters the pump intake.

Removing the ESP for repair or replacement simply requires pulling the seal assembly at the bottom of the completion out of the seal bore packer. As the completion is pulled, a shifting collet on the end of the seal assembly will close the mechanical zonal isolation sleeve located below the packer. Keeping the zones isolated during workovers prevents potential cross-flow and helps to reduce lower zone skin damage from the kill fluid.

Two multi-position hydraulic chokes were used: one to control flow from the upper zone (Upper "U" sand) and one for the lower zone ("T" sand). Alternating applied pressure to each side of a balanced hydraulic piston allows cycling through each position of the choke. A tungsten carbide choke assembly and J-mechanism se-lectively adjusts the choke position without the need for complex electronics downhole. A dual-stage choke configuration with the seal assem-bly totally independent of the choke provides superior erosion resistance so that any erosion imparted to the choke will not jeopardize the abil-ity to isolate a zone.

131


Figure 1. Intelligent Well System Design.

The lower zone choke was shrouded while

the tipper zone choke remained unshrouded. Like the shroud for the ESP. the shroud for the lower zone choke enables tubing-to-tubing flow of the produced fluid. This concept, stacking a non-shrouded sleeve or choke above a shrouded sleeve or choke, is common for two-zone intelligent completions and makes it possi-ble to keep all completion equipment above the production packer and well above the upper zone perforations. The shrouded/non-shrouded concept also eliminated the need for a feedthrough packer, allowed for easy retrieval of the ESP if necessary, and greatly simplified the overall completion design and installation.

Electronic permanent monitoring equipment was installed below the shrouded choke to pro-vide real-time pressure, temperature and flow data. Each zone needed gauges to monitor pressure and temperature. A single-phase ven-turi-type flow meter measures flow only for the lower zone, with upper zone production calcu-lated from surface after measuring total fluid produced from the well. During the commingled production, the flow rate from the lower zone is viewed at surface on the data acquisition sys-tem, thus providing the production allocation re-quired by the state ministry. Initially selected for

convenience, the venturi flow meter ultimately provided the critical, real-time. at-the-w-ell indica-tion of flow that was vital to the governmental agency.

Two chemical injection mandrels were in-stalled with the intelligent completion due to con-cerns with scale build-up on the completion equipment. One mandrel was installed immedi-ately below the non-shrouded adjustable choke, and the second mandrel was installed the per-manent monitoring equipment to ensure that all tools in the completion were properly protected.

For intelligent well system, a total of six downhole "control lines", in addition to the ESP cable, were required for the hydraulic choices, instrumentation, and chemical injection. These control lines were separated into two encapsu-lated "flatpacks". All fluid filled lines are made from stainless steel and the tubular encased conductor (TEC) is armored with the same mate-rial. It should be noted that although each hy-draulic choke required two control lines for op-eration, the chokes can share a common line for closing and choking, such that only three lines were required from surface: one for opening the upper zone choke, one for opening the lower zone choke, and one common line for choking or closing each choke. It should also be noted that the permanent monitoring system required two downhole conductors for operation, and that each of these conductors was included in a sin-gle -'4-inch OD "twisted-pair" TEC utilizing only one wellhead penetration. The elimination of the extra hydraulic and extra electric line helped to reduce the overall cost and complexity of the system.

The two flatpacks and the ESP cable were protected at every tubing coupling with cross-coupling protector clamps.

Original specifications for the well called for a manually operated hydraulic surface control system (SCS) requiring manual tracking and recording of downhole choke positions. The value of an SCS could track and record choke positions automatically and reduce the potential for human error. The manual SCS was upgraded to a semi-automated SCS. The SCS, which also easily interfaces with SCADA system, remotely operates the chokes and records the position of the chokes at each shift. The semi-automated SCS was provided with capability to control two wells and was subsequently used for the second intelligent well. New versions of the SCS will be fully automated, with built-in programming for simple interactive control of all functions required to operate the chokes

The electronic well monitoring package re-quired that pressure, temperature and flow be

132

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 monitored and displayed on surface in real time. A data acquisition system was chosen to monitor the downhole sensors, display the data in real time and provide backup storage of data. The data acquisition system also provided capability for interfacing directly with SCADA system.

During the intelligent completion project, ad-ditional benefits of the selected system became apparent: 1) the ability to achieve just-in-time configuration of the adjustable choices; 2) the criticality of the flow meter for production alloca-tion through continuous indication of flow from the lower zone; 3) the ability for real-time pres-

sure buildup studies of one zone while maintain-ing production from the opposite zone, or of each zone simultaneously during shut-down op-erations; 4) a secondary level of protection for the ESP by the electronic monitoring system to prevent excessive drawdown below bubble point which could cause insufficient motor cooling and pump damage from cavitation.

References: 1. Robert Pucket. Journal of Petroleum

technology: 2004. – 54 p.

AUTOMATION OF PROCESS OF CONDUCTING THE BUDGET AT THE ENTERPRISE WITH THE HELP 1S «MANAGEMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ENTERPRISE» 8.0

Rajmanova E.V.

Scientific adviser: Samsonova E.S.

634050, Russia, Tomsk, Vershinin's avenue, 39a, 214


Nowadays the enterprises have some prob-lems with budget conducting automation more often.

Budgeting represents a uniform system of planning, the control and analysis of monetary streams, and also financial results. The major element of budgeting is financial planning is management of process of creation, distribution and using financial resources of the enterprise. The configuration «Management of industrial enterprise» gives convenient means for compi-lating financial plans, and is also the complex applied decision covering the basic elements of management and the account at the industrial enterprise. The decision allows to organise the complex information system corresponding to corporate, Russian and international standards and providing financial and economic activity of the enterprise.

So, the main aim of this work is automation of budget conducting process on the example of «the Guryevsky metallurgical factory» public corporation.

The budgeting system at this enterprise is not automated. Therefore all documents and reports of financial department are conducted

with the help of Microsoft Office Excel applica-tion.

To "adjust" a standard configuration 1S «Management of industrial enterprise» 8.0. to the approximate reporting of financial depart-ment it is necessary to examine some docu-ments on financial department budgeting.

Documents account conducting starts with drawing up the budget for a month (the Docu-ment «Cash drive budget for the period»). Each department makes this budget and brings in to the financial department for acknowledgement. Further with the help of this document “Payment application” is created. It contains classification in Budgets Items, the Supplier, etc. Once all de-mands are collected "Register" is made in kinds of Turnover Items. After the register is confirmed by management company, «Payment calendar» is formed for the future period. The payment cal-endar is conducted under and upon the plan. For the plan sample of «Budgetary opera-tion»documents is needed, for the fact - «Appli-cation for means expenditure» documents. Those applications which have not been con-firmed by the operating company are transferred to the "Register" of next day.

133


These documents are basic for budget con-ducting at the enterprise. All of them are con-ducted in manually, which means, there is a lot of a superfluous computing work, and in many respects, not absolutely correct drawing up of the budget in comparison to the standards.

It is necessary to find similar documents in 1S «Management of industrial enterprise» 8.0. and to remake their printing forms. The scheme of actions is presented below:

1. «Payment application» document

creation. As it was already said, analogue of given

document in 1S «Management of industrial en-terprise» 8.0. is «Application for means expendi-ture». Such demands are made by each de-partment and brought into financial department for confirmation. Financial department, in its turn sends them to the management company for confirmation.

Therefore, the document status is the basic field for filling.

For printing form the chain of documents which have necessary data is created.

For indication of account number and date for which the application is paid, «Invoice for supplier payment» or "Invoice" is created if ser-vice is filled in the nomenclature. For settlement account determination, bank and other informa-tion on counterparts and payments, the docu-ment «Payment order» is created.

This chain of documents is embodied with the help of "Budgeting" form which automatically creates all necessary documents and forms «Payment application» printing form. The form is intended for automatic creation of some docu-ments chain on which payment to the supplier is made. The same data are carried in different documents.

Documents subordination structure: on the basis of «the Order to the supplier» document «the Demand for an expenditure of means» and «the Payment commission proceeding» are cre-ated. Further the user can choose the payment basis: «Supplier payment application » or «In-voice». For "Invoice" creation «Receipt of the goods and services» document is required. All these documents are connected and actually have the same data. It is also possible to choose «Application for means expenditure» for which other documents will be automatically formed.

It is necessary to fill data and by pressing "Execute" button documents are created auto-matically. If some documents already exist, at a choice of the demand at the top of the panel, the module checks their presence and creates these documents, which are not present in documents

log. If the application is found by data, it is pos-sible to find the documents connected with it and to create the missing after acknowledgement of the user.

The search of applications and correspond-ing documents is also provided.

The basic stages: - «the Demand for payment» printing form

document creation - "Budgeting" universal form creation 2. «Cash drive budget for the period»

document creation. This document represents a sample of

"Budgetary operations» and their grouping by Turnover Items. The external report which would sort documents by the organization, is necessary for drawing up of the printing form for division and the period. The input form is necessary for this.

The basic stages: - «Cash drive budget for the period» docu-

ment printing form creation. 3. "Register" document creation. The applications confirmed by financial de-

partment get to the Register. It is also necessary to see, what application were confirmed by man-agement company. Therefore in the form of input except the organization and the period, the field «the document Status» is necessary. It is "Con-dition" requisite which has only four values where it is necessary to add «Confirmed To cre-ate the printing form we use the form of input which selects applications by the period with a status choice. To see applications which were nor confirmed, we will establish «Demands at first month» mark.

It is necessary to notice, that financial de-partment marks in the Turnover Items register with old and new coding. The new coding is writ-ten down in the directory in the "Comment" field.

The basic stages: - "Register" document printing form creation. 4. «the Payment calendar» document

creation. The calendar is conducted by the plan and

the fact. We will issue its as ordinary external report. For the plan we will create inquiry for of budgetary operations sample, with "period" pa-rameter. For the fact - inquiry for applications sample confirmed by operating company with "period" parameter. The sum is deduced auto-matically.

The basic stages: - «the Payment calendar the Plan» docu-

ment printing form creation.

134


Using 1S«Management of industrial enter-prise» 8.0. for budgeting conducting became one of the most convenient and reliable methods nowadays. Many organizations use standard system of enterprise budget conducting, how-ever the majority prefers not to break the struc-ture of economical, financial and other depart-ments work.

- «the Payment calendar the Fact» docu-ment printing form creation.

Printing forms creation is the important part of budgeting automation process implementa-tion. It is very important, that for the document form to stay the same while the input form can be any.

That’s why the main aim of this work is to

change a standard configuration for its conven-ient usage not only by financial department, but also by all divisions of the enterprise.

All printing forms are desirable for issuing external processing and reports. Further by means of breadboard models we create the forms documents printing necessary for us.

As a result of conducting optimization the documentation on budgeting, workers of finan-cial department were released from superfluous work on repeated data input, and also of com-puting work.

It is very important to correctly reveal docu-ments subordination structure, and further to use standard programming.

AUTOMATION OF DISPERSING MIXING PRODUCTS ON THE BASIS OF CONTROLLER SIMATIC

Sap’yan A, Gatilov D

Scientific advisor: Michailov V, Yurova M.

Tomsk polytechnic university:

Tomsk polytechnic university: 30, Lenin Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia


The main task of the controller for this bot-tling station is gathering data from sensors and controlling the process of bottling according to this data and the program set by the user.

Introduction Programming of the controller Simatic on the

example of Festo bottling station (fig.1) will be considered.

Control of bottling process can start up either in a manual or in an automatic mode. In a man-ual mode the process is operated by a built-in touch display and by personal computer con-nected by RS-232 protocol. At start in an auto-matic mode it is possible to control indications of sensor and the process in whole by the touch display and by a personal computer.

The software allows simulating work of the controller and all station in whole. Thus it en-ables testing of the developed program not only on the station, but also in the virtual environ-ment.

The programmed Siemens Simatic S7-300controller has been used in this station (fig.2.)

Fig.1.

135



Fig.2.

Programming of the controller is carried out

by the program Step 7. There are some ways of programming (fig.3.).

Symbolical programming Symbolical names and types of data to all

absolute addresses, to which you wish to ad-dress later in your program, set in the table of symbols; for example, for input I 0.1 - symbolical name Key 1 [the Key 1]. These names are appli-cable to all parts of the program and can also be called global variables.

In STEP 7 programs are created in standard programming languages : the contact plan (LAD), the list of operators (STL) or the func-tional plan (FBD).Programs are created in stan-dard programming languages in STEP 7: the contact plan (LAD), the list of operators (STL) or the functional plan (FBD). Advantage of such programming is a simple and evident execution of even complex logic schemes at control of the various automated processes.

Fig.3. Let's consider the process of controller pro-

gramming on an example of Festo bottling sta-tion. This station consists of float switch for bottle level, two capacitive proximity sensors, three diffuse sensors, acoustic and Through-beam sensor, and also a pump, a dosing valve, a pneumatic feed separator, pipelines and tanks. All data from the sensor will be transformed into voltage in a range from 0 up to 10V and sent to the analog terminal (input/output). 8 Digital in-puts and 6 Digital outputs are also sent to the terminal of input/output. The controller runs the program and gives out commands to the pump, valves, a separator and the conveyor.

One of the controller work algorithms is of-fered to the following. The address is generated for each data stream from each sensor. Capaci-tive proximity sensor is used to define both lev-els of liquid tanks, both bottom and top. There-fore, when the signal about getting necessary level in the main tank comes, it is necessary to give a command to the pump on swapping liquid in a metering tank. The level of liquid in metering tank is checked by the Through-beam sensor and float switch for bottle level. If the tank is overflown, the signal about filling comes to the controller. In this case the switching-off signal is sent to the pump. The information signal about volume of the filled capacity comes from sensor when the capacity arrives on the conveyor to a separator. The controller transfers a command to the valve to open with the certain time delay which corresponds to the time of capacity filling. Also, necessary condition of the valve opening will be a signal from the optical gauge which fixes necessary position of the capacity coming on the conveyor. The controller gives a com-mand of switching the pump at getting a certain minimum level in metering tank. When liquid in

136

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 the main tank comes to an end, capacitive prox-imity sensor transfers data to the controller and the command of switching-off comes to the pump. So, the elementary commands to switch on, switch off and the timer enable solving a problem of filling capacities of various volumes with liquid.

Figure 4 shows a simplified scheme of Festo bottling station work.

Conclusion Introduction of Festo bottling station in edu-

cational process of department IKSU of Tomsk polytechnic university is planned in 2009. In this connection, development of educational me-thodical maintenance and skills of work with this equipment is required. It is necessary to develop new section of a lecture rate for development of this material. Thus, the given station will soon be the universal manual for creation and control of the automated process at software and hard-ware level.

Fig.4.

References: 1. Bernhard Schellmann, Jürgen Helmich.

Festo Didactic’s Learning System. Bottling sta-tion. Festo Didactic GmbH & Co. KG, 73770 Denkendorf, Germany, 2006.

2. Программирование с помощью STEP 7 V5.0. Siemens AG 1998.

IMAGE IDENTIFICATION FROM A SATELLITE WITH FUZZY GENETIC CLASSIFIER

Sergienko R.B.

Scientific supervisor: Semenkin E.S., Doctor of Technical Science, Prof.

Siberian State Aerospace University after academician M.F. Reshetnev, 660014,

Russia, Krasnoyarsk, Kranoyarskiy Rabochiy Avenue, 31


The problem is image identification from a

satellite. Data for this problem is available from UC Irvine Database: http://kdd.ics.uci.edu/.

The database consists of the multi-spectral values of pixels in 3x3 neighborhoods in a satel-lite image, and the classification associated with the central pixel in each neighborhood. This da-tabase was generated from Landsat Multi-Spectral Scanner image data. One frame of Landsat MSS imagery consists of four digital images of the same scene in different spectral bands. Two of these are in the visible region

(corresponding approximately to green and red regions of the visible spectrum) and two are in the near infra-red. Each pixel is a 8-bit binary word, with 0 corresponding to black and 255 to white. The aim is to predict this classification, given the multi-spectral values. In the sample database, the class of a pixel is coded as a number. The number is a code for the following classes:

1 - red soil; 2 - cotton crop; 3 - grey soil;

137


http://kdd.ics.uci.edu/


4 - damp grey soil; 5 - soil with vegetation stubble; 6 - mixture class (all types present); 7 - very damp grey soil. Training set consists of 4435 elements. Test

set consists of 2000 elements. The number of attributes is 36 (4 bands x 9 pixels). In each line of data the four spectral values for the top-left pixel are given first followed by the four spectral values for the top-middle pixel and then those for the top-right pixel, and so on with the pixels read out in sequence left-to-right and top-to-bottom. Thus, the four spectral values for the central pixel are given by attributes 17, 18, 19 and 20.

The first idea is dimension decreasing. Probably meanings in the near pixels are close and average of distribution using is correct. For justification this assumption factor analysis method was applying. It was method of principal components [1] which can find linear combina-tions of attributes. Using this method we got four components for each spectral band:

)1(9

)1(8

)1(7

)1(6

)1(5

)1(4

)1(3

)1(2

)1(1

984,0007,1993,0006,1

037,1023,1981,0008,1

xxxx

xxxxx

++++

+++++

)2()2()2()2()2(

;

)2(9

)2(8

)2(7

)2(6

54321

005,1017,1988,0026,1

048,1024,1991,0017,1

xxxx

xxxxx

++++

+++++

)3()3()3()3()3( 068,1037,1001,1021,1 xxxxx +++++

;

)3(9

)3(8

)3(7

)3(6

54321

004,1029,1003,1041,1 xxxx ++++)4()4()4()4()4( 079,1047,1008,1026,1 xxxxx +++++

;

)4(9

)4(8

)4(7

)4(6

54321

023,1043,1011,1054,1 xxxx ++++;

We can see that all of coefficients are near 1. It means components after normalizing are approximate expression of average meanings. Besides these components have 90% informa-tion from train database approximately. So we have only four informative attributes for this problem.

For classification problem solving it is inter-esting to use fuzzy classifier. Foundation of fuzzy classifier is linguistic rule extraction from numerical data [2]. So this method can solve classification problem and besides can get rules that are available for peoples’ understanding. For example, rule is “if green is average and red is very intensive and first infra-red is average weak class is red soil”. We can say this rule is knowledge. So fuzzy classifier is method of Data Mining for getting knowledge from data [3].

In our problem we use five fuzzy terms for each attributes:

1 – “very weak”; 2 – “average weak”; 3 – “average”; 4 – “average intensive” 5 – “very intensive”.

Triangular fuzzy terms are used. It is neces-sary to determine interval of meanings for each attribute [a; b] and then determine fuzzy terms by following way:

Fig. 1. Fuzzy terms

It is not easy to understand fuzzy rules with

many antecedent conditions. Thus we use “DC: don’t care” as an additional linguistic value in the antecedent part of our linguistic rule. Linguistic rules with many “don’t care” conditions can be concisely written for high-dimensional pattern classification problem.

Let SALL be the set of linguistic rules for our 4-dimensional pattern classification problem. Our linguistic rule extraction problem is to find a small number of simple linguistic rules with high classification ability from the rule set SALL. There is a tradeoff between compactness and perform-ance.

We measure the classification performance of a rule set S by the number of correctly classi-fied training patterns. Compactness of S is measured by two criteria: the number of linguis-tic rules in S and the total number of antecedent conditions in S. Of course, “don’t care” condi-tions are not counted among antecedent condi-tions. The number of antecedent conditions in a linguistic rule is referred to as its length. Thus the total number of antecedent conditions is the same as the total length of linguistic rules. Based on these discussions, our linguistic rule extrac-tion problem is formulated as follows: maximize the number of correctly classified training pat-terns by S, minimize the number of linguistic rules in S, and minimize the total length of lin-guistic rules in S.

The popular method of fuzzy rule base gen-erating is genetic-based machine learning. There are two base ways for genetic applying to get fuzzy rule base: Michigan-style and Pittsburgh-style. The Michigan approach is used for our problem.

In Michigan approach [4] the chromosomes are individual rules and a rule set is represented by the entire population. The collection of rules is

Very weak Weak Average Average intensive

Intensive

a b

138

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 modified over time via interaction with environ-ment. This model maintains the population with credit assignment, rule discovery operations ap-plied at the level of the individual rule.

There is a considerable variety in the struc-ture and functional details of this model. The prototype organization is composed of three parts:

1) the performance system that interacts with environment and contains the rule base and the production system;

2) the credit assignment system of credit apportionment system, developing learning by the modification and adjustment of conflict-resolution parameters of the classifier (rule) set, their strengths;

3) the classifier discovery system that gen-erates new classifiers, rules, from a classifier set by means of genetic algorithm.

Totally we have following algorithm for satel-lite image identification problem solving.

We use genetic algorithm. Individuals are fuzzy rules. Population size is maximal number of different rules. Individuals are binary string. Because we have six fuzzy terms for each at-tribute we need at least three bit (23=8) for each attribute. But we have two unnecessary combi-nations of bits. We can use them for term “don’t care”. In this case probability of term “don’t care” generating is three times more of remainder terms. It is good decision because we need minimize total length of fuzzy rules.

At first we need determine number of class for each rule. This problem is exercised with ex-haustive search all classes and corresponding average meanings of fuzzy numbers section cal-culation. The maximal value of average meaning of fuzzy numbers section corresponds to number of class for this fuzzy rule.

Then we need calculate fitness for each indi-vidual. Raw fitness is percent of corresponding class’s elements in train set which are captured by the rule. The reason is that we want more common rules for number of rules decreasing and people’s understanding.

Besides, we have a constraint for classifica-tion mistake for the rule. Limit value of classifica-

tion mistake for the rule is set by user. So we have constrained optimization problem.

For constrained optimization problem solving by genetic algorithm we need use special meth-ods [5]:

1) “mortal” penalty; 2) dynamic penalty; 3) adaptive penalty. Final fitness is calculated using raw fitness

and special method of constraints consideration. In the end of genetic algorithm working we

get set of fuzzy rules. We need to delete rule repetition. Besides we can aggregate some rules to one rule if class of these rules is common and using fuzzy term “don’t care” for some attributes is possible. So we can decrease total number of rules and total lengths of rules without classifica-tion efficiency decreasing.

Researches of the developed algorithm show efficiency of satellite image identification problem solving. It is possible to combine Michi-gan-style and Pittsburgh-style in this algorithm for efficiency increasing using coevolutionary approach [6].

References: 1. Айвазян, С.А. и др. Прикладная ста-

тистика. Классификация и снижение размер-ности – М.: Финансы и статистика, 1989 – 607 c.

2. Ishibuchi H., Nakashima T., Murata T. Multiobjective Optimization in Linguistic Rule Extraction from Numerical Data // Springler-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, pp. 88-602, 2001.

3. Herrero F., Magdalena L. Genetic fuzzy systems. Granada: University of Granada, 1999.

4. Leung, K, Wong, M. Data mining using grammar based genetic programming and appli-cations. New York: Kluwer Academic Publisher, 2002. - 213 pp.

5. Michalewicz Z., Schoenauer M. Evolu-tionary algorithms for constrained optimization parameter optimization problems // Evolutionary Computation, 4:1, pp. 1-32, 1996.

6. Сергиенко, Р.Б. Разработка и иссле-дование коэволюционного алгоритма услов-ной оптимизации: квалиф. работа бакалавра. – Красноярск: СибГАУ, 2008. – 57 с.

139


THE CALCULATION OF THE SCALAR DYNAMIC ROW SPACE DIMENSION WITH THE CAPACIOUS METHOD

Bychina M. N., Tretiakova O. S.

Scientific advisors: Kozlovskih A. V., AM department associate professor

Samsonova E.S., senior lecturer

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin St., 30


Recently much attention is attended financial temporal rows analysis. It’s relatively new re-search field, which represents popular and ac-tively developing part of mathematical methods in economics. Financial temporal row is a se-quence which describes market process behav-ior. For example this is a rate of negotiable pa-per or currency relation. Fractal sets hold a par-ticular place in the dynamic systems theory, be-cause solving most of nonlinear tasks represent a fractal.

The point is that mathematical imagery of chaotic fluctuations in dissipative systems is a strange attractor, which does not have smooth structure as torus.[2]

One of basic fractal properties is self- simi-larity. Small part of fractal contains information about the whole fractal. Fractal is a structure which consists of systems similar to the whole fractal.

In other words, fractal is a geometrical figure with a definite part which repeats time and again. A principle of self- similarity is followed. All frac-tals are similar to themselves, they are similar to all layers.

At present the role of fractals is considerable enough They are used in medicine, biology, computer systems telecommunication. Fractals help when we want to assign lines and surface with very complicated form and use some coeffi-cient.

Fractal dimension is a quantitative character-istic of points set in n – dimensional space. It shows so far to what extent the points fill sub-space when their number increases. Basic defi-nitions of fractal dimension such as averaged pointwise dimension, correlated dimension and Lyapunov dimension are used now.

From 2000 to 20000 points are used to cal-culate fractal dimension in most contemporary works. Direct algorithms for fractal dimension computing point by point contain operations and require super minicomputer or big com-puters for realization. But the number of opera-

tions will be lower from and apprecia-bly quicken calculation if capabilities of com-puters are used more rationally.

20N

00 ln NN

The goal of this work is program develop-ment for scalar temporal row space dimension estimate using “capacitive” method. This is a basic method for dimension determination, called geometrical definition.

The essence of this method includes the fol-lowing.

Suppose that we have equal distribution of - points along some line or one-dimensional

variety in three-dimensional space. Cover these points set using small cubes with length edge

0N

ε . We need to calculate the minimal number of

these cubes ( )εN which covers our set

( )( )0NN <ε . If is large, then the number of cubes covering the line will change subject to

0Nε

as ( )ε

ε 1≈N . (1)

Minimal number of cubes covering the set will change subject to ε as [1] ( ) 2

1ε

≈ (2ε

( )

N ) if the

points are assigned over two-dimensional sur-face in three-dimensional space uniformly.

In the general case dimension is calculated

to use the law of similarity dε

1N ε ≈ . (3)

( )( )ε

εε /1log

loglim0

Ndc →= (4) will be resulted if we

take logarithm from right and left parts of this form and enter index c.

Number of points in the set must be bigger or . Faithful set will be called fractal if it has a nonintegral dimension.

∞→0N

We have theoretical and calculating objec-tions against using capacity such as measure fractal dimension of strange attractors.

First of all, capacitive dimension is geometri-cal measure, in other words it does not account

140


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 the frequency with which a trajectory visits cov-ering element.

Secondly, hypercubes calculation forming the covering of these sets in the phase space requires a very big consumption of the calculating time. So that there are several alternative definitions of the fractal dimension which fill up the capacity [1].

In many experiments one can measure only one variable ( ) ( ) ,..., 21 txtx where t1 and t2 are the time stations of the dimensions. When the increment of time is constant, that is τ+=2 tt 1 , etc., the construction in the pseudophase space can be made using values ( )tx and the dimensions in the last (or following) time

station ( ) ( )( )τ+txtx , or ( ) (( ))τ− ,

(txtx , -dimensional

phase space, ( ) ((a two

)) )ττ 2,, −− txtxtx ee-dimensional phase space.

, a thr

]

)

This method is called a method of the pseudo-phase space with time delay or a method of envelop-ing space.

Signal dependence from its quantity to the other time station decelerating or leading the given moment on the constant for the system with one degree of freedom is constructed. The idea is that the signal joins with and the result must have the same qualities as in the time of using of the real phase flatness ]. The choice of quantity T is insignificant one should avoid the natural period of a system.

( ) ( )[ Ttxtx +,

) (tx&

( ) ( )[ txtx &,

( Ttx + )

It is possible to say that if the trajectory is closed in the phase space of variables( , it will be closed in the variables

xx &,

( ) ( )( )τ−txtx , . One of the difficulties appears in the time of Poin-

caré cross-section construction in the pseudophase space. For example, if there is a natural time scale in the system as in the time of forced periodic motions with frequency ω , the time interval between the di-mensions τ is usually chosen less than the period of excitation, that is T≡⋅= ωπτ /2 . If τ is not the whole part of T, Poincaré reflections can lose a part of its thin fractal structure [4].

The mathematical setting of this task is in the fol-lowing. There is a discrete dynamic row ( )ii ty ,

, where is a price of stock in the market, is an array which has not less 2000 dots. It is nec-

essary to define the dimension of the dynamic row with the help of the capacious method.

constt =Δ

itiy

Program performance accuracy was checked with the help of Lorentz attractor, because it consists in many distinctions of the chaotic dynamics, such as a scatter trajectory, subharmonic bifurcations, period doubling, Poincaré reflections and fractal dimensions.

A system of Lorents combined equations was set(1.4.1):

( )xyx −=σ& ,

xzyrxy −−=& , xybzz +−=& .

with the parameters 10=σ , , . 3/8=b 28=rFor dimension determination algorithm testing the

following entry conditions such as , 50 =x 00 =y , 00 =z were chosen. You can get three data arrays x,

y, z after Lorentz integration and you find a maximum value from each array.

Then you have a length of cube ε , received ex-perimentally as a result of the program debugging, it is necessary to calculate the quantity of cubes and to estimate the dimension according to (2.1.4):

n

( )( )ε

εε /1log

loglim0

Ndc →=

. The following results 1.0=ε , 117=n ,

0682,2=cd were received. Dimension value received with the help of this pro-

cedure coincides with the literary information ( )06,2≈cd .

Another entry conditions , , 10 =x 10 =y 10 =z115

were taken. We have the quantity of cubes =n , 0521,2=cd . This result is similar to the literary infor-

mation. Therefore, it is necessary to make the conclusion

about the reality of the dimension scalar dynamic row received in this procedure.

The working calculations were made for the real dynamic row taken from Metastock pocket (a price of closing for Coffee Continuous). The dimensions were made in the pseudophase space ( ) ( ) ( )( )ττ 2,, −− txtxtx

t with the step and the

time break 1.0=Δt

Δ= 2τ . The meanings and tΔ τ were received experimentally. As a result the dimension which was calculated with the capacious method is

0672,2=cd . The result proves the accuracy of program func-

tioning that’s why the calculating value of Coffee Con-tinuous dimension is approximately . Because one of the important properties is space subdivision and dimension value is in the time interval ( ) .

4,2

3,2 References: 1. Мун Ф.: Хаотические колебания. – М:

«Мир», 1990.-311с. 2. Шустер Г.: Детерминированный хаос. –

М: «Мир» , 1988.-240с. 3. Баутин Н.Н.: Методы и приемы качест-

венного исследования динамических систем на плоскости. – М: «Наука», 1990.-487с.

4. Холодниок М.: Методы анализа нели-нейных динамических систем. – М: «Мир», 1991. – 386с.

141


ASSESSMENT OF ECONOMIC RISCS IN DEVELOPMENT OF OIL AND GAS FIELDS

Charushin D.A., Khitrov P.V.

scientific advisor: Asadullina L.I.

Tomsk Polytechniс University 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina ave, 30

E-mail: [email protected] Nowadays, because of great risks of invest-

ment to industries and to oil and gas industries in particular, there is a great demand in software tools for risk analysis. Using these tools, poten-tial investor defines future risks and supposed profit of the project. This helps him to select smart decision – to invest his money in this pro-ject, or to abstain from it. First of all, we should determine classification of risks.

Classification of risks was a subject of study of many scientists: from J.M.Keynes to our con-temporaries A.D.Sheremet, R.S.Sayfullin and others. Difficulties of classification exist because of big number of different risks, and the influence of different number of factors on their formation [1]. All risks, which are possible, may be divided into several main types: political, social, eco-nomical, ecological and juridical. This article is devoted to analysis of economical risks, with aim to create specialized software for their assess-ment.

Economical risks are in fact a combination of risks: industrial, connected with probability of company not to complete all liabilities, men-tioned in contract with customer; financial (credit), connected with changes of currencies and interest rates; investment, connected with ability of depreciation of investment portfolio; commercial, showing unreliability of future prof-its, because of decreases of sales volume, in-

creases of prices of consumed resources and other factors.

Oil and gas industry, as a system, is charac-terized by some specific features. In respect to the analysis of investment projects effectiveness and to the risks assessment the most notable of them are [2]:

• big dependence of indicators and criteria of cost effectiveness on nature factors and on the level of use of prospected and extractive hy-drocarbon resources;

• big volatility of nature factors in the course of time;

• probabilistic nature of most of technical and economical indicators in development of oil and gas fields;

• change in the structure of investment in the whole industry increasing the investment to compensate the decrease of production in al-ready developing fields;

• long-time work on realization of oil and gas projects;

• big capital intensity of oil and gas extrac-tion, the necessity of making big investments, long time of initial capital compensation;

So, as a result of selection and analysis of methods of assessment and prognosis of the risks, the classification shown in figure 1 was proposed.

142


Fig. 1: Classification of assessment and prognosis methods

As it is shown in figure 1, there are quantita-

tive and qualitative methods of analyzing risks. The matter of qualitative analysis is to de-

termine sources and reasons of the risks, stages of the work, during which risks arise, i.e.:

− determination of potential risk zones; − determination of risks, which accompany

business activities of the company; − prognosis of practical benefits and possi-

ble negative consequences. The main purpose of quantitative analysis

is to determine main kinds of risks which influ-

ence financial and economical activities. The advantage of such method is in fact, that even during the first stage of analysis, the manager of the company is able to visually evaluate the level of riskiness by levels of different quantitative risks and even then to refuse to implement par-ticular decision.

The advantages and disadvantages of dif-ferent methods and algorithms (fig. 1) of quanti-tative analysis of economic risks are shown in table 1.

Тable 1 of

method Advantages Disadvantages

1 Easy in calculations and implementation Gives simplified statistic assessment 2 Method allows getting useful information

about expected values of NPV and of net income.

Method assures that theoretical frequencies for all variants of income are known, or may be exactly stated.

3 Simplicity and availability of methodical materials.

Technology is oriented on finance and stock markets, but may not be applied to analysis of risks in oil and gas indus-try.

4 Good illustration of influence of particular source facts on the result of project.

Method assumes, that every particular factor is viewed, as it was isolated.

5 Simplicity of calculations. Gives no information about distribution of frequencies, concerning future money flows. It also has limited abilities of modeling.

6 May correct distribution of money flows. Hard to calculate validity rates. Inability to analyze distribu-tion of frequencies for key parameters.

7 Ability of wide application of different software.

It is more oriented on political risks.

8 Uses mental power of many experts while assessing. Is widely used in the world.

Expert is limited in his own area of knowledge and can change his opinion many times.

9 Simplicity of calculations. Database of object for comparison is limited. After analysis of mentioned methods,

method of expert assessment has been selected

for implementation, because the aim of work is to build tool for future research, which will result

143


in development of automated tools for analysis of risks

Implementation of this method will be bases on solving two tasks:

First – making a list of risks. Second - de-termination of weights for every risk. Such defini-tion can be made with the help of method of ex-pert assessments.

Enumeration of risks for every stage of pro-ject is given to every expert, who is working in-dependently from the others, and expert is asked to evaluate possibility of their appearance, using scale (0, 25, 50, 75, 100) [3].

After definition of frequencies for simple risks of project, the evaluation of integral risk for whole investment portfolio is made.

As usual, risk for the whole portfolio is con-nected with limited number of the mostly dan-gerous risks, so the following demands were formulated for development of software:

• The ability of choice of answer variant from the predefined list.

• All questions are given simultaneously. • Export of answer for each expert. • The ability of changing of questions list

by administrator. • Comfortable and easy understandable

user interface.

• The ability to limit time for answer.

As a result, it may be stated, that soft-ware, which is developing now is able to cope with most unformalized tasks of prediction and assessment of risks, giving the whole report about evaluation of economic risks with detailed definition of results for each category. So the tool is being developed for scientific work and re-searches with experts, which will result in devel-oping specialized software system, able to pre-dict and manage risks.

The Literature: 1. A.E. Tasmukhanova, I.V. Burenina. Pe-

culiarities of classification of risks in oil and gas enterprises. [Electronic resource] access mode - http://www.anrb.ru/isei/cf2004/d779.htm – 27.11.08.

2. S.P. Nekrasov., Assessment and analy-sis of risk of investment projects in oil and gas industry. Moscow –2002 P. 3-9

3. Problems of contemporary economics. [Electronic resource] access mode - http://www.m-economy.ru/art.php3?artid=21924 – 27.11.08

4. Methodical recommendations about as-sessment of effectiveness of investment pro-jects. Second edition. -M.: Economics.-2000. P. 31-40

5. E.V. Berezhnaya, V.I. Berezhnoy. Mathematical methods of modeling of economi-cal systems. Tutorial. – М.: Finances and Statis-tics, 2001. – 368 p.

INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS Захарова И.Г., Шарапова Е.И.

Научный руководитель: Самсонова Е.С.



Introduction What is artificial neural network? Traditionally, the term neural network was

used to refer to a network or circuit of biological neurons. The modern usage of this term often refers to artificial neural networks, which are composed of artificial neurons or nodes. So, arti-ficial neural network (ANN) is a mathematical or computational model based on biological neural

networks. It consists of interconnected group of artificial neurons and processes information us-ing the connectionist approach to computation. In most cases ANN is an adaptive system that changes its structure based on the external or internal information that flows through the net-work during the learning phase [1].

144



Bases of neural networks Artificial neural network consists of a pool of

simple processing units which communicate by sending signals to each other over a large num-ber of weighted connections [2]. A set of major aspects of a parallel distributed model can be distinguished as:

− a set of processing units ('neurons,' 'cells'); − weighted connections between the units; − external input for each unit; − method for information collection (the

learning rule); − environment inside which the system must

operate, providing input signals and if necessary error signals.

Processing units Each unit performs a relatively simple func-

tion: receive input from neighbors or external sources and use it to compute an output signal which is distributed to other units. Apart from this processing, the second task is the adjustment of the weights. The system is inherently parallel in the sense that many units can carry out their computations at the same time. Within neural systems it is useful to distinguish three types of units (Pic. 1.): input units which receive data from outside the neural network, output units which send data out of the neural network, and hidden units which input and output signals re-main within the neural network. During opera-tion, units can be updated.

Neural Network topologies In the previous section we mentioned the

properties of basic processing unit in the artificial neural network. This section focuses on the pat-tern of connections between the units and the propagation of data. Concerning this pattern of connections, the main distinction we can make is between:

1. Feed-forward neural networks, where data from input to output units is strictly fed for-ward. Data processing can extend over multiple units, but no feedback connections are present, that is, connections extending from outputs of units to inputs of units in the same layer or pre-vious layers.

2. Recurrent neural networks that do con-tain feedback connections.

Pic. 1. The Neural Network Scheme

Classical examples of feed-forward neural

networks are the Perceptron and Adaline. Ex-amples of recurrent networks were presented by Anderson (Anderson, 1977), Kohonen (Koho-nen, 1977), and Hopfield (Hopfield, 1982).

Artificial neural networks training A neural network has to be configured so

that the application of a set of inputs produces (either 'direct' or via a relaxation process) the desired set of outputs. There exist various meth-ods to set the strengths of the connections. One way is to set the weights explicitly, using a priori knowledge. Another way is to 'train' the neural network by feeding it with teaching patterns and letting it change its weights according to some learning rule.

We can categorize the learning situations into two distinct sorts [3]. These are:

− Supervised learning or Associative learning in which the network is trained by pro-viding it with input and matching output patterns. These input-output pairs can be provided by an external teacher, or by the system which con-tains the neural network (self-supervised).

− Unsupervised learning or Self-organization in which the unit is trained to re-spond to clusters of pattern within the input. In this paradigm the system is supposed to dis-cover statistically salient features of the input population. Unlike the supervised learning para-digm, there is no a priori set of categories into which the patterns are to be classified; rather the system must develop its own representation of the input stimuli.

− Reinforcement Learning. This type of learning may be considered as an intermediate form of the above two types of learning. Here the learning machine performs some action on the environment and gets a feedback response from the environment. The learning system grades its action good (rewarding) or bad (punishable)

145


5. Data compression and the Associative memory

based on the environmental response and ac-cordingly adjusts its parameters. Generally, pa-rameter adjustment is continued until an equilib-rium state occurs, following which there will be no more changes in its parameters.

The ability of neural networks to reveal inter-relations between various parameters gives the chance to express large amounts of data more compactly if sets of data are highly intercon-nected with each other. The reverse process — restoring initial data set from information part — is named associative memory. The associative memory also allows to restore the initial sig-nal/image from the damaged input data.

Applications Neural networks were applied to a wide vari-

ety of different areas including speech synthesis, pattern recognition, diagnostic problems, medi-cal illnesses, robotic control and computer vision [1,4].

1. Object Recognition and classification. Conclusion Artificial neural network is an emulation of

biological neural system. Why would the imple-mentation of artificial neural networks be neces-sary? Although computing these days is truly advanced, there are certain tasks a program made for a common microprocessor is unable to perform; even so neural network software im-plementation can be made with their advantages and disadvantages.

Different objects such as: text, images, sam-ples of sound, etc can be used as a character. During the learning phase the network gets some different objects with the instructions what class these objects should be connected with. At the end the system can bring into correlation each of the offered object and the existing class.

2. Decision making and management This task is quite similar to a classification

task. Characteristics arrive on an input of neural network. A tag of accepted solution should be generated at network output. Besides various criteria of controlled system’s state description are used as entry signals.

Advantages: − A neural network can perform tasks that a

linear program cannot. − When an element of the neural network

fails, it can continue without any problem by their parallel nature.

3. Clusterization Clusterization is a splitting set of entry sig-

nals into classes. Thus neither the quantity, nor classes tags are unknown in advance. After the learning process such a network is able to de-termine the class of input signal. Also a network can determine that input signal does not concern one of the known classes. This situation occurs when input signal is new to a system and is ab-sent in learning sample. So, such a system can determine new unknown classes of signals. Re-lations between new classes and existing classes in a subject domain are defined by hu-man. The example of Clusterization usage is a Kohonen’s neural networks.

− A neural network learns and does not need to be reprogrammed.

− It can be implemented in any application. − It can be implemented without any prob-

lem. Disadvantages: − The neural network needs training to op-

erate. − The architecture of a neural network is dif-

ferent from the architecture of microprocessors therefore it needs to be emulated.

− It requires high processing time for large neural networks. 4. Forecasting and approximation The neural network has the ability to gener-

alize and select hidden dependences between input and output data. After training the network is capable to predict the future value of a certain sequence on the basis of several previous val-ues and/or any factors existing at the moment. It is necessary to mark that forecasting is possible only when the previous changes predetermine the future to some extent. For example, forecast-ing of stock quotes based on quotations for last week could appear successfully (or it could not appear) whereas forecasting the results of a to-morrow's lottery based on the data over the last 50 years won’t probably give any results.

The Literature: 1. Википедия. Свободная энциклопедия

[Электронный ресурс] / Режим доступа: wikipedia.org

2. Artificial neural network. [Электронный ресурс] / Режим доступа: learnartificialneural-networks.com

3. Journal of Theoretical and Applied Infor-mation Technology [Электронный ресурс] / Режим доступа: jatit.org

4. University of Hartford I.T.S. [Электронный ресурс] / Режим доступа: uhaweb.hartford.edu

146


THE ANALYSIS OF SECURITY FACILITIES MEMORY IN REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

Shuvaeva Y. V.

Scientific advisers: Sherbakov K. S., Samsonova E. S.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina avenue, 30

E-mail: [email protected] Introduction One of the important characteristics of real-

time operating system is customization for secu-rity and data privacy, i. e. security facilities of the most important information should be provided in the system. Real-time operating system is a sys-tem, which correct functioning depends not only on the logical correctness of calculations but the time for which these computations are made.

Reference Monitor Security concept can be defined by several

key principles which can provide functional safety under central control. The concept of Ref-erence Monitor was introduced to achieve this purpose.

The role of such fundamental safety mecha-nism consists in all access attempts to resources (data, peripheral devices, programs etc.) moni-toring off any process. The concept of Reference Monitor asserts the necessity for each request access by target resource to be accomplished through Reference Monitor. Reference Monitor that is located inside the kernel cannot be ig-nored changed and it should be quite simple and compact for easy understanding.

Irrespective of what resource is demanded it is important that Reference Monitor is always activated. This mechanism should be applied to all areas that are connected with facilities as-signment regardless of request source. Refer-ence Monitor is always active and it can handle all resources requests based on the structure of POSIX and the strict application of MMU (Mem-ory Management Unit).

Let is analyze memory control mechanisms in several real-time operating systems.

QNX Neutrino In real-time operating system QNX Neutrino

each driver, application, protocol and file system are executed beyond a kernel in protected ad-dress space.

Visiting card of QNX Neutrino is microkernel, full protection of process memory and communi-cations between them is based on synchronous exchange of messages.

Basic functions of OS QNX were carried out in special module that includes microkernel and processes manager. Processes manager guar-antees that no process in the system can invade address space of another process as well as it provides uniquely effective and easy-to-use ser-vice of namespace that enables processes to retrieve each other fastly.

real-time operating system QNX Neutrino implements Reference Monitor directly inside a kernel. Kernel is invariant during execution and works read-only thanks to MMU. Memory Man-agement Unit is a mechanism which protects it from external intervention. If a kernel image changes when trying to attack or in case of un-premeditated action it won’t boot in operating mode. When kernel starts it executes the proce-dures of its integrity verification which should confirm to operational state of the kernel and absence of damages or changes in it. As it is known that kernel can not be changed during work and cannot be booted when it has some changes the fact of successful kernel run means full correctness and safety of its operation.

VxWorks In real-time operating system VxWorks all

tasks of system and applications divide united address space that can entail system stability disturbance as a result of some application fault. The optional component VxVMI enables to have its virtual memory for each process.

INTEGRITY Object-oriented approach to INTEGRITY de-

sign provides exact access control, safety verifi-cation and data integrity, communications, some components and system on the whole. The real-time operating system INTEGRITY uses virtual memory for memory control. INTEGRITY uses hardware lock memory and supports multiple protected virtual address space. The INTEGRITY kernel functions in its own protected virtual address space.

The summary data is presented in table 1.

147



Table 1. Memory control characteristics

RTOS Protection model MMU support Virtual

memory

VxWorks

-without protection

-virtual memory

protection (VxVMI)

not required but supported for

VxVMI

Yes (for VxVMI)

QNX -virtual

memory protection

Yes Yes

INTEG-RITY

-virtual memory

protection Yes Yes

Security Policy in real-time operating system is implemented through verification and protec-tion. Protection attempts to make sure correct application behavior after its installation or to restrict the effects of caused harm. Protection is accomplished the both hardware and software tools.

Hardware lock is usually accomplished in microkernels. In such systems namely hardware guarantees that system settings arising in user level will never modify a kernel.

User Break Controller This research was conducted for the pur-

pose of insight with probable solutions of prob-lem data protection of microkernel RTOS. At present the implementation of defence memory mechanism for microkernel of microcontroller SH 7201 is being realized. This microcontroller does not include Memory Management Unit but it has alternative device User Break Controller.

The user break controller (UBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. These functions make it easy to design an effec-tive self-monitoring debugger, enabling the chip to debug programs without using an in-circuit emulator. Instruction fetch or data read/write of CPU, data size, data contents, address value, and stop timing in case of instruction fetch are break conditions that can be set in the UBC. Since this LSI uses a Harvard architecture, in-struction fetch on the CPU bus (C bus) is per-formed by issuing bus cycles on the instruction fetch bus (F bus), and data access on the C bus is performed by issuing bus cycles on the mem-ory access bus (M bus). The UBC monitors the C bus and internal bus (I bus).

Features: 1. The following break comparison condi-

tions can be set. Number of break channels: two channels

(channels 0 and 1).

User break can be requested as the inde-pendent condition on channels 0 and 1.

1.1 Address Comparison of the 32-bit address is

maskable in 1-bit units. One of the three address buses (F address

bus (FAB), M address bus (MAB), and I address bus (IAB)) can be selected.

1.2 Data Comparison of the 32-bit data is maskable in

1-bit units. One of the two data buses (M data bus

(MDB) and I data bus (IDB)) can be selected. 1.3 Bus cycle Instruction fetch (only when C bus is se-

lected) or data access. 1.4 Read/write 1.5 Operand size Byte, word, and longword. 2. In an instruction fetch cycle, it can be se-

lected whether the start of user break interrupt exception rocessing is set before or after an in-struction is executed.

3. When a break condition is satisfied, a trig-ger signal is output from the UBCTRG pin.

The CPU can read from or write to the UBC registers via the I bus. The UBC cannot monitor access to the C bus and I bus cycles in the same channel.

When a user break interrupt request and an-other exception source occur at the same in-struction, which has higher priority is determined according to the priority levels defined in table of Exception Handling. If an exception source with higher priority occurs, the user break interrupt request is not received.

In the project User Break Controller is used for monitoring process memory stack, protection of microkernel memory from illegal access. UBC advantage for MMU is a possibility of data record control both between some processes and within its own process.

Conclusion Fast informatization led to the necessity of

modern computer technologies application in the areas where one of the main requirements is safety. It led to the problem of secure information processing systems creation.

Real-time operating system should rely on exact principles of safety that are realized in its architecture of basic structure and procedure microkernel. It is necessary to lead continuous work for improvement of security level, RTOS reliability and protectability using hardware and software tools.

148


References: http://www.citforum.ru/operating_systems/rtos/, easy. 1. SWDSoftware Ltd. Articles and publica-

tions [Electronic resource]. - Access mode: http://www.swd.ru/index.php3?pid=20 , easy.

4. Сорокин Сергей Системы реального времени// Современные технологии автома-тизации.- 1997.-2. 2. Зыль Сергей, Махилёв Владимир За-

щищённая операционная система реального времени// Современные технологии автома-тизации.- 2007.-3.

5. SH7201 Group Hardware Manual. Re-nesas 32-Bit RISC Microcomputer SuperH RISC engine Family/SH7200 Series R5S72011. – 2006. – 1208 c. 3. Real-time operating system [Electronic

resource]. - Access mode:

REPORT GENERATING SYSTEMS BASED ON

MICROSOFT OFFICE EXCEL TEMPLATES Yunusova M.R

Research supervisors: Miroshnichenko E.A, Candidate of Technical Science,

Associate Professor;

Asadullina L.I., Senior Teacher

Tomsk polytechnic university, 30 Lenina Avenue, Tomsk, 634050, Russia


One of the main tasks of corporate informa-tion systems is not only compact and consistent data storing but also to provide it to an end user in the form of reporting documents. Meanwhile, besides printing out the reports a report genera-tor has to provide the possibility of further work with them, such as editing, correcting, clarifying. The best solution is creating reports in the format of Microsoft Office documents.

Modern report generating systems allow ex-porting reports to many popular formats, includ-ing format of Microsoft Office Excel documents. But even when export is of sufficiently high qual-ity only a small part of the spreadsheet proces-sor’s capabilities can be used for data process-ing in the report. However, there are generators which create reports with the help of Microsoft Office Excel templates. In this case when de-signing a template all data processing tools of Excel are available. For example absolute and conditional formatting, automatic filtering, sum-mary tables, charts, using VBA-macros by which reports can be brought to response interactively on user’s actions. At the same time there is no need to develop a template designer as conven-ient and well-known to the user Microsoft Office Excel environment may be used for template

formatting. Consequently, the process of reports creating and editing is simplified considerably.

Among the report building systems based on Microsoft Office Excel templates standalone ap-plications are known, such as XL Report Builder from Desktop Software and Excel Report Builder from Vista, as well as components for program-ming environments, such as FlexCel Studio from TMS Software, Advanced Excel Report from EMS Database Management Solutions and other.

The GIS laboratory of CC TPU institute de-velops and uses FormBuilder application that is a report generating tool based on Microsoft Of-fice Excel templates. A template created with the mentioned application is a spreadsheet which besides ordinary constants, formulas and Excel formatting contains references to retrieved data and user defined parameters, as well as options of the workbook, worksheets and separate report ranges.

To select the data from data sources used in the template it is required to create SQL-queries in a dialect of SQL applied in the specific DBMS. FormBuilder application doesn’t make any extra requirements to contents of a query. As the query is activated the user is enabled to look

149

http://www.swd.ru/index.php3?pid=20

http://www.citforum.ru/operating_systems/rtos/


through its results represented in a table form before the report is generated.

A named range located on one of the report sheets is generally matched to each query. Ref-erences to selected data may be placed to the named range cells. Stated references are spe-cific values which will be replaced with other val-ues taken from a query result table when build-ing the report.

Free components from TMS FlexCel Studio collection are used in FormBuilder application for direct report generating. This defines the set of features available to the user when designing a template.

For example, FormBuilder enables to create master-detail reports. Such reports contain data resulting from queries connected with each other by master-detail relationship. If it is necessary to create a master-detail report, named range of detail query will be put into named range of mas-ter query. Meanwhile, some properties of the detail query are set, such as names of the mas-ter query and connecting fields. The number of nesting levels is not limited.

Moreover, parameters may be used in a query. Values of such parameters are specified by the user straight before report generating. Names and properties of parameters are set by means of a specific dialog. The mentioned prop-erties are type, default value and description. Each parameter in FormBuilder application can be one of six types, such as string, number, date and others. The values of parameters may be typed in the report. It takes to place references to the parameters to proper template cells to this effect.

When creating reports using FormBuilder templates are designed in Microsoft Office Excel environment. On the one hand, as stated above, it takes the user less time to create a template when the work is done in familiar environment. On the other hand, time costs rise sharply as it is necessary to input manually the names of ranges and references to data selected from databases and parameters of queries. Mean-while, in addition to that the possibility of manual input errors is appeared. Detecting and correct-ing such errors isn’t always an easy problem. A candidate solution is to develop an extension of standard Microsoft Office Excel graphical user interface which will be enabled to the user when designing a template. Such extension may be implemented as a set of panels containing addi-tional designing tools. This is one of the lines of FormBuilder further development.

A significant feature of FormBuilder applica-tion is the possibility of creating not only reports but also data input forms. The distinction be-

tween input form and report is that an input form has facilities to export the data from Microsoft Office Excel document back to data base after their modification. The mentioned facilities in-clude queries to select the data from the Excel document to database temporary tables, as well as a specific script which is executed on the server and so the database updating is oc-curred.

There exist a lot of tools that can build re-ports of different complexity. Some of them are listed above. There are also sufficiently powerful tools to crate forms of inputting and editing data stored in databases, for example Microsoft Of-fice InfoPath application. Joint use of such tools is possible but as a rule requires resorting to various tricks and is accompanied by common data processing productivity slowdown. Form-Builder application is a uniform system com-pletely realizing stated capabilities. FormBuilder enables to create complicated input forms in format of Microsoft Office Excel documents and to fill the forms with data selected from various data sources by execution of advanced queries and thus providing the possibility of their subse-quent editing and appending. There are no simi-lar systems nowadays.

ODBC and ADO Microsoft technologies are used in FormBuilder to export the data from Mi-crosoft Office Excel documents to data bases. As Microsoft Office 2007 was released the fol-lowing problem has occurred: export of data with the help of stated product is not duly executed for unknown reasons. It becomes absolutely necessary to develop proprietary technology of data export. This makes it possible to solve a number of other no less important problems, such as gaining more complete control over a process of data export, creating a system of er-ror detecting and handling as well as optimizing data export process subject to features of Form-Builder application and specific range of prob-lems.

The technology of data export from Microsoft Office Excel documents to data bases is devel-oped and embedded in FormBuilder and being tested now. While being exported the data un-dergo processing which includes the following stages: reading the data from Microsoft Office Excel documents, data types definition, parsing and computing of the predicates which define conditions of data selection, preparation of SQL script that creates temporary tables in the data-base and its execution on the server.

Exported data may belong to one of four ba-sic types, such as real, boolean, date-time and string. All the data is initially considered to be of string type. For defining data types it is neces-

150

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 sary to examine all values of a table column try-ing to convert them sequentially to other three types: to real type at first, then to date-time and finally to boolean type. When all column values are converted successfully to some type, the process of defining the column data type will be completed.

The most difficult data exporting stage is parsing and evaluating of predicates defining the data to be exported to the database. Data filter-ing is necessary for two reasons. Firstly, this enables to reduce the volume of exported data. Secondly, data filtering makes it easier to proc-ess the data with database tools thus sharing the load between client and database server.

For computing a predicate of data export conditions in the developed technology the predicate is converted into expression in reverse Polish notation (RPN) [6]. Reverse Polish nota-tion is a method for representing expressions in which the operator symbol is placed after the arguments being operated on. RPN has the property that brackets are not required to repre-sent the order of evaluation or grouping of the terms. RPN expressions are simply evaluated at a single pass and this greatly simplifies the com-putation of the expression within computer pro-gram. In the data export technology a predicate in standard infix notation is converted to the postfix expression using a simple parsing algo-rithm named the "shunting yard" and invented by Edsger Dijkstra. Then the RPN expression is evaluated using a stack structure. As the ex-pression is read from left to right, operands are placed on top of the stack. When an operation is performed, its operands are popped from the stack and its result is pushed back on. The predicate values for all table rows are evaluated at once, so there is no need to pass the predi-cate repeatedly.

When developing the data export technology it is especially important to create advanced er-ror detecting and handling system. All errors oc-curring in the data exporting process may be divided into two groups – various errors in the predicate which is used to filter exporting data and errors in the read data occurring, for exam-ple, as a result of erroneous modification of data by the user in the input form or incorrect defini-tion of the input table range. When detecting error in the data exporting process FormBuilder application must give a message to the user that contains complete information about error type and probable origin. Created system of error diagnosis and handling is liable to further im-proving and testing.

In conclusion it should be noted that Form-Builder has contemporary graphical user inter-face and is an intuitively understandable visual environment for creating and editing report tem-plates. FormBuilder has user’s manual with clearly explained examples so mastering the report building system doesn’t take much time.

References: 1. http://www.dswsoft.com/xlrb.php. XL

Report Builder. Description 2. http://www.vista.ru/2vista30.htm. Excel

Report Builder. Introduction 3. http://www.tmssoftware.com/site/flexcel.

asp. FlexCel Studio for VCL/LCL 4. http://www.sqlmanager.net/en/products/t

ools/excelreport. EMS Advanced Excel Report. Overview

5. Инструментальное средство для соз-дания и редактирования шаблонов отчетных форм FormBuilder. Руководство пользователя

6. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/ReversePolishNotation.html. Reverse Polish notation.

151

Section VIII

MODERN PHYSICAL METHODS IN SCIENCE, ENGINEERING AND MEDICINE

153

Section VIII: Modern physical methods in science, engineering and medicine

HYDROGEN LIKE MODEL OF F CENTER IN WIDE-GAP DIELECTRICS Bikhert Y.V., Eliseev A.Y., Mylnikova T.S.

Research supervisor: Lisitsyna L.А., doctor of phys., math. sciences, professor

Tomsk Polytechnic University , 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin Avenue, 30

E-mail: [email protected] The total energy of the electron in free move-

ment is equal to its kinetic energy. If the electron moves along the axis the stationary Schrod-inger equation looks like[1]

, (1) where m is the electron mass; is the total

energy of the electron, is the electron wave function.

The particular solution for the equation (1) is the function

, where k is a wave vector.

The electron can be defined by de Broglie flat monochromatic wave λ. Electron has own value of energy obtained by the equation (1)

, where is an electron pulse. Hence, the total energy of the free electron

has a continuous spectrum of probable values, as there are no limits for the values of the speed for the electron when it moves.

Consider the behavior of the "hot" electron, formed as a result of crystal irradiation by ion-ized radiation. Alkali halide crystals (AHC) with a face-centered lattice consisting of positively charged cations and negatively charged anions are going to be considered.

Fig. 1. The structure of the F-center in the crystal lattice of the AHCs

Simultaneously with the creation of the “hot”

electron the Frenkel defects are being formed in the lattice, which appear to be the anion vacan-cies and haloids in the interstitials. The anion vacancy is surrounded by six positively charged cations. As a first approximation the local effec-

tive positive charge in the region of the anion vacancy can be considered to be concentrated in its centre.

The “hot” electron moving through the crystal and losing the part of its energy as a result of phonons or photons emission can get in Cou-lombic field of the anion vacancy.

The radiation defect representing the electron, trapped by Coulomb field of the anion vacancy is

the F-center (Fig. 1.). This is the most widely-spread radiation defect in AHCs, espe

r

Fig. 2. Coulobic defect potential. ( is the total energy of the of the electron; is a size of the potential well)

cially at low temperatures of irradiation, i.e.

in case there are no coagulation processes. The potential of the field of the vacancy

looks like [2]: , (2)

where r is the distance between interacting point charges.

The potential in (2) is spherically symmetric

(Fig. 2.) and shielded by the medium with optical dielectric permeability . The minus sign in (2) means that the electron is attracted by the va-cancy field and some energy is required to delo-calize the electron.

The research of the electron paramagnetic resonance of F-centers in their ground state [3] resulted in the data about its electron structure. The study also made it possible to conclude that

Haloid ion

Metal ion

155


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 the density of the F-centre electron charge is concentrated mainly on the metal ions which are nearest to the vacancy, i.e. the F-center is con-sidered to be the electron localized in the region of the anion vacancy.

The experimental data [4] testify that the op-tical connection energy of the electron in the F-centre for AHCs is of the order of 2–3 eV, for AHCs with the band-gap eV. Therefore the energy of the electron connection in the F-centre is much larger than value of its thermal energy. Hence, the anion vacancy for the electron ap-pears to be a deep strongly localized trap, with the effective radius of , comparable with the lattice parameter (Fig. 2.).

Therefore as a first approximation the model of the F-center can be considered as a hydrogen like model. Thus, the problem of determination of the total energy of the electron, being in an an-ion vacancy spherically symmetric field is similar to the problem for the electron in a hydrogen atom. The electrostatic field in conceded model is caused not by the nucleus, but by the effective positive charge of the vacancy. The difference between the conceded model and the hydrogen atom is also that the electron trapped by the va-cancy makes a neutral system, and there is no Coulomb field at the distance of several lattice parameters. [5]

walls with the coordinates of

The ground state of the localized electron in vacancy is a hydrogen like state ( ) with the effective Bohr radius is equal to the size of the trap ( ). At the points and (Fig. 2.) the electron possesses the total energy equal to the potential one. Hence, moving from to

and vice verse, the electron loses the ki-netic energy and is not able to move away at the distance bigger than the size of the potential well.

The kinetic energy of the electron can be de-termined if we know the size of the potential well.

From de Broglie equation the speed of the electron is equal to

. If the walls of the potential well are consid-

ered to be absolutely smooth surfaces, then within the framework of the wave theory the

states of the electron can be defined by the set of stationary waves of various wavelengths (Fig. 3.). As the electron cannot move beyond the boundaries of the well, the probability of its occurrence at the points on the well

and is equal to zero:

Fig. 3. Example of excitation in the closed space of standing waves of various frequen-cies

0

. It only can take place if

, (3) where Taking into account (3) the Ek of the electron

in potential well is equal to: , (4)

where is the effective electron mass. Thus, the system of energy levels is similar

to system of electron energy levels in an isolated atom.

Indeed, at present a number of excited states (the so called K-bands), making Rydberg sequence of type transitions [5], with Rydberg constant reduced in times, has been found in the spectrum of F-center optical absorption in AHCs.

From (4) the frequency of the optical transi-tion between the basic and first excited level which determines the F absorption band, can be defined by the equation:

. (5)

Molwo condition [6] obtained from (5) is . (6)

The dependence of the state for the maxi-mum of the F-center absorption bands on the parameters of the lattice for AHCs [6] is shown in Fig. 4. The theoretically obtained Molwo relation according to (6) is plotted by a straight line. The experimental data obtained for different crystals are plotted by dots. The results presented in Fig. 4 demonstrate that the experimental data are close to the theoretical data.

156


References: 1. Shpolskij E.V. Atomic Physics (Tech-

nique-Theoretical Literature. Moscow, 1974), V. 2, p. 438.

2. A.M. Stoneham. Theory of Defects in Solids (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1975), V. 2, p. 358.

3. Feuchtwang T, Phys. Rev. 126, 1616 (1962).

4. K.S. Song. R.T. Williams. Self-trapped excitons (Springer-Verlag. Berlin. Heidelberg, 1996), p. 412. 5. N. F. Mott. R. W.Herney. Electron proc-esses in ionic crystals (Foreign Literature, Mos-cow, 1950), p. 304.

Fig. 4. Dependence of the position maximum

of the F band absorption on the lattice parameter 6. A.A. Vorobjev. Color Centers in Alkali

Halide Crystals (TSU, Tomsk, 1968), p. 387.

MATHEMATICAL MODEL OF MICROWAVE PULSE REFLECTOMETRY OF PLASMA IN FUSION DEVICE

Kalashnikov А.А., Sharnin А,V., Mezentsev А.А.

Tomsk Polytechnical University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin ave. 30,


Typical electron density profiles ne(r,t) in the

tokamak plasmas is finitely approximated with acceptable degree of accuracy by function (2)

The basic problem of microwave reflectome-try of high temperature plasmas in fusion de-vices of tokamak type is the interpretation of the experimental data [1,2]. The experimental data is obtained by using multifrequency pulse radar reflectometer (PRR) [2]. The principle of the method is to measure the value of time delay between a pulse launched toward the plasma and a pulse reflected from a plasma cutoff layer [3]. Time delay measurements are required to locate the position of reflecting surface and den-sity profile reconstruction.

( , ) (0, ) 1e ern r t n ta

βα⎡ ⎤⎛ ⎞= ⋅ −⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

(2)

Where α=-2, β=1 and substitute (2) to (1) makes equation

0

22 2( ) 1 p

arr

ω ω⎡ ⎤⎛ ⎞= −⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦ (3)

The suggested model provides calculation of intensity distribution of microwave inside plasma layer considering 2-D effects of interaction and consecutive time delay calculation in plasma.

After transform (3) we get (4) 2

( ) pArr

ω ⎛ ⎞= +⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

h

a

(4) The dependence of plasma fluctuations fre-

quency where and h=A2/a2 are coeffi-cients, which provide correspondence of distribu-tions (2) and (3) in interval where α=-2, β=1.

0

2 2 2 A aω= ⋅0( , )p rω ω

0

from the electron density of plasma layer ne(r) with frequency of probe ra-diation [0.2 , ]r a∈ ⋅ω looks like (1):

22

0

( )( ) p

e

e

e n rrm

ωε

⋅=

⋅The received function (4) describes the elec-

tron density profiles ne(r,t) with acceptable de- (1)

157


( ) ( )nn n k

rR r A Ja

α=gree of accuracy in the interval and is used in the given research for the description of plasma properties. It made it possible to real-ize the certain mathematical model of electric field intensity distribution for probing wave in plasma layer which is characterized by Helm-holtz equation in polar coordinates:

[0.2 , ]r a∈ ⋅ a (12),

nkαwhere - positive roots of equations

( ) 0nJ x = . Solution of the homogeneous and linear equation for Т(t) has form (13)

22 2

2 2 2 2 2

( )1 1 1 0 r r

p rE E Err r c c

ωφ φ

∂ ∂ ∂ ∂⎛ ⎞ + − − =⎜ ⎟∂ ∂ ∂ ∂⎝ ⎠E

( )=nk ct

kT t B e α− (13) (5)

General solution of the problem includes all private functions and looks like (14): where E – electric-field vector of microwave

in plasma; r – radius between the fusion device center and plasma layer; t - the time. ,

,

, ,

( , , ) ( cos

sin ) ( )

nk ct

n kn j

n j n n j

E r t e C nф

rD nф J Ca

αφ∞

−= +

+

∑ (14)

For solving Helmholtz equation the boundary condition – the electric field intensity distribution of probing microwave on the boundary of plasma layer have to be defined. This condition given by Coefficients are defined as coeffi-

cients of a double Fourier series under boundary conditions (6). The common solution of equation (5) has form:

, ,n j n jC D ,2 2

0/0 0 0 0 0( , [ : ]) ( ) ( ) ( )t y tE r a E t E E t e φ φφ φ φ φ −= ∈ − = ⋅ = ⋅ (6)

where – radius of plasma boundary, 0φa - the azimuth angle in polar coordinate system limiting the exposed plasma surfac 0 ( )t 2 2 2

2 2 2

2

/0 0

2

/1 0

( , , ) cos( ) cos( ) ( )

sin( ) cos( ) ( )

M N

j nj jn A cj n

M N

j nj jn A cj n

rE r t t C n J hc

rt D n J hc

φ ω φ ω

ω φ ω

+= =

+= =

= − +

+ −

∑ ∑

∑ ∑

Ee, t - field of the point microwave oscillator (PRR),

2 20/

0 ( )yE e φ φφ = − - the microwave intensity distri-bution in the plasma boundary. (15)

Coefficients Сnj, Dnj are derived as: 0 ( )tE tThe function is defined as (7)

2 2

nj0

2 ( ( ))( ) ( ) j=1,2,...M

C j 02

(0)

n

n n

n

n j j

j j

n

Ô G J zJ z Y z

G ÔJ

ν

ν ν

ν

⎧⎪ +⎪= ⎨ =⎪⎪⎩

2

0 max/2( ) exp 2 sin(2 ) t t TE t E f t

Tπ

⎛ ⎞−⎛ ⎞= ⋅ − ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠⎝ ⎠(7)

(15)

T – width of wave packet on the level of 0.5·Emax,

f – the carrier microwave frequency nj 2 2

2 ( ( ) ( ))D j=1,2,...M

( ) ( )n n

n n

n j j j j

j j

Ô H J z G Y zJ z Y z

ν ν

ν ν

+=

+Using the variable separation method E(r, t, (16)

φ ) = R(r)·T(t)·Ф(φ ) equation (5) can be trans-formed to the system (8):

Used in (15), (16) coefficients are defined by following formulas:

2 2

2

2

'' ( ) 0

1 '' ' ''pT c T r

r R rR Ôr R Ô

λ ω

λ

⎧ − + =⎪⎨ ⎛ ⎞+

+ =⎜ ⎟⎪⎝ ⎠⎩

2 20/

0

2 cos( ) n N nÔ e n dπ

φ φ φ φπ

−= ∈∫ (8),

(17)

( λ – const). /2

j 0/2

if j=0,then k=0.52G ( )cos( ) ,if j=1,2,...M,then k=1

Tt

jT

k E t t dtT

ω−

⎧ ⋅= ⎨⎩

∫ (18) Input the new separation constant μ. Then /2

j 0/2

2H ( )sin( ) j=1,2,...MT

tj

T

E t t dtT

ω−

= ∫'' '' 0Ф Ф ФФ

μ μ= ⇒ − = (19) (9),

(μ – const). Non-nil, periodical and limited solutions of

equation (9) has form (10): Calculated in the model E(r,t,φ )field is used

in realized methods of microwave power and time of flight calculation. It made it possible to realize advanced model of microwave pulse propagation in plasma and simulate time of flight measurements of PRR in order to rice the accu-racy of experimental data interpretation.

1 2( ) cos sinnФ С n С nφ φ φ= + , (10) 2n nμ = −

The solution (8) under boundary conditions (6) is reduced to the Sturm-Liouville problem for modified Bessel equation (10):

(11), 2 2 2'' ' ( ) 0r R rR r n Rλ+ − + = Nontrivial solution (11) has form (12):

158


References: 1. Y Lin, R Nazikian, J H Irby and E S Mar-

mar. Plasma curvature effects on microwave reflectometry fluctuation measurements. Plasma Phys. Control. Fusion 43 (2001) L1–L8

2. Shevchenko V., Walsh M.J. First Results from the START Multifrequency Pulse Radar

Reflectometer. Rew. Sci. Instrum., v. 68(5), May 1997, p.2040-2045

3. A.V. Sharnin, R.I. Baystrukov, D.V. Rogozniy. Design of data acquisition and control subsystem of the KTM tokamak multifrequency pulse radar reflectometer. - Plasma Devices and Operations. Vol. 11, No. 4, December 2003, pp. 237–24

ELECTRON DENSITY RECONSTRUCTION METHOD IN PULSED REFLECTOMETRY OF FUSION PLASMAS

Lobes L.A., Sharnin A.V., Bikmullin E.A.


634050, Tomsk, Lenin ave. 30, TPU, FTF


The biggest problem of reflectometry on the

fusion devices of tokamak type [1] is the correct interpretation of raw data [2]. Raw data are measured by launching microwave radiation into vacuum chamber and measuring it’s propagation time from transmitting to receiving antenna through plasma. Inversed reconstruction proce-dure have to be applied to raw data in order to get electron density distribution through plasma cross section.

( )

( ) 2

00 2

0

1

2 1,

1,2...

ci

er

i kia

drn r e

mt

c

i N

ετ ω

ω

⎧⎪ ⎛ ⎞⎪ ⎜ ⎟⎪⎪ ⎜ ⎟−=⎨ ⎜ ⎟⎪ ⎜ ⎟⎪ ⎝ ⎠⎪

=⎪⎩

∫ (2)

Measuring time delay ( )0 ,i ktτ ω for each fre-

quency channel and solving system of nonlinear equations (2) together with function ne(r) (3)

Probing plasma with O-mode quasi-monochromatic microwave packets in case then geometrical optics approximation is true, it’s possible to consider wave packet time of flight to be equal to propagation group delay τg in plasma [3] (1):

( ) ( )0 1e ern r na

βα⎡ ⎤⎛ ⎞= −⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

(3)

1 1

0 0 0 0

0( ) ( )

( ) 2 2 ( )( , ) ( )c c

r r

g kw w r w r w w w

d w w d rt dt r dr drdw c c dwφτ ω μ

= =

⎛ ⎞= = = + ⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠∫ ∫μ

it’s possible to find ne(r) distribution for cho-sen time slice tk. (1)

Nonlinear system (2) can be solved as opti-mization task. In our case system (2) can be solved using nonlinear least square approach, namely Levenberg-Marquardt method [4], real-ized as standard Optimization Toolbox function in Matlab.

where ( )rϕ - phase shift of reflected micro-wave, w0 – carrier frequency, tk - time slice. Plasma refractive index ( )rμ depends on plasma frequency such as 2

1 ( )20

( ) p rrμωω

= − , for O-mode mi-

crowaves. Due to dependence of plasma fre-quency from electron density distribution

Developed modeling program let’s to solve system (2) and to get coefficients of equation (3) for each time slice, which is equal to finding of electron density profile evolution ne(r,t). 2

( )

0

e r2( )p r

e

e nm

ω⋅

=⋅ε

, equation (1) may led to system

of equations (2) for selected time slice tk and carrier frequencies

Model testing and verification has been done in the following way. Reference electron density profile and known set of probing microwaves was used for calculation of reference propaga-tion delays in plasma. Reference propagation delays were used as input data in ne(r) inverse reconstruction program. Reconstructed ne(r) pro-

: 0iω

159

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 file was used for calculation of corresponding propagation delays. Next step includes calcula-tion of standard deviations and ( )( )en r ktσ

( ) i ktτσ

( )0 ,i i ktτ ω

of calculated distributions and

from corresponding reference distribu-tions for each time slice tk.

( ,en r )kt

Acceptable tolerance in our case was de-fined as ( ) ( ) 5%

en r ktσ ≤ . Analysis of tolerance sensitivity to parameter changing has shown following relations. First of all, both parameter α have to be less then 5 and α to β relation have to be smaller or equal to 2. If it’s wrong, then shape of electron density profile tends to trapezium. For such electron density profiles position of reflec-tion plasma layers almost just the same while values of propagation delay differ very small. Therefore a lot of ne(r) profiles can be fitted to those conditions. Second, electron core density must to be at least 2 – 2.5 times higher then critical electron density for lowest frequency channel.

Fig 1. Evolution of propagation delays τi(t) for each frequency channel

Reconstruction results of electron density

profiles shows that the model give good results even in a case of growing electron density profile and also in case when propagation delay in 3-ed channel is greater then in 4-th one. It should be noted that the acceptable tolerance in central part of plasma can be big, because central part of plasma not covered by reflectometry meas-urements. Therefore, in central part a lot of ne(r) profiles can be fitted to a raw data. It’s important to point, that we are interested in external layers of electron density distribution. Therefore we are don't care about big recovery error in central part.

Calculated by model evolution of propaga-tion delays 0 ,( )i i tτ ω for each frequency channel are shown on the figure 1. Time slice ∆t = 10-5 s and number of shown data trends are equal to time slice and number of frequency channels of typical multi frequency pulsed reflectometer of tokamak START [2]. Model calculation results are shown on fig-

ures 2 and 3. Raw data interpretation is required for time interval from 0.022 to 0.04 s. Up to approxi-mately 0.022 s plasma was not formed and elec-tron density was very low. After 0.04 s plasma collapse is happen.

Reconstruction of electron density profile from propagation delay trends ( ) i tτ is allowed only after preprocessing in order to decrease noise level. Properties of noise spectrum in raw data can widely vary from experiment to experi-ment according to the properties of plasma fluc-tuations. In general, noise influence leads to complicated patterns of τ(t) trends in time and frequency domain. Rough preprocessing could be realized by estimation frequency spectrum and decreasing power of low power high fre-quency components. More sophisticated algo-rithms are based on the filtration by plasma model. Shown on the figure 1 data trends are free from a noise.

Fig 2. Evolution of electron density profile on time interval from 0.02 to 0.028 s

160


Achieved reconstruction results well agree with experimental and theoretical knowledge about plasma physics on the fusion devices of tokamak type.

References: 1. J. Wesson Tokamaks. - Oxford Univer-

sity Press, Third edition, 2004, p. 749 2. Shevchenko V., Walsh M.J. First Results

from the START Multifrequency Pulse Radar Reflectometer. - Rew. Sci. Instrum., v. 68(5), May 1997, p.2040-2045

3. V. L. Ginsburg, Propagation of Electro-magnetic Waves in Plasma (Gordon and Breach, New York, 1961), p. 352.

Fig 3. Evolution of electron density profile on time interval from 0.028 to 0.04 s. Dennis, J.E., Jr., "Nonlinear least-squares",

State of the Art in Numerical Analysis, ed. D. Jacobs, Academic Press, pp 269-312, 1977.

161

Section IX

QUALITY MANAGEMENT CONTROL

163

Section IX: Quality management control

INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AS A BASIS FOR SUSTAINABLE COMPANY DEVELOPMENT

Zvereva N.V.,

Scientific supervisor, Venukova G.A.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050 Russia Tomsk city, Lenina Street, 30


Today, organizations of all sizes are under pressure to provide improvement in all aspects of their performance in a never ending effort to attain a “world class” status. These organizations have developed internal management systems that control certain portions of their operations such as quality, environment, regulatory, health and safety. While these formal approaches have provided some gains, the leaders of these or-ganizations have realized that independently operated management systems cannot sustain continuous improvement. It has been shown that these independent systems have caused organ-izational inefficiencies due to the development and operation of duplicate or parallel systems. In extreme cases, management system goals con-tain conflicting objectives which further dilute and hinder business performance. Combining “like” elements in these management systems is not the way-out. Organizations are in need of a sin-gle, integrated business management system that simply and clearly defines day-to-day opera-tions, is easily understood by employees and, at the same time, meets all business and customer requirements.

Under the global competitive conditions the optimal way of a company's subsistence is reali-zation of the sustainable development strategy, which includes problems of economics, ecology and social policy. The peculiarities or factors for sustainable development of any company or or-ganization are:

• financial stability and positive dynamics of profitability;

• availability of customers, clients or con-sumers for production and services of a com-pany that is a source of the company's income;

• working conditions, social protectability, staff competence and comfortable circum-stances;

• positive influence of working activity on public conscience from the ecological and ener-getic viewpoints;

• appraisal of a company's activity by the so-ciety, staff and business partners.

Every organization whether it is commercial or not exists in several "environments", and the possibility of its sustainable development is de-

termined by how it meets the requirements of these "environments".

The main condition for successful functioning of every company in financial environment is its financial stability which is provided by financial management.

The influence of the working environment becomes apparent in two aspects. Firstly, the company's production must be in demand among consumers whose needs are constantly increasing. The solution of this problem must be provided by a quality management. Secondly, the company must organize suitable conditions for its stuff so the work is efficient and safe. This problem is solved by means of professional safety and health protection management.

The enterprise cannot be out of an envi-ronment, so it should exert influence on it by using ecological management system.

Finally, social environment of the company makes it revolves in areas of labor legislation observance, social assurances realization, char-ity, business ethics and the support of public activities. Premises refer to the social manage-ment area.

Since all these areas function jointly, corpo-rate management system of a competitive com-pany must be based on the integration of all management systems used.

Meanwhile, the basic direction of perfection in management enterprises all over the world is creation and introduction of the integrated man-agement system on the basis of international ISO 9000 and 14000, SA (Social Accountability) 8000, OHSAS (Occupational Health and Safety Advisory Service) 18000, IDEF (Integration Defi-nition Methodology) standards, etc. These documents include world experience of system quality management usage, ecology, personnel, labour protection and industrial safety, informa-tion supply of the system.

Taking into account just listed standards and strategy of business development it is possible to construct modern Integrated Management system (IMS) of enterprises focused on the sus-tainable development concept (Fig. 1).

165



Figure 1. IMS Currently, the most comprehensible way of

solving this problem is application of the Bal-anced Score Card System (BSC) focused on the consideration of the following four components: finance, clients, internal business processes, training and personnel development.

The integration of financial management and quality management on the basis of the BSC and QMS is carried out through specification of a policy and the purposes in the field of quality, aimed at the realisation of the strategic financial indicators established within the frames of the BSQ.

Further on, on the basis of the reference points developed within the frames of the BSQ, the problems concerning customer support and consumers’ satisfaction monitoring are specified.

Then, business processes and criteria of their productivity and efficiency are corrected.

The requirements to personnel competence and professional development, motivation in-crease and efficiency are accordingly specified.

Logically, the integration of the BSC and QMS will also touch the other elements of these systems.

At the same time, the importance of applying eight principles of quality management and PDCA cycle in daily practice is not lowered.

It is necessary to notice the full identity of elements and requirements of ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 standards, with the only differ-ence that the application of ISO 14001 standard is directed towards decreasing the harmful influ-ence of the firm activity on the environment. The application of OHSAS 18001 standard, in its turn, is directed towards the decrease and ex-ception of the negative influence of production factors on personnel health and enterprise prop-erty.

In the simplified statement of some experts it says: «Everything, that occurs within a premise concerning damage, safety and health, is an object of OHSAS 18001; everything that occurs outside a premise concerning the same catego-ries, is an object of ISO 14001».

The structure and the content of SA 8000 standard and ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 standards are slightly different but they have some identical elements (Fig. 2).

Figure 2. Identical elements of SA 8000, ISO 9001, ISO 14001, OHSAS 18001

Flexibility and universality of methodology

and requirements of ISO 9001 standard enables us to bring the corporate management system of the enterprise into accord with the requirements of ISO, OHSAS 18001 and SA 8000 14001 standards without special difficulties on the basis of the corresponding requirements of the QMS. The affinity of structure and composition of the standardization objects of these documents con-tributes to this process.

In a word, it needs efforts, but as a result we can generate corporate management system in a company aimed at the achievement of steady financial results with the consideration of con-sumer, personnel, shareholder, supplier and so-ciety interests.

References: 1. Svitkin M.Z. Integrated management sys-

tem // Standards and quality, 2, 2004 – pp. 56-61.

2. Chighikov V.M. Practice of inspection cer-tification ecological management system on en-terprise according to ГОСТ Р ИСO 14000 // Standards and quality, 2 , 2003 – pp. 88-91

3. ISO 9001-2001 Quality management sys-tems – Requirements.

4. OHSAS 1800 Occupational Health and Safety Advisory Service

5. SA 8000 Social Accountability 6. ISO 14001 Ecological management

The representative of a management

Social policy

planning Introduction

Communications Reports

The control and correcting actions

166


SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF THE WORKFLOW SYSTEM Smolyaninova A.A.

Scientific adviser: Asadullina L.I., interdisciplinary Department of professional foreign

language, TPU, senior teacher



Today we may observe the need to solve the problem of document flow business process automation in the information systems market. The reason of it is the changing of business management style. Nowadays the more ad-vanced modern methodologies of process man-agement come to use and the activities of com-pany are interpreted as a composition of interre-lated operations.

On the one hand there are more and more approaches to process management which are being applied in a real operation of company. It happens owing to the fact that such manage-ment concepts as TQM (Total Quality Manage-ment) and CPI (Continues Process Improve-ment) are developed every moment. These methodologies require the use of tools of the company workflow simulation as well as the tools for their implementation.

On the other hand information systems have reached the sufficient level of development that allows to automate not only traditionally auto-mated processes (for example, automation of accounting activities) but also to automate the process of company management. The automa-tion of such processes require the highly flexible applications, the opportunity of customization, the ability to accumulate consolidated statistic data on various processes and to integrate the functions of a number of applications within the single working area.

These requirements overrun the traditional automation approach and as a result there ap-peared a new type of automation systems – business processes automation system or Work-Flow system.

The WorkFlow module was developed for the DocsVision product – the system for Docu-ment and Business Process Management. Due to the great formalization and detailing control the DocsVision system makes it possible to de-tect trouble spots in structure of organizational processes and provides the mechanism of their continuous improvement.

Despite the increased interest in distribution management of process and automation, the actual experience of using Workflow systems is still insignificant. In fact there exists a consider-

able lack of tools for business process manage-ment automation

In our life distribution of automated systems of Business Processes is limited by instruments for similar in type automation. Therefore let’s consider the specific tasks that WorkFlow sys-tem allows to automate. These tasks are very specific and that is why they have the following specific requirements to such software:

1. The Workflow system is aimed at auto-mation of the great number of processes. But the importance of every single process is not great in the structure of company information system. Application of this system is not profitable if it is applied for only one or two processes because the efficiency of using of the system does not cover the costs of realization of basic system infrastructure. It is obvious that the cost of every final process of automation should not be high and the process of automation should not in-volve the costly specialists’ work.

2. The Workflow system becomes the only appropriate tool for often changing automation processes even if these changes are insignifi-cant. The real Business Processes depends on variable properties of company such as organ-izational structure, product range and other. It requires constant modification.

3. Application of Workflow system is rea-sonable when it’s necessary to influence the work of employees who are responsible for exe-cution of their part of Business processes. For example, Workflow system may be used when we need to provide the employees with the means of automated notice about deadlines for some tasks and at the same time to give them the access to the data required for execution of their tasks. Applications are capable to auto-matically inform all persons about some prob-lems in the normal course of process, such as unconformity with scheduled times for any func-tion. The most important thing is that the system should provide maximum accessibility of all in-formation to its users useful at the stage of hu-man processing. This system also contains the easy-to-use mechanism of implementation of business logic of data processing.

167



4. As a rule the processes which are auto-mated by Workflow system border paper and computer technologies. The automation of such business processes implies the work with the considerable amount of unstructured data and documents. Generally it refers to the automation of procedure of quality management and public relation operations.

5. Such systems are essential when it is necessary to integrate the functions o document processing with functions which already exist in the arrangement of applications. Large quantity of real processes in the organizations include stage of information processing taking place in special application systems (ERP – Enterprise Resource Planning, CRM – Customer Relation-ship Management) and other systems. For ex-ample, initialization of process or one of its stages may be implemented by fixing or chang-ing of document state in the Enterprise Resource Planning. The fixation of data in the Customer Relationship Management is necessary for com-pletion of works.

There are some examples of tasks in which Workflow system can be used more appropri-ately such as: the forming and endorsement of

contracts execution, endorsement and confirma-tion of the budget, the endorsement of payment task, handling of client service applications, exe-cution of business trip documents and many oth-ers.

There are two basic ways for application de-velopers and system integrators to use DocsVi-sion Workflow Suite:

• As a standalone system with its own user interface that can integrate and interact with your own or your client’s applications via custom-designed gate ways;

• As a workflow component built into your newly developed application so that all users share the same interface, while your application acquires workflow functionality.

Picture 1. Business process scheme and settings are defined in a visual editor without programming. Every step of a business process involves executions of a function. A function is a certain operation that user can include into the process. Each function is encapsulated in a pro-gram component. The server component is built on .NET platform, while client components are developed in Visual Basic.

Picture 2. You can watch business proc-esses execution using customizable views that are defined without programming.

Workflow system should correspond simple, interactive and upgradable instruments for proc-ess adjustment of document handling without programming. The conventional business appli-cation requires initiative and attention from em-ployees. The Workflow Extension will prompt employees with what to do, when to do it, and

who is supposed to do the job, and will perform some of the actions automatically. According to WorkFlow system’s specific features the func-tional features of platform for their automation and component of WorkFlow system require-ments may be defined.

The WorkFlow system’s functions re-quired for solving the problems of business processes management.

168


Easy tools of business processes con-struction. The opportunity of faster development of new processes without or with minimal help of programmers is the most important feature of the WorkFlow instruments. The problems of certain automation processes and its continuous change should be implemented by the “proc-esses owners”, but not by IT-specialists. There-fore the WorkFlow system has to give them easy-to-use, but powerful process modeling sys-tem.

The system should have a sufficient kit of functions providing synchronization of work proc-ess and events of external systems, tools for process decomposition, the opportunity for con-ditional branching and operating cycles organi-zation, dynamic changing of system parameters, etc. It should support the creation of new func-tions and to have a user-friendly interface for its setup. During the system on-stream the separate functions may become prototypes of compo-nents that will allow us to realize corresponding functionality with parameters setup only, without programming.

In conclusion we would like to point out the close integration of this system with external sys-tems. Module Workflow allows to add the data from external systems to a Business Processes. It is worth to consider the following scripts of in-

teraction between the WF systems and free ap-plication system in detail.

1. Tracing events in application. For ex-ample, WF system should notify the concerned employees about the new payment document when it appears in the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

2. Data exchange between the application program and Workflow subsystem. For example, the payment sum should be transformed into a variable of process for determining the route of document endorsement.

3. Synchronization of reference information or synchronization of the directory of application system users and WF system.

WorkFlow system is becoming the single appropriate tool for business processes automa-tion. To sum it up, there are several reasons why you should choose WorkFlow system:

1. It adds value to your business applica-tions;

2. It is lightweight, smart and gives prompt challenge response;

3. It is a great alternative to more expen-sive similar packages;

4. It is affordable for medium-sized busi-ness, but is expandable to suit the majors;

5. It is the latest Microsoft technology with lots of functions.

BUSINESS-PROCESS AUDIT ORGANIZATION.

Shvyrkunova O.N.

Scientific supervisor: Janushevskaya M.N., assistant, Venjukova G.A. lecturer

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30, Lenina Street


According to the standard GOST R ISO 9001:2001 one of the main principles of quality management is process approach i.e. the proc-ess based management.

Naturally, there arises the problem of busi-ness-process (BP) audit occurring in the organi-zation. This results in forming the integrated as-sessment of company activity, implementing the analysis of both the current state of organization functioning as a whole and separate depart-ments and planning subsequent business-processes optimization.

Today, rather paradoxical situation has been formed. On the one hand, one can state en-

hanced interest to this problem (process audit). On the other hand, there is no heretofore gener-ally recog nized unambiguous definition of busi-ness-process audit.

Business process (process) implies a sta-

ble task-oriented whole of interconnected activity status (job sequencing) which converts inputs into outputs being of great value for a consumer as to special technology.

Business-process audit can be defined as

purposeful investigation of process for an estab-lishment of certain circumstances of business.

169



Investigation of the sequence actions for devel-oping the state of affairs is the focus of attention in the audit business process. Thus, the purpose of business-process audit is monitoring the process on the basis of its results, that is, defin-ing whether the business process effectiveness available meets the established requirements.

By this, one should take into account that audit managing itself is also a process com-prising definite operations the sequential execu-tion of which results in the outcome desired. Business process audit scheme is presented in fig. 1.

In BP audit execution one can distinguish the

following stages: 1. Developing the BP audit plan.

Developing the plan of audit execution is also a process. The scheme of developing the BP audit plan is presented in Fig.2.

In developing BP audit plan the following steps are executed:

1.1. Choosing the BP object and its

goals. The head of a company is responsible for

carrying out the administrative audit inspection on the base of the previously approved plan for carrying out audits in the organization or on separate casual ordering of an authorized per-son.

After decision making the audit object and goals are established. Setting the process goals

should be preceded by investigation and analy-sis of the information registered such as organi-zation policy and goals, inquiry of in-house and outside consumer, the process monitoring result as to the indices established, proposals on the part of the person concerned, organization re-ports on quality management.

Required resources for carrying out the audit are determined.(audit execution time, the audi-tors number, software, required documents, etc.). The auditors team is organized and the leader is appointed.

170


1.2. Choosing BP indices for audit. For choosing the indices one should estab-

lish and select key criteria which are intended for verifying the process. For this purpose applying the Pareto’s principle «80/20», brainstorming or Isikavo’s diagram is suitable. In selecting the indices one should take into account the process destination including their dropping or adding. It is expedient to work out the list of general criteria with periodical revision and adding.

A great number of indices doesn’t always bring the effect wanted. 1 to 5 key indices are considered to be required. In changing the in-formation will particularly fully reflect the process characteristics concerned for those who are re-sponsible for the process or organization leader-ship.

For choosing the key indices expert evalua-tion for establishing the weights coefficient on each indication is suitable.

1.3. Correcting the audit plan. In developing the audit plan it is recom-

mended to familiarize with the results of the pre-ceding audit of the process given and take into account the correcting measures.

1.4. Including correcting actions to the

audit plan. The correcting actions having been included,

the final plan for audit execution is being formed. 2. Business- process audit. In the course of process audit the compli-

ance with the previously selected key indices and also the adequacy and efficiency of the process management techniques established in the procedures, workmanship instructions, block diagrams and specifications are being verified.

In carrying out the inspection the auditor is recommended to apply the PDCA cycle which is a reliable tool for determining the possibility of process management without written procedures

or without document procedures specially devel-oped for this purpose.

The auditors should reveal the availability of the indices of process functioning which restrain the efforts on improvement. In particular, they include delays, alteration, deviation from the preset values, recurrence and others.

3. Compiling the report. For forming the objective final judgment

about the running process in carrying out the inspection it is recommended to previously com-pile “The draft of audit report”. The given docu-ment is used as preliminary version of “Audit report” and is presented to owner and partici-pants of the business- process being inspected for agreement.

After final session with the business- process owner the report about carrying out the audit and correcting measures on the audit results are composed.

Insufficient focus on the problem of process

inspection results in ineffective management system and doesn’t allow gaining the adequate results from organization present day manage-ment techniques.

Auditors and managers will win in case the audit process is properly organized. Following this step-by-step stage results in enhancing the effectiveness of business- process inspection.

References: 1. Краснова И.А. Методика проведения

внутренней аудиторской проверки эффектив-ности системы внутреннего контроля бизнес-процессов. На сайте: http://www.auditnet.ru/

2. Павлюк Д.В. Выбор критериев для из-мерения творческих процессов // Методы ме-неджмента качества. – 2008. - 11, с. 20.

3. Расселл Д.П. Аудит процессов и мето-ды его проведения // Методы менеджмента качества.- 2007. - 5, с. 8.

171

http://www.auditnet.ru/


ANALYSIS OF PROCESS EFFECTIVENESS AS SHOWN BY THE EXAMPLE OF THE DESIGN ENGINEERING FIRM.

Shilnikova L.V.,

Scientific supervisor Oglezneva L.A., Venukova G.A.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050 Russia Tomsk city, Lenina Street, 30


Standard ISO 9001:2000 is one of the basic tools for improvement of organization activity in the area of quality. One of the requirements which this standard includes is measuring the effectiveness of the Quality Management Sys-tem. However, the uniform method of a complex estimation of effectiveness is not offered. In management, effectiveness relates to getting the right things done. [1] Peter Drucker reminds us that effectiveness is an important discipline which “can be learned and must be earned.”[2]

Consequently, there are many problems concerning the effectiveness measurement of QMS and each separate process in the QMS of organization faces a kind of a problem being of both theoretical and practical importance.

The organization certified to ISO 9001 is heavily needed in the methods containing exten-sive data about the process which will be easy and understandable for executors of the proc-ess. Therefore, the most commonly used ap-proach is to determine effectiveness for each process and then determine their common evaluation taking into account the weight coeffi-cient. In this report one of the algorism of proc-esses effectiveness is presented. It was tested at the “Engineering researches process” of the design engineering firm in Tomsk. In future this analysis procedure may be used for every proc-ess in organization. The algorithmic diagram (Figure 1) shows the stages of analysis proce-dure.

Initially, the process should be chosen then the data about the process should be collected such as reports of the department, statements, transactions, quality standard etc. After that de-pending on the process peculiar features and the data available the list of indices must be worked out.

It is very important that the quality indices be developed on the base of:

• quality objectives; • organization mission, strategic planning; • process goals; • process technological features.

Further, the process quality indices system chosen is divided into four groups of the PDCA cycle. PDCA can be briefly described as follows:

• Plan: establish the objectives and proc-cordance

objectives and re-quir

tors of process (referred to as expe evaluate the experts judgment an ficient by using the formula (1

esses for delivering the results in acwith customer requirements and the organization policies;

• Do: implement the processes; • Check: monitor and measure processes

and product against policies, ements for the product and report the results; • Act: take actions to continually improve

the process performance; [3] Next, define execu

rt team) and d calculation weig

): ht coef

,1

∑∑== m n

ji

Qg (1)

1 1= =i jij

where n -quantity of exp

∑n

ijQ

erts, m -quantity of "we

t of j-th quality indices in the points, given

For ea the relative ratio by this

ighed" quality indices, Qi,j − an judgmen

by i-th expert. ch quality indices find

formula (2):

,relatplanQ (2) real QQ

=

− real quality index within speci-fied

atio as the ratio is ex-pressed in di , quantity of item should be fou

relatnorm

where Qreal period, Qplan − planed quality index within specified

period. [4] After finding relative r

fferent values (percenttudes) the normalized magni

nd by this formula (3): ,gQQ ⋅= (3)

where Qrelat - relative ratio, g- weight coefficient for selected quality in-

dex. When all quality indices were considered,

the effectiveness of process should be computed

172


by e result may be presented as a dia-

be estimated in the follow-

ntive actions are required;

ired to interfere into active pro

tions and preventive action

summing up normalized magnitude by PDCA. Finally, thgram (Figure 2).

The result shoulding way:

• If total sum S is closely to one, the proc-ess is very effective;

• If total sum S > 0,7 - the process is ef-fective, but development of corrective actions and preve

• If total sum S ≥ 0,5 - the process is ef-fective but it is requ

cess; • If total sum S is close to zero, the proc-

ess isn’t effective. Judging from this, the analysis allows to ob-

serve each quality index and the organization can develop corrective ac

s for ongoing improvement. This analysis of process effectiveness may be used for all processes in organization.

Figure 1.

0,8

0,870,95

0,87

0

0,5

1plan

doact

check

2008 year

Figure 2.

References: 1. Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Effectiveness . 2. Drucker, Peter F. The Effective Executive

The Definitive Guide to Getting the Right Things Don

. Основы квалиметрии: управление качеством продукции. – М.: Фи-линъ, 2004 – 295 с.

e (Harperbusiness Essentials). New York: Collins, 2006.

3. ISO 9001-2008 Quality management sys-tems – Requirements.

4. Федюкин В.К

NO

173

Section X

HEAT AND POWER ENGINEERING

175

Section X: Heat and power engineering

CALCULATION GROUP OF STEPS BIG WITH TWIST BY A PRINCIPLE OF A CONSTANCY OF THE SPECIFIC CHARGE ON HEIGHT BLADES

A.S. Matveev, S.A. Shevelev Tomsk Polytechnic University

634050, 30 Lenin Ave. (Building 4), Tomsk, RF, tel. 8-(382-2)-420-837


By consideration of thermal process of a tur-bine step it is supposed, that current in сопло-вой and the worker lattices can be considered plane-parallel and that parameters of a stream are kept by constants on height of lattices [1]. Thus all calculations concern to average diame-ter of a step. Actually the assumption of a con-stancy of parameters on height of lattices is only the first approach which the more close to true, than is less fidelity of a step.

Let's settle an invoice group of steps of tur-bine K-160-130 at the nominal and variable charge. The law was applied to calculation за-крутки лопатки last step with the constant spe-cific charge pair on height.

1. Initial data for calculation For calculations of a step on a variable mode

data about work of a step are required at a nominal mode. Therefore detailed calculation of flowing part CLP of the turbine has been made at work on a nominal mode.

CLP

CLP

1 1

2 2

3 3

I VI

ð = 0,437 Ì Pà;

G = 50,6 kg/s; z = 3 - two selections;pressure in selectionsð = 0,094 Ì Pa; G = 1,6 kg/sð = 0,0411 Ì Pa; G = 1,6 kg/s - (*)ð = 0,0134 Ì Pa; G = 2,8 kg/s;

d = 1,730 m; d = 1,73

in

in

md md

⎫⎪⎬⎪⎭

VIð

outCLP

0 m;

l = 0,780 m

p = 0,00349 Ì Pà;

(*) - in view of that the cylinder two-line Heat drop on steps are distributed in view of

smoothness of disclosing of a flowing part and are calculated approximately under the formula:

2

10

2 1

2000

md mdd nÑî s

H

π ρϕ α

⎛ ⎞⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ −⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⋅⎝ ⎠= .

I II0 0

III IV0 0

V VI0 0

H = 107,8 kJ/kg; H = 110,0 kJ/kg;

H = 126,5 kJ/kg; H = 146,5 kJ/kg;

H = 166,5 kJ/kg; H =180,0 kJ/kg.

2. Algorithm of calculation As it was marked earlier, for calculation of

last steps CLP of the turbine on variable modes the law of twist the blade with a con-stancy of the specific charge on height of blade is passed. For calculation of last steps on a variable mode the computer program which algorithm is based on a technique presented in [2] has been made.

3. Results of calculation The results received for a penultimate step

are presented on schedules.

Fig. 1. Change of oiη on height of blade

177



Fig. 2. Change of oiη on height of last blade

From the resulted calculations it is visible,

that for last step at reduction of the charge pair through a step the negative efficiency ( oiη ) arises first of all in a peripheral part of a step. Though on character of current pair at last steps with the lowered charge pair received on ex-perimental data it is possible to tell, that capacity is consumed first of all at root area (here arises отрыв a stream). It is necessary to draw a con-clusion that the mode at small volumetric charges pair can be calculated reliably only in view of spatial structure of a stream. Therefore the given module of calculation of variable modes with use of the simplified equations of radial balance can be used for continuous modes.

By results of calculations it is possible to tell, that character of change of efficiency on height and depending on 2G ν⋅ is defined first of all by losses with target speed. With change

2G ν⋅ corners of attack increase and conse-quently losses increase at a flow of lattices.

The degree of reactance with reduction

2G ν⋅ decreases, i.e. basically drop down works in соплах, it reaches even negative values. As with reduction 2G ν⋅ decreases drop down, worked by a step the number of the move for the worker and nozzle blades lattices also de-creases.

The basic information on current pair in CLP receive from experimental researches since calculation of steps big twist on the sim-plified equations of radial balance, especially at variable operating modes, can lead to greater errors. Now there are many works, devoted to calculations of a spatial stream.

Now in practice mainly apply two methods of calculation of a variable mode:

1) a matrix method; 2) a method of curvature of meridional lines

of a current. In VTI the program of calculation which

uses approximation of lines of a current by splines (i.e. the pieces of the cubic parabolas which are passing through points on lines of a current with certain accuracy) is developed. The lines of a current constructed of such pieces have minimal average on length curva-ture in comparison with other curves. On the basis of this program calculation CLP of the turbine by capacity 160MWt has been lead. For check of a settlement method comparisons of results of calculation with experimental to data were spent. On fig. 8 such comparison is given for last step of turbine K-160-130 HTGZ. The Design procedure does not consider quality of structures, therefore the program should give essentially overestimated values of fac-tors of the charge. On the other hand, in cal-culation did not take into consideration in-crease in factor of the charge because of hu-midity, and also promotion of workers blades. Apparently, influences of opposite factors are compensated at greater volumetric charges. At small 2G ν⋅ it is possible to explain a diver-gence of calculation and experiment, in par-ticular, reduction of humidity.

Good conformity for radial distribution of losses with target speed which as it is speci-fied above, define character of change of effi-ciency of a step is received. We shall note, that calculation allows to define precisely enough a mode of transition of a step on con-sumption of capacity.

At comparison of schedules VTI and re-ceived by results of calculations it is visible, that character of dependences is rather similar. Val-ues of analyzed sizes differ, but it first of all speaks that geometry of steps on which calcula-tions were made differ from geometry of steps of the investigated turbine.

The list of the literature 1. Shchegljaev A.V. Steam turbines. 5-th. М.:

Energy / – 1976. – 374 P.: a/w. 2. Samojlovich G.S., Trojanovskiy V.M. Vari-

able and transitive modes in steam turbines. – М.: Energypres. – 1982. – 494 P.: a/w.

178


HEAT TRANSFER DURING WOOD DRYING PROCESS Alexeev M.V.

Scientific advisers: Sekisov F.G., Kuznecov G.V.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenina avenue, 30


The world financial crisis broke out. It set more and more strong competition in commodity market, specifies new requests. It is concern of materials produced from wood. Thereupon the searching new engineering solutions in wood processing is still important task.

Wood is enough complex product having dif-ferent property set such as: penetrability by liq-uid and gas, thermal conductivity, electro con-ductivity, density, physical-mechanical character-istics and others. For one’s turn all of them influ-ence on realization of technological processes connected with heat and mechanical processing.

For enterprises working with wood one of the most important tasks is searching new ways and new methods for wood drying intensification with safety of quality established indexes, decreasing energy consumption and period of process reali-zation.

The purpose of this project is attempt to find and collect theoretical basis of wood drying ap-plying electrical discharge at decreased pres-sure.

Wood is belong to category of capillary-porous colloid materials. The drying of such ma-terials is accompanying by row of complex physical phenomena.

Pic1. Microscopic texture scheme of wood

ГС –annual layer, C – capillary, СЛ –heart-

shaped rays, ЛБ – fiber, ЛП – well perforation

The knowledge and taking those phenomena into account is necessary to consider as basis for right technological process construction, working drying regime out, analysis and well-founded design of drying facilities. Moving away the moisture in drying process has own features and mechanism of development. It’s depends on mechanism and driving transfer force which are in one’s turn depends on wood drying method.[1]

The scheme of vacuum dryer for wood dry-ing is shown below:

Pic2. Vacuum wood dryer scheme 1.Vacuum chamber, 2.Condenser, 3.Condensate collector, 4.Vacuum pump, 5.Voltage source, control board The construction of drying chamber is quite

simple. Thermoelements and planking are stack-ing by turns inside chamber. The chamber has condenser for water steam collection, evaporat-ing from wood when it’s drying. The whole drying process occurs under decreased pressure in chamber. That helps to intensity drying and de-creased time for drying process.

Thermoelements is device designed for heat transfer from heat carrying agent to wood. Ther-moelements represents as square profile tube coil which are closed from each side by iron sheets. It’s made with a purpose to increase surface between wood contact and heat con-ducting construction. Thermoelements scheme is shown on picture 2.

179



Pic2. Thermoelement scheme

Pic3. Wood staking scheme

In present time theoretical research of heat

exchange process extensively based on compu-tational modeling applying electronic computers. This became a reality because of considerable progress in computational methods developing in solving tasks for equations in partial deriva-tives and increase of computer capacities.

It’s necessary to note next circumstances. Nowadays computational process modeling of heat exchange obtain more and more important role. Modern science and technique needs reli-able process prognosis. Such process is really hard to research in laboratorial or natural condi-tions and sometimes even impossible. Computa-tional modeling of heat transfer process is more successfully becoming wide spread in practical work of different institutes, designing, manufac-turing and industrial enterprises.

During the working process of heat transfer in wooden block was modeled. Time dependent heat transfer was considered according to heat conductivity equation:

This equation describe multitude of proc-

esses in variable development of conductive heat transfer. To choose one variant from innu-merable quantity it’s needed to be added unam-biguity conditions which are contained geometri-cal, physical, initial and boundary conditions [2].

For our task heat conductivity equation transforms into:

This equation according to boundary and ini-tial conditions will be solved numerically that us using computer resources.

Differential equations in partial derivatives is solving. Method of final differences (MFD) is

used. The idea of this method is quite simple and it’s shown even in the name of method. In-stead of derivatives final different approximation is used.

When MFD is applied for heat conductive tasks solid is considered as totality nodes. It’s approximated partial derivatives of differential equation by final differences we got system of linear algebraic equations for tempreture deter-mination as local characteristic in each node net. Derived system is open-ended. For close-end using MFD of boundary condition. As a result we have close-ended system of linear algebraic equation solving by numerical computing.

The program of calculation was made based on up-writing in programming language Turbo Pascal 7.0. The corresponding graphs of tem-perature allocation were made:

Pic4. Isotherms of solving region – slit

Pic5. Isotherms of solving region – cross-section

Derived data show that process of wood dry-

ing is needed to be apply by disposing ther-moelements along wood fiber. It’s let to get more fluent working up, at same time decreasing time essential for water evaporation[3,4,5]. It’s possible to make a conclusion – less distance between thermoelement tubes than worming-up is much fluent. But the distance between tubes can’t be decreased anymore because of eco-nomical understanding such as less distance between tubes as much more expensive ther-moelement. From three examined variants – 50, 75, 100 mm – the most optimal variant is 75 mm distance between tubes.

For one hour the warming-up is not reached to acceptable temperature level. But this model can be considered as acceptable, because in real conditions drying process occurs about 40-50 hours.

Next Improvement in modeling of drying process is necessary to lead to decreasing tem-perature drop along section, improving uniformity

180


2. Кузнецов Г.В., Шеремет М.А. Разност-ные методы решения задач теплопроводно-сти – Томск: Издательство ТПУ, 2007. – 172с.

of warming-up, considering the influence of elec-trical component on drying process and decreas-ing time of considering process.

3. Лыков А.В. Тепломассообмен: (Спра-вочник). – М.:Энергия, 1978. – 480с.

Literature 1. Древесиноведение / Перелыгин Л. Н.,

Уголев Б. Н. Учебник для техникумов, изд. – 4-е – М.: .Лесная промышленность, 1971.- 288с.

4. Глазнев В. Н., Коптюг И. В., Коробей-ников Ю.Г. Физические особенности сушки древесины // ИФЖ. – 1999. – Т.72. - 3.

5. Лыков А. В. Теория сушки. – М.: - 1968. – 472 с.

DEVELOPMENT OF A TWO-LEVEL SYSTEM OF NON-DESTRUCTIVE ACOUSTIC EXAMINATION OF THE HEAT POWER EQUIPMENT

Klimov A.S., Medenkov A.A., Petrov V.I.

The scientific chief: Afanasiev V.K., doctor of technical sciences, professor

The Siberian state industrial university, 654007, Russia,

Novokuznetsk city Kirova str., 42


The purpose of activity is the system devel-opment of monitoring of the heat power equip-ment and prediction of resource of functionabil-ity.

The given purpose is reached by the solution of such problems, as development of separate program units answering each for the problem.

The modernizing of inspecting gears is in-dispensable for successful realization of the given system, which one is encompass byed following: 12 elements of the Unit of auto circula-tion of acoustic impulses can be substituted by one of 16 by a digit microcontroller with usage of a belt of Rogovskiy.

Proceeding from above described, the sys-tem allows to execute diagnostic of the heat power equipment and prediction of development defects, i.e. warning of originating of emergen-cies on steam pipe lines by well-timed elimina-tion of defects.

The storage location standard controller of a system with dimension of 1 byte, therefore, is capable to contain figure in a decimal system figure no more than 255, that in a binary system it is meant as figure composed from eight, thus addressing in the given interfacing does not al-low to work more than with 255 devices.

The read-out implements through a synchro-nization with the interfacing RS-235, by means of the personal digital computer. The reading

and modification of the data will be realized on a Framework.NET c by usage a visiblis component TComPort.

The interfacing of the program actuates 2 windows, 7 modules, 4 elements of control TSpinEdit and 1 element of control TComboBox.

The first module should answer for discover-ing of the connecting interfacing. Taking into ac-count a formulation only correctly elected port can guarantee fulfilment of the designed pro-gram.

The second module will allow to read out the indispensable data from memory of the controller and to record them in the file with dilating *.ini. Each controller should have the local address.

The third module will allow to scan quantity of controllers in a range from a beginning num-ber up to figure indicated in elements TSpeenEdit and to count the data in *.ini the file from the retrieved devices.

Module «Read the data» will read out the in-dispensable data from the device.

The module «Analysis of outcomes» works on the basis of the designed writers of the mathematical vehicle for submission of out-comes of diagnostic in understandable for the user a view.

The module «Save Value in a Excel» will al-low to export the data of the device to framework of a Excel.

181



The module «Streaming arguments/options» injects a window with streaming arguments and options of the controller. In the discovered win-dow it is possible to load/save indispensable options of the controller, to change each sepa-rate of an option.

In bridge with controllers the similar control block - Monitor Unit of emergencies is devel-oped, which one works in case of a considerable frequency drift of registered arguments of acous-tic waves in a place of reputed defect and exe-cutes transition to the second level of monitoring on this segment for obtaining the more full infor-mation about development of defect. That is in case of leap of registered arguments the system automatically transmits the information for actua-tion of a defective segment in the plan of over-haul, that preventing appearance of emergen-cies afterwards.

In a system the parallel connecting circuit ul-trasonic sensors, gauging, disposed on object, according to designed procedure of the installa-tion is realized. Ultrasonic sensors have a digital output, the data Transfer is effected by means of the industrial interfacing RS-485

The sensors of monitoring place on the heat power equipment, which one register main specifications of an acoustic emission: voltage, frequency etc. of gauged signal. The microcon-troller gives the information on following argu-ments:

- Figure of the registered impulses of a dis-crete acoustic emission for a time slice of obser-vation,

- Figure of the registered overflows by im-pulses of an acoustic emission of the established level of discrimination for a time slice,

-Relation of figure of impulses AE to a time slice of observation,

- Relation of the total account AE to a time slice of observation,

- Energy allocated by a source AE and born by elastic waves, originating in a stuff,

- Energy АЭ, allocated in a place of gauging, - Predictablis residual resource of function-

ability of the controled heat power equipment. For remote data acquisition will organize

connection between separate amounting sys-tems by means of the industrial minutes of series connection. Our system is organized through an industrial puncture RS-485, more known as MODBUS.

Protocol MODBUS is the international stan-dard, which one is sustained by many firms - sires of controllers of a production equipment. The protocol reputes one fissile device in a line (master) and allows to poll device, reverting to them to the unique address. The syntax of com-mands of the minutes allows to address 255 de-vices, coherent in bridge. Usually it is meant,

that the physical layer of a line should conform to the standard RS-422 (4-wire, two-way) or RS-485 (two-wire, half-duplex, with acquisition of a line), however at bond «point-to-point» the same format of commands can be utilised on any se-ries asynchronous physical interfacing, including RS-232.

The controllers are bridged, using technol-ogy «main - slave», at which one only one de-vice (master, main) can originate transfer (to query) others devices (slaves - slave) transmit the data, required by the main device or effect indispensable operations. The main device in-cludes leading (host) the processor and boards of programming. The slave devices represent industrial sequence controllers, which one can be paired directly or through the modem.

The user selects an indispensable mode to-gether with other arguments (transfer rate, mode of a parity etc.) during configuration of each con-troller.

At usage of a ASCII-mode each byte of the report is transmitted as two ASCII-numerals, namely, two fallback sexadecimal digits (numer-als 0-9, A-F). Each report is transmitted by a continuous stream. The main advantage of this method is encompass byed volume, that the time between transmission of numerals can be about 1 second, without originating errors by transmission. The bytes can be transmitted both with parity check, and without it. One is used of autopodiums - bits, and in second - two auto-podiums - bits in case of the former.

In a ASCII-mode the report starts with a co-lon (numeral «:», the code $ 3A) also is ended by sequence «carriage return», «line feed» (CRLF, code $ 0D, $ 0A). As the report consists of fallback sexadecimal digits, an allowed char-acter set is 0-9 and А-F.

The receiving device permanently expects a numeral «:». After he is adopted, the device re-ceives all following numerals according to a message format. The intervals between numer-als of the report can be no more than 1 second. An interval more than seconds the receiving de-vice will recognize as an error.

The address field contains two fallback sexa-decimal numerals (in the ASCII-minutes) or 8 bits of binary digits (in the RTU-minutes). The allowed address of transmission is in a range from 0 up to 247. To each slave device the ad-dress in limits from 1 up to 247 is appropriated

The address 0 is used for broadcasting transmission, it will be recognized by each de-vice. When the MODBUS-minutes is used on more high level of a network, the broadcasting transmission can not be sustained or can be re-alized by other methods.

The field of a function contains two fallback sexadecimal numerals (in the ASCII-protocol) or

182

Section X: Heat and power engineering 8 bits of binary digits (in the RTU-protocol). A range of figures from 1 up to 255. The realization of all functions is not obligatory, the controller can treat some subset of functions. When main transmits the data slave, he indicates number of a function, which one should execute slave. In case of the normal answer slave retries an origi-nal code of a function. If has a place an error, main the code of a function with established in 1 most significant bit returns, and the field of the data contains the description or cause of an er-ror.

For example, the main controller transmits slave the indicating «to read a register group». This function has a code 0000 0011, i.e. $ 03. If slave has executed the demanded operation without an error, he returns the same code. If has a place an error, he returns 1000 0011, т. Е. $ 83.

The field of the data contains in the report from main to slave the padding information, which one is indispensable slave for fulfilment of the indicated function. It can contain addresses of the registers or outputs, their quantity, counter of transmitted bytes of the data.

For example, if main requests for slave to read a register group (code of a function 0x03),

the field of the data contains the address of the initial register and quantity of the registers. If main wants to record a register group (code of a function 0x10), the field of the data contains the address of the initial register, quantity of the reg-isters, counter of quantity of bytes of the data and data for recording in the registers.

The field of the data can miss (to have null length) in definite phylums of the reports. In MODBUS-networks two techniques of transmis-sion errors are used. The contents of a field of a check sum depends on an elected transmission mode. When the ASCII-mode is used, the field the monitoring sum contains two ASCII-numerals. The check sum grows out calculations LRC.

The construction of mathematical model is effected by affiliation of mathematical problems in one whole and task of edge conditions.

The program «KlimMed» is developed in Framework.NET by usage of standard visiblis and not visiblis components. The program «KlimMed» - instrument for control and monitor-ing of the heat power equipment on the basis of microcontrollers with a capability of the central-ized conservation of the data on a server and rendition of indispensable outcomes.

RESEARCH OF PEAT IGNITION CONDITIONS WITH CHANGE OF DIFFERENT

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Kulesh R.N. , Budkova S.S.

Tomsk polytechnic university, Tomsk, Russia


The problem of forest fires is rather urgent for our country, as huge territories of forest fre-quently are in the remote places. As a practice, the amount of the isolated centers of ignition does not decrease despite of improvement of forecast systems. Recently the centers of igni-tion occure in more remote and boggy districts that complicates the delivery of technical equip-ment for their localization. To a certain degree it is connected with cutting down of accessible wood resources.

In Siberia regions full of peat different types of peat reserves, (the reserves of peat in Tomsk region is about 30984 million tons, that makes more than thirds of discovered of Russia peat

reserves [1]). This is a grand problem because crown fire often leads to make the ignition of peat swamp. In some cases the mechanism of the given phenomenon can be the following: there are separate hot centers (decaying hum-mocks, the wood fragments, separate fires, etc.) after the crown fire [2]. It is interesting to know what energy such centers of ignition should pos-sess for peat ignition depending on heat and mass exchange conditions and peat characteris-tics. The received data can be used in forecast fire development, based on mathematical mod-els of burning and experimental data.

The experiment of burning peat layer in natu-ral conditions, emitting the distributions of com-

183


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 bustion wave is described in the publication [3]. Lack of the given experiment is the absence of enough temperature gages. As a result it’s im-possible to judge with a sufficient degree of ac-curacy about thermophysical processes occur-ring in the centers of burning. However, the re-ceived data on distribution of the center of com-bustion and properties of peat are worthy.

This paper considers the thermophysical processes, occurring in a layer of peat with the heat on its surface and their dependence on changing peat characteristics and environment conditions.

At carrying out of experiment peat is located in cylindrical ditch, the diameter of peat layer is 20 sm and its height is 10 sm. Ditches walls are made of a net material for maintenance of air circulation. The cylindrical steel source of heat, diameter of which is 5 sm and the height is 5 sm placed on the peat layer. Characteristics of dis-tribution of thermal energy on a layer of peat were measured with the help of the thermocou-ples located under a source of heat on various depths. During the experiment the temperature of a source of heat and the indication of thermo-couples in a layer of peat are measured. At the same time the moment of alignment of tempera-ture of peat and the certain area of peat layer is fixed, as in this case the source cools the center of burning and can stop burning process of.

During the researches peat characteristics such as density, moisture and environment change: the ratio of heat transfer in an environ-ment. In this case, heat insulating covering placed on the source whether the experiment occurs at a stream of air moving with certain speed and emitting wind. All these conditions emit the situations that occur in environment. The data received at carrying out of experi-ments, are used in the mathematical model de-scribing the occurrence and distribution of a peat fire.

Some received dependences are submitted in the following figures.

Fig. 1. Conditions of ignition of peat at moisture of 8 % and density of 650 kg/m3

Fig. 2. Conditions of ignition of peat at moisture of 20 % and density of 650 kg / m3

From the submitted dependences it is visi-

ble, that peat in air - dry condition (moisture of 8 %) is combusted at a temperature 490 °C dur-ing 17 minutes. The increase of moisture up to 20 % leads to increase initial temperature of a source up to 600 °C and to increase the time of ignition. Besides, it is necessary to point out the form of evaporation moisture process (fig. 2), increasing with the increase of peat moisture.

Research of influence of external factors on process of peat ignition has been completed. For this purpose the source of heat was covered in heat-insulating material - Mullit, the external temperature of heat insulation was fixed.

In this series of experiments conditions of reduction of source heat losses in an environ-ment (reduction of speed of a wind, or rise in temperature of air) were reproduced. Results of experiments are submitted in figures 3, 4.

Fig. 3. Conditions of ignition of peat at moisture of 8 % and density of 650 kg/m3 in heat-insulating material.

184


Fig. 4. Conditions of ignition of peat at moisture of 20 % and density of 650 kg/m3 in heat-insulating material.

It is possible to draw a conclusion that heat-

insulating material poorly influences reproduced processes. It explains presence of hot gases streams around a source of heat without isola-tion. Hot gases also promote long preservation of temperature of a source. Besides heat-insulating material promotes fast local heating of peat, but time of ignition increases sharply. It is possible to explain the given fact a fast burning out of oxygen in local areas and its shortage.

The layer of heat-insulating material also blocks taking oxygen inside of a layer of peat.

In the conclusion it is possible to note, that the received experimental data were used at modernization of the available software package for the forecast of occurrence and development of forest fires.

References: 1. Pugach L.I. Alternative power – renewable

sources, use of a biomass, thermochemical preparation, ecology safety: studies. L.I. Pugach, F.A. Serant, D.F. Serant /. – Novosibirsk: Pub-lishing house NGTU, 2006. – 347 P.

2. Subbotin A.N. About some features of dis-tribution of a underground fire / A.N.Subbotin // Engineering – physical magazine. – 2003. – Т.76, 5 – P. 159-165.

3. Borisov A.A. Experimental research and mathematical modelling of peat fires / А.А. Bo-risov, Al.A.Borisov, R.S.Gorelik // Thermophysics of forest fires/ – Novosibirsk: the Science, 1984. P. 5-22.

THERMAL STRATIFICATION WITHIN THE WATER TANK

Sushilova N.V.

Scientific adviser: Molodegnikova L.I.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin st., 30


To sufficiently store and use high-quality heat energy, thermal stratification is gradually applied in many kinds of energy storage fields such as solar thermal utilization system. Be-cause of the unsteady characteristics of solar radiation, thermal storage becomes very essen-tial in long-term operation of heating load. The wide application of thermal stratification lies in the minimization of the mixing effect by use of the thermal stratification, which is caused by the thermal buoyancy because of the difference of temperature between cold and hot water.Liquid water with the characteristics of non-toxicity, easy obtainment, high thermal capacity, suitable for wide range temperature requirement is served as the main storage medium in domestic or even industrial utilization; therefore, water tank is widely used in energy storage system for

civil use or industrial process. As far as solar energy system is concerned, from the lower temperature section of the water storage tank, the cold water circulating through the collectors is heated by solar radiation, where it becomes the hot water and returns to the storage tank. If the hot water is allowed to mix with the cold wa-ter in the tank, the supplied temperature to the load is lowered and the useful quality of energy is degraded. In order to obtain the maximum efficiency of stored energy, thermal stratification technology is introduced and developed in re-cent 10 years.

1.Thermal stratification. The research on thermal stratification within

the tank has been studied intensively since the 1970s. From the viewpoint of thermal stratifica-

185


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 tion, it is assumed that the inlet fluid will drop to a level where its density matches the density of the surrounding fluid. Due to the gravity and buoyant effect, water with different temperature will deposit the corresponding height according to the density difference; light density will bring hot water to the upper layer, and cold water with heavy density will fall down the bottom layer. Then thermal stratification is built as “the thermal barrier” to separate the warm and cool fluids, and maintain the stable vertical temperature or density gradient.

1.2. Stratification within water tank. The stratified water tanks are conventionally

classified into two types: indirect and direct heat-ing mode. For the indirect heating water tank, several heat exchanger configurations have been employed and the following configurations are among the most common:

1. immersed tubes or immersed coils in the tank;

2. external shell-and-tube exchanger; 3. mantle heat exchanger with a narrow

annular jacket around the storage tank. As shown in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1. Heat exchange between the fluid con-tained in the tank and that circulating in a heat exchanger carefully placed inside or outside the tank.

Direct heat transfer For the direct heating water tank, in order to

inhibit the turbulence generated from the mixing of the hot and the cold water, several measures are taken, such as adding baffle plate at the inlet of the tank, porous mesh to slow up the water flow. In order to decrease the mixing of the wa-ter, besides the above measures, it also allows wide variety for different design in structures, and the dimensional optimizations, etc.

2. Valentin Energy Software. 2.1. Concept. T*SOL express is the express design pro-

gram for solar thermal systems. It is the right choice for sales staff and trade technicians who need a reliable tool to design solar thermal sys-tems quickly and precisely. A number of different systems can be selected for hot water supply and space heating. The program takes you through a few simple steps with clearly laid-out

dialogues, allowing you to work quickly and effi-ciently.

2.2. Review of the work. The aim of the work was to make a computer

model of solar hot water system for the house for 6 person in T*SOL Program.

First of all zone was selected- Czech Repub-lic, Prague. One tank system for hot water solar supply was chosen. This type of solar system is frequently used for one and two family houses. The configuration of number of collectors, stor-age tank and other components should then be entered into T*SOL. Specific parameters: solar collectors - BramacBSD6E,; tilt Angle – 45 0; thermal appliance – Domestic hot water; internal, external piping -15m; auxiliary heating – gas boiler.Then the design assistant showed the possible variants of solar systems. Such pa-rameters as DHW solar fraction, system effi-ciency, number of chosen collectors were repre-sented.Then the question of tank choice arose. At T*SOL program some parameters were changed and all the results were fixed and en-tered in a table 1. Table 1. The selection of DHW Tank.

Table 1 Solar panel

BramacBSD6E

BramacBSD6E

Bramac BSD6E

Bramac BSD6E

BramacBSD6E

Area,m2 11,0 11,0 11,0 11,0 11,0 Water tank (L),

500 400 350 300 250

N.gas sav-ings,

413,9 m3

396,2 m3

383,1 m3

366,8 m3

345,5 m3

CO2 avoided

938,99kg

898,8 kg

869,2 kg

832,1 kg

783,9 kg

Solar Fraction

58,3 %

56,3 %

54,7 %

52,6 %

49,8 %

While designing the solar system it is very

important to make the project economically at-tractive. The equipment is expensive, but also the gas, which is used at auxiliary heating, is much more expensive. The situation is so that in case if the volume of water tank is big, less gas is needed for heating the water, so the economy of gas is appreciable. But on the other hand, smaller tank costs less money, but this way the gas consumption is much observable than in the first variant. So all the factors are relative and as already mentioned the main aim of the designer is to find out the normal, suitable relation be-tween all these factors.

186

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B6VMY-4S92WHJ-1&_user=640811&_coverDate=04%2F15%2F2008&_rdoc=1&_fmt=full&_orig=search&_cdi=6163&_sort=d&_docanchor=&view=c&_acct=C000032309&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_userid=640811&md5=1dd68e8a1ddd95ba950dbb617edb8974#fig2


The results of calculations with DHW tank with stratification are given in the table 1. The whole calculation of the program was considered in details (table 2).

Table 2.

With stratification DHW Solar Fraction 56 [%]

E Coll Loop 3,007 [kWh] E Aux Heating 2,724 [kWh]

E Preset - DHW 4,080 [kWh] E (Sec) Circ 1,002 [kWh]

Heat Loss - Tank 631 [kWh] Loss Ext Piping -

Collector 710 [kWh]

Losses - Internal Piping

617 [kWh]

T Flow - Collector 19.9 [°C]

Fig.2. The dependences of volume of DHW tanks from natural gas savings.

According to received values the depend-

ences of volume of DHW tanks from natural gas savings were created. It can be clearly seen that at 200-350 litter tanks there are marked differ-ences at gas savings and after that the curve of gas savings increasing becomes more gentle. So we can make a conclusion that at bigger tanks the relation of cost for equipment and the cost of saved gas becomes practically equal and there is no use in finding any pluses of these variants according to these parameters.

The main result of the work is the prepared

model of solar hot water system, which includes not only the scheme of the system, but also its calculated parameters and all the equipment needed for the system.

The average DHW tank 400 was selected. Variant with stratification was consid-

ered: Literature: 1. R. Spur, D. Fiala, D. Nevrala and D.

Probert, Influence of the domestic hot-water daily draw-off profile on the performance of a hot-water store, Appl Energy (2006).

2 4 0 .0 L i te r /D a y5 0 ° C

2 x B S D 6 ET o ta l G r o s s S u r fa c e A r e a : 1 2 .2 6 m 2A z im u th : 0 °In c l :4 5 °

D H W T a n k - 4 0 0

3 0 kW

2. James & James. Planning and installing solar thermal systems: a guide for installers, ar-chitects and engineers; 2005.

3. L.J. Shah, G.L. Morrison and M. Behnia, Characteristics of vertical mantle heat exchang-ers for solar water heaters, Proceedings of Solar 99 ISES, Israel (1999).

187


THE PRODUCTION OF A SOLID CARBON DIOXIDE THROUGH EXPANSION OF SMOKE FUMES IN THE TURBOEXPANDER

Chatshina Y.A.

Scientific supervisors: Molodezhnikova L.I., Nekrasova T.M.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenin Ave.,


The following popular industrial methods of separation of CO2 from outgoing combustion gas were analyzed in this project:

1. Absorptive-stripping method. In this way we use alkanolamin. This method re-quires higher consumption of fuel, in about 1.3 – 1.4 times per unit of energy produced and leads to the decrease in efficiency from 38 % to 29 %.

2. Freeze-out technique. In this case if 90 % of CO2 is collected the coefficient of efficiency of thermal power stations will de-crease from 38 % to 26 %.

3. If lime carbonate is used in furnace with boiling bed at t = 8000С the carbon will be fixed in СаСО3. Unfortunately, in this case СаО is spent 4 times above the coal consumption and only 15 % of heat is used effectively. The analysis has shown that above-listed

methods of separation of CO2 from the outgoing combustion gases lead to the decrease of the coefficient of efficiency of thermal power stations of 12 % and can’t be considered to be the solu-tion to the problem outlined above .

The radically different result will be achieved if we use the power installation for complex gen-eration of heat energy, cold and crystal carbon dioxide. The first mention about the possibility of a solid carbon dioxide production by freeze-out from smoke fumes expanding in turboexpander of regenerative low-temperature gas-chilling ma-chine was made by I.S. Badilkes. The develop-ment of power installation for complex generat-ing of heat energy, cold and crystal carbon diox-ide schemes has first begun in 1968 at Lenin-grad Institute of Technology at the departments of “Industrial power engineering” and “Chilling machines” under direction of professors A.N. Lozhkin and N.N. Koshkin. [1] This schemes are based on combining a direct cycle of power pro-duction (in a steam generating unit or in steam and gas turbine) with reversible cycle of heat pump (gas-chilling machine).

This principle of operation ensures the fol-lowing:

1. intensification of the heat transfer in heating surface as compared to usual plant

and, as a result, the comparative reduction of heating surface [3];

2. the rise of dew-point temperature to the level at which we can use the heat of water steam condensation of combustion products for water heating, which allows to achieve the higher calorific value of fuel;

3. the outgoing combustion gases after cooling in force-feed economizer and ex-pansion in turboexpander can have lower temperature (as compared with ambient temperature), i.e. it can convert from heating agent not only to working substance, but also in refrigerant. In this case there will be no heat loss to the environment with outgo-ing combustion gases and the temperature of outgoing combustion gases will depend only on the dispersion conditions of gas emissions into the environment. [1] The inclusion of cooling regenerators block

before turboexpander makes it possible to de-crease the temperature of combustion products in front of it to temperature which is equal to temperature of carbon dioxide desublimation. Finally, the freeze-out process of CO2 from fuel combustion products takes place. The carbon dioxide is separated in a separator in the form of small crystals and is evacuated from it by a screw or other kind of arrangement. It is techno-logically possible to convert solid CO2 to liquid or gas phases by using a low-grade heat of in-stallation.

The higher ecological effect from adoption of power installation for complex generating of heat energy, cold and crystal carbon dioxide should be noted too. It connected with decrease of envi-ronment pollution, particularly, at the expense of heat loss decrease and considerable decrease of CO2 emission in atmosphere.

It is widely known the decrease of CO2 con-tent in outgoing combustion gases of power plant has a great importance when estimating their ecological efficiency. At the same time, car-bon dioxide is a valuable technological product, which is finding more and more wide application in various branches of a national economy, and the need for it is never completely satisfied. In our country about 15 % of annual release of

188


Section X: Heat and power engineering solid CO2 and about 40 % of liquid CO2 is made on the basis of special burning fuel. More-over, for manufacture of one ton of carbon diox-ide 1 – 1,3 tons of equivalent fuel are burnt. The annual fuel consumption for needs of CO2 pro-duction makes more than 200 thousand tons a year. Though high-speed kinds of fuel, such as coke, anthracite АК, natural gas and others are used only. Therefore the development and reali-zation of a plan of actions in CO2 extraction by freeze-out from combustion products of fuel leads to the increase of economic and ecological efficiency of a power plant and will solve a prob-lem of СО2 production in the cheapest way, and

allow lowering the fuel consumption by 30-40 %. [2]

The analysis of CO2 production develop-ment indicates that the process of freeze-out of CO2 from a stream of combustion products ex-tending in turboexpander can become one of the most prospective methods of solid CO2 produc-tion.

This explains my choice when considering the installation for СО2 production conducted with the help of a gas-chilling machine.

The installation scheme for generation of solid carbon dioxide is shown in Figure 1.

Installation works as follows: the smoke ex-

hausters (1) take away combustion products of fuel from a boiler plant and pass them to the main heat exchanger (2), where they are cooled by feed water heating. The hot water is used at a plant for technological needs. The condensed moisture which is taken away from the main heat exchanger with the combustion products of fuel is separated into a liquid trap (3). [1] The com-bustion products of fuel from a liquid trap are passed to a compressor (4), where they are be-ing compressed and moved to the compressor aftercooler (5), where their cooling to the tem-perature closest to ambient temperature occurs. The hot water from the compressor aftercooler also can be used for certain technological needs. Then the combustion products of fuel enter into a liquid trap (6) and desiccate. After it they cool down in a regenerator (7) at the ex-pense of heating the regenerator checkerwork (a

direct flow) to the temperature closest to the temperature of crystallization of solid CO2. Next they expand in a turboexpander (8) returning the external work, which partially compensates the work of a compressor drive. There is a sharp temperature decrease and crystallization of solid carbon dioxide in a flow of gases at expansion combustion products of fuel. Solid CO2 is sepa-rated and transferred in the form of a technologi-cal product in a separator (9). Then the combus-tion products of fuel (a reverse flow) pass the regenerator, cooling its orifice, and at the tem-perature closest to the ambient temperature are thrown out in the atmosphere. After full heating and cooling of regenerator orifices they switch. The electromotor (10) is used to drive the com-pressor in the installation. [3]

Thus, the application of heat exchangers (2) and (5) allows to use the temperature drop of combustion products of fuel to the full extend,

189

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 because they are cooled practically up to an ambient temperature. During cooling water steam condensates allowing to use a higher calorific value of fuel instead of the lower calorific value and to partially absorb harmful impurities. The use of a gas-chilling machine allows to pro-duce solid carbon dioxide for industrial purposes in the most perspective and economic way com-pared to an existing absorptive-stripping way, where it is made directly from combustion prod-ucts of fuel.

References: 1. Галдин В.Д. Получение твердого ди-

оксида углерода из расширяющегося газово-го потока: Учеб. Пособие. – Омск: Изд. ОмПИ, 1993.-60с.

2. Пименова Т.Ф. Производство и при-менение сухого льда, жидкого и газообразно-го диоксида углерода. М.: Легкая и пищевая промышленность 1982.-208с.

3. Получение сухого льда выморажива-нием в турбодетандере газовой холодильной машины/ Н.Н. Кошкин, В.П. Сустинов, Б.В. Шестаков, М.М. Данилов.//Исследование хо-лодильных машин: Межвуз.сб. науч. тр.-л., 1978.-250с.

190

Section XI

DESIGN AND TECHNOLOGY OF ART PROCESSING OF MATERIALS

191

Section XI: Design and technology of art processing of materials

LASER ART – LASER APPLIED IN MODERN PERFORMANCE Zhang D., Smirnova E.V.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, Lenin Avenue, 30


I. Introduction Ever since its invention in 1960, light ampli-

fication by stimulated emission of radiation (La-ser) has drawn intensive curiosities from both scientific and public society [1][2]. It is without doubt that laser has a profound influence on our way of living and more importantly our way of viewing the world. Nowadays, laser is employed in wide area of scientific research from the inves-tigation of material properties to the search for extraterrestrial intelligence. In our daily lives, the blue-ray DVD with a storage capacity compara-ble to our hard disk has been realized. Laser printer is gradually replacing the traditional inkjet printer because it is quieter and faster. In medi-cal operation, laser scalpel is more accurate and safe.

Laser also inspires huge imagination of the public. From the early days of science fiction up to now, laser is widely served. For most cases, it plays the role as the dire powerful weapons used by evil aliens (from Mars), heroes (superman for example), interstellar war crafts, etc.

Since laser creates a mysterious atmos-phere and it has brilliant color, it has been inten-sively introduced into art performances. In gen-eral, laser provides beams, graphics, and the combination of them two in modern shows.

In this paper, laser functionality and the specific types of laser applied in art perform-ances are briefly introduced. The material engi-neering will be observed as well in short, while it plays a vital role in satisfying the requirements of art performances. The mixing color and the me-chanic design to realize special visual effects will be discussed separately. Laser like many other advancing technologies has proven a good ex-ample of the successful application of material sciences in art.

II. Laser in a nutshell The principle of laser can be generally ex-

plained by the combination of two processes: emission and absorption.

Fig.1. Schematic illustration of the emission and absorption processes. Eh and El stand for higher energy level and lower energy level.

The discussion of these two processes can

be tracked back to the paper Einstein published in 1905 explaining stimulated emission.

We start from the simple model of atoms

with two energy levels as shown in Fig. 1. The atoms that jump from the higher energy level to the lower one emit the energy as a photon. Both spontaneous and stimulated emissions of radia-tion lead to decrease of the atomic population on the higher energy level. Thus, we need the ab-sorption process that atoms on the lower energy level are pumped back onto the higher one by injecting energy into the atomic system. The two processes work together to transform the exter-nal energy into photons. In order to achieve lasing, two reflective mirrors are installed at both ends of the laser tube. Photons travel back and forth in the laser tube to enhance the stimulated emission and obtain the high coherent lasing light.

The common types of laser are: gas laser, solid-state laser and semiconductor laser. Al-though semiconductors also belong to the gen-eral topics of solids, we put it into a different group because of the different method of pump-ing.

III. Developments of laser in modern art

show As explained in section two, the laser light

is the light emitted when the system transits from a higher energy level to a lower energy one. The wavelength or the color of the light is strictly de-termined by the energy difference of these two levels. And these levels reveals the elementary properties of atoms with the principle rooted in the theory of modern physics. Energy levels are like fingerprints for specific material which can-not be changed arbitrarily. This is the limitation

193





XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 for the laser with certain materials since one cannot tune the color of the laser light continu-ously from red to violet.

In art shows, the range of visible light (from ~0.45 μm to ~0.65 μm) is needed. Laser with multiple colors can be more exciting to the crowd and more flexible in graphic displaying. Thus, search for or constructing laser with new materi-als is crucial for a wide range of available colors (wavelength in a more general sense).

The gaseous argon laser and krypton laser were used at the beginning for shows. These lasers have the advantage of generating several wavelengths through the visible spectrum. For example, krypton laser emits: 0.676 μm (red), 0.647 μm (red), 0.568 μm (yellow), 0.531 μm (green), 0.416 μm (violet) [3]. However, the drawback of the gaseous laser is that it is usually bulky and need huge amount of circulating water to cool it down when it is in operation.

In recent years, benefiting from the devel-opment of solid-state laser, laser equipments become smaller and more convenient than the traditional gaseous laser. Here we introduce the typical solid-state laser called diode-pumped solid-state laser (DPSS) that is the type widely used in art shows nowadays. The typical mate-rial of the DPSS is Nd:YAG—neodymium-doped yttrium aluminum garnet with the chemical for-mula: Nd:Y3Al5O12.

Nd:YAG has a strong lasing wavelength at 1.06 μm which is beyond the visible light range [4]. In order to convert Nd:YAG into a visible light laser, crystals as Ba2NaNb5O15 and KNbO3 are employed to apply the frequency-doubling proc-esses, which are discovered in the research of nonlinear optical materials. By frequency-doubling technique, the light that travels after the nonlinear optical material possesses the wave-length of 0.53 μm, which corresponds to green. The red and violet light can also be achieved by Nd:YAG laser with different energy levels util-ized. But violet light has relatively a low intensity. This is why blue laser art show is still not com-mon.

IV. Engineering of laser art A new profession is developed after laser is

adopted in commercial art shows. Laserists—as they call themselves—absorb the advancing technologies of laser and supply devices for la-ser shows in the name of art. A spectacular art show designed by laserist requires considera-tions both on colors and on visual effects.

A. Colors Most shows use monochromatic lasers and

mostly green color, because high power green light laser is well developed and the price is rela-tively low (Fig.2 left).

Fig.2. Left: The commercial product of solid-state green light laser. Right: Beams and graphics established by laser simultaneously [5].

Laser with multiple colors employ the basic

principle of color mixing. By mixing green and red laser beams, one can get yellow or orange beam. And green plus blue results in cyan color. This is the basic principle of RGB-System (Red-Green-Blue). Since currently commercial product of blue laser costs a lot, it is an ongoing hot re-search topic in material sciences.

B. Visual effects Beams and graphics can be produced by

laser. Basically, laser show requires the light source, the mirrors driven by motors, the control-ling panel, and a proper screen. The laser pro-jector integrates the first three parts together (shown in Fig.2 (left)). The direction of light and lasing time are controlled by computer program to fulfill different display demands. In theatric shows, water and fog screen are most common.

V. Conclusion

Fig.3. 3D display in movie Star Wars.

In this paper, we reviewed the visible light laser adopted by laserist in art shows. It is the rapid development of material technology that makes the wide use of laser possible. However, three-dimensional displays as shown in Star Wars are not realized yet. That will be a perfect inspiring source for scientists and engineers to work on new laser.

194


3. http://www.lexellaser.com/techinfo_wavelengths.htm access date: Mar. 22, 2009.

References 1. Slusher R.E. Reviews of Modern Physics.

– 1999.- 471p. 2. Reviews of Modern Physics/ W. E. Lamb,

W. P. Schleich, M. O. Scully, C. H. Townes; 1999.-263p.

4. The Review of Laser Engineering Supple-mental Volume/ D. Cui, J. Xu, Y. Bo and the oth-ers, 2008.-1043p.

5. http://www.laserist.org/guide-to-laser-shows.htm access date: Mar. 22, 2009.

IMAGING SPECTROMETER AIDED RESEARCH OF DESIGN OBJECTS

V. L. Zhukov

St. Petersburg State University of Technology and Design,

191186, Russia, St. Petersburg, 18 Bolshaya Morskaya st.


For the purpose of obtaining the full informa-tion regarding the object during the course of technological research, for example, easel paint-ings or monumental painting, it is performed in the same sequence as the original creation. In the course of the research targeted at exact tasks, separate elements or unique design mate-rials, basement or pigment patterns may be re-searched separately. However, if we speak about the attribution, studying the technological features of some special artist’s painting or the work of exact school of artists, it is necessary to aim no only at maximum full but sequential re-search of all the parts of the work [1].

Non-destructive methods of control are gen-erally being used for research of various objects including paintings or their structural elements, fragments and pieces of a special interest. Being the most accessible, these methods include all kinds of research of visible, UV, IR and X-ray ranges of spectrum [1].

Until recent times in the visual research of the artware objects the photography was the most important. However, contemporary success of the world science show that among the means of the non-destructive control there appeared sensible devices of remote sondage with the highest efficiency. These are imaging spec-trometers providing elementary sectrums regis-tration and the structures of the objects being researched. Only hardly detectable spectral and energetic differences are the reliable indicators of the main features of the design objects and other measurement effects located at the limits of spatial resolution of the modern imaging spec-trometer equipment. Also the tendency of uniting the equipment with artificial intellect able to iden-tify the objects has started changing.

Such a unique possibility is granted by the artificial intellect systems, e.g. complex research made with imaging spectrometer equipment.

Imaging spectrometer equipment allows to distinguish even very small items and also to define the colour patterns and the chemical composition of those objects.

Imaging spectrometer research lets to see and understand the materials structure, their chemical composition which allows to extend the range of the non-destructive methods of controls when analyzing the artistic materials used for creation of the design objects. This is one of the main tasks in design aided by imaging spec-trometer devices. It also grants a possibility to minimize sampling the researched objects.

A special place among the instruments of remote sondage belongs to imaging spectrome-ters where flat reflection diffraction grates are used as dispergating elements of polychroma-tors [2]. Equipment of this type allows to meas-ure energy in the many different intervals of elec-tromagnetic spectrum, emitted or reflected by the researched objects which have the mono-chrome images obtained with the help of imag-ing spectrometer equipment are similar to the high quality photo pictures.

Obtaining of the imaging spectrometer pic-tures of polychrome and polymorph design ob-jects with their successive automated digital and fiber-electronic treatment will prove the validity of the imaging spectrometer filming as a fundamen-

195

http://www.lexellaser.com/techinfo_wavelengths.htm

http://www.lexellaser.com/techinfo_wavelengths.htm

http://www.laserist.org/guide-to-laser-shows.htm

http://www.laserist.org/guide-to-laser-shows.htm


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 tal base for the remote sondage methods. This in turn creates a perspective area of using the concept of intellectual management in technics and technologies which are the complex techni-cal and human-operated technical systems of management functioning for design activity.

Intellectual systems of management are re-lated to the management systems ‘large intellect’ grade if they forecast the object status, its exter-nal and output impacts and if integration, trans-parency and durability principles are being satis-fied [3]. The intellectual system is considered as united by the information process the aggrega-tion of hardware and software that works mutu-ally with human or independently on the basis of data and accumulated knowledge and with a certain motivation and is able to synthesize the target, to work out a solution and find the most efficient way of performance.

We have developed a dynamic expert sys-tem based on imaging spectrometer methods using the knowledge data bank able to perform the expert valuation which is used to take a de-cision on an appropriate action and the results of the action are being forecasted. In accordance with the decision made the management is per-formed, a certain management algorithm acti-vated with various performance devices which affects the object being managed. The results of this management are compared with the fore-

cast. When the results are identical the prior management is confirmed.

The analysis of possibility of new equipment arrangement of polychromator of imaging spec-trometer with optical re-tuning of the working spectral areas such as intellectual management systems has showed that this type of networking decisions allow to considerably increase the effi-ciency of measurements, and also to create the new technique, to extend the databases used for maintaining of the passports of the design ob-jects including artpieces.

Literature: 1. V. Birstein Technology, research and stor-

age of the easel and wall paintings. V. Birstein, V. Golikov, Y. Grenberg. – Мoscow: Crafted Arts, 1987. − 392 p.

2. V. Krasavtsev. Perspective information imaging spectrometer systemПерспективная информационная видеоспектральная систе-ма. V. Krasavtsev, A. Semenov, K. Chikov// In-ternational scientific-research conference mate-rials ‘Intellectual systems’ (AIS- 2006) and ‘Intel-lectual systems’ (CAD-2006). Scientific edition, 3 volumes. − Мoscow. Physmathlit, 2006. − V.2. − P. 233-239.

3. I. Makarov Artificial intellect and intellec-tual management systems/ I. Makarov – Мoscow. Science, 2006. – 357 p.

MAIN FRAMEWORK OF COMPLEX ORNAMENTS APPLICATION PROCESS BY PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF THE COMPLEX HARDWARE PIECES

S. V. Zhukova

St. Petersburg State University of Technology and Design,

191186, Russia, St. Petersburg, 18 Bolshaya Morskaya st.


One of the ways of objects decoration is or-namenting. Using the ornament as the increase of the artpiece’s aesthetic value is recently per-formed when creating the modern objects.

Technical complexity of the ornamenting processes stipulates the need for automation of the technological process of creating the pattern as the production of the ornament in kind with manual labour decreases productivity and the mechanical labour is not flexible.

The basics of the technological preparation for automated ornamenting is the creation of the virtual model of the pattern in the computer for-mat which allows to program the automated hardware. In most of the cases it is the vector format of computer graphics with linear presen-tation of the images. Both domestic (Y.A. Askarov, T.V. Ayusheva, O.I. Dokuchaeva, T.V. Kocheva) and foreign (M. Wong, D. Zongkea, K. Kaplan) scientists contributed to various solu-

196


Section XI: Design and technology of art processing of materials tions in using the methods of computer graphics for the ornament design.

The project paper is devoted to revelation of main framework of complex ornaments applica-tion process by plastic deformation in production of complex artware pieces with defect-free sur-faces and without additional mechanical treat-ment (scratch brushing, rasping, minting etc.), which leads to the considerable decrease of the manual labor share in the production unit cost.

The project paper is of current concern as it is focused at:

- expansion on the artware pieces range; - cost per unit decrease; - advance in technological designing; - artware design and production processes

automation; - implementation of the modern software and

the use of precise equipment in production of the fittings for the artware pieces produced by the method of plastic deformation;

- increase of treatment quality and precision of artistic reproduction of the macro relief of the artware pieces produced by the plastic deforma-tion method;

- mass production of the high precision and permanent quality prototypes.

The present project paper was based on the methods of statistical analysis of the designing, construction, engineer analysis and heavy equipment programming software.

Experimental researches were performed using the fiber optical measurements. There were used automated systems and most up-to-date software for gathering and processing of data.

There have been analysed modern computer systems of the 3D modeling and processing which allow to use the digital image as a starting point for designing, scaling and production of the technological fitting.

We defined the character of the decorated macro relief, revealed he main types of faults arising at deformation of the surface of subpro-ducts and the requirements for the quality of sur-face needed for the being designed artpieces.

We performed the comparison analysis of the decorative and plastic features of the defor-mated alloys.

The suggested technique allows to produce the complex artware pieces (rotating objects) with front surface decorated by complex orna-

ments free from surface defects without any re-quirements for additional treatment.

We develop the methodics of the processes modeling of plastic deformation in the system ‘instrument – deformated alloy’ for the forecast-ing of the possible defects.

We perform the digitizing and creation of da-tabase of complex ornaments and their design parameters used for creation of the digital model and development of the universal classification of the ornaments according to their complexity and the number of elements per surface unit. We develop the classification of technological factors of surface defects and considerable features of the basic materials.

We perform the analysis of the statistical data of the acceptable limits of distortions of the ornament elements which do not influence the visual perception of the decorative elements.

The results of the research may be used in the jewelry industry, in the souvenir production and in any sphere where the decorated metal pieces are used (lighting arms manufacturing, furniture fittings, etc.). One of the usage areas of the method is restoration of the crafted artware.

List of the publications of the research

results 1. S. V. Zhukova. Polychromatic Processes

in the Artistic Treatment of Gems. New As-pects.// Materials. Russia scientific conference of students and post graduates Science Days, St. Petersburg, St.Pb SUTD, 2004. - p. 185.

2. L. T. Zhukova, V. P. Lyubovitsky, V. P. Yertsev, A. V. Khmarenko, S. V. Zhukova. Sci-entific concept of the reconstruction of the unique historic and culture monument – the monumental mosaics of gems of F. Chernyshev CNIGR museum.// Design and Technology of the artistic treatment of the materials. Interuni-versity journal of the scientific and research pro-jects. #14. – Moscow. MGUPI, 2005. – p. 5-9.

3. S. V. Zhukova. Optimising the process of fitting manufacturing and development of the technological process for the semi-automatic application of the ornament on the front surfaces of complex profile rotation objects by method of plastic deformation.// 13th St. Petersburg As-sembly of Young Scientists and specialists.- St. Petersburg.: Gaudeamus foundation, 2008. – p. 121.

197


PROBLEM OF STYLE CLASSIFICATION IN DESIGN Kozlova A.A., Kukhta M.S., Zemlyanitsyna A.P



The purpose of the present research is to

study and analyze the classification of styles, methods, and basic modern tendencies in de-sign.

The term “style” was uncommon in XIX cen-tury. In English-speaking countries this situation has not changed till today, for example in “Ox-ford Companion to Art” this term is not presented at all. Today the concept of style is based on the notion about the first significant styles which were developed during the period of ancient civi-lizations. Style is а specified expression form of art plastic ability.

The researcher of primitive art styles V.B.Mirimanov has analyzed figurative petro-glyphs, and summarized that they allow to re-ceive scant but objective parameters on which the style is initiated [1]. He assigned two types of image geometrization: curvilinear ("a bend", fig. 1.1) and rectilinear ("a break", fig. 1.2.) As an example the researcher takes ancient African figures of a camel and a man from the Sahara desert.

Fig. 1.1. Africa. Sahara. Curvilinear style

Fig. 1.2. Africa. Sahara. Rectilinear (ditriangu-lar) style

During all history of material culture this or that type of geometrization defined an essence of all great styles and graphic stylizations which formed a visual appearance of image with typical distinguishing features.

The main specific indications for these two stylization types are:

The first type is characterized by softness, curvilinearity, bending, plasticity (biomorphism);

The second type is described by rigidity, straightness, breaking, rupturing (crystallomor-phism).

Examples of soft and rigid stylization: Meso-potamia - the Neolith, fig.2; Egejsky region – Mycenaes motives, fig.3)

Fig.2 Mesopotamia - the Neolith: soft and rigid stylization

Fig.3 Egejsky region – Mycenaes motives: soft and rigid stylization

Style is always an amalgam of social,

phased and individual components. Researches in the field of art history (according to the history of styles) are exposing the following dynamics of styles establishment from the individual creativity position (Table 1) [1]:

198

Section XI: Design and technology of art processing of materials Table 1 Dynamics of styles establishment

Style Individual creativity position

Style of primitive art

Individuality is missed

Ethnic (traditional) styles

Individual voices sound in unison inside of their

ethnos. Imperial styles Separate voice is mini-

mally original, but al-ready noticeable.

the Renaissance styles

Polyphony of solo voices exists within the limits of a regional mo-

saic Styles of New time

(XIX century) Individuality is obvious within the limits of na-tional culture and clas-

sical aesthetic para-digm.

Style of postnon-classical period

(End of XIX - first half of XX centu-

ries)

Strongly expressed in-dividualities in the

stream of international movement.

Style in design is determined as a harmoni-

ous unity of all form elements in a product (com-plex, system or environment).

Another important term “stylization” is also applied in design. Stylization means the follow-ing:

- Conscious use of this or that style features in the design processes by a designer.

- Direct copying of the most obvious visual attributes of cultural appearance to the designed object, more often for the purpose of decoration (e.g. plastic decoration, chromatic decoration, textural decoration);

- Creation of the emphasized decorative form of the object by imitation of external attrib-utes of the natural forms or objects created by a man.

The basic operation in stylization is a formal-ization of different motives (volumetric-plastic, color and graphic motives), simplification of it, generalization and organization in order to achieve desirable semantic and decorative im-pression and style expressiveness [2] (Examples of rigid stylization - fig. 4.1 and soft stylization - fig. 4.2. Images of Kulai)

Fig. 4.1. Rigid styliza-tion of Kulai`s images (Kozlova A.A.)

Fig. 4.2. Soft stylization of Kulai`s images (Vasiljuk O.V.)

Styles in design are structurally divided into

following levels: - Style of the certain period of cultural devel-

opment (Great styles, or Epochal styles) with its typical features of composition methods and specific character of figurative language. This level of styles can be divided into two sublevels: "western" (a baroque, a rococo, an empire style, classicism, etc.) and "eastern" (Chinese, Japa-nese etc.).

- Style of various branches in the design which reflects different concepts of style initiation in subject environment (Art Nouveau, Functional-ism, Constructivism, Minimalism, etc.)

- Firm style - visual identification of products-goods (or services) with the production of the certain firm. Firm style includes firm (trade) mark, features of its composition and style in-cluding firm colour scale and package of goods.

- Individual creative style of the designer (au-thor's style) - the style connected with original creative handwriting of the definite designer [3].

The most commonly used stylizations in modern design market are stylizations based on styles of the subject environment of the certain cultural epoch. Today, such styles as Baroque, Rococo, Art Nouveau, and Eclecticism with the use of Hi-Tech and Minimalism are rather popu-lar.

However, in my opinion, it is significant not to forget original ethnic styles of early epoch cul-tures, which are certainly deserve to take a wor-thy place in modern design of various consumer goods, such as interiors, jewellery, clothes or even shoes.

Scythians, Sumerians, Egyptians and other "ancient designers" are an inexhaustible source for researches, inspiration and motifs for applica-tion by up-to-date designers.

199


3. M.S.Kuhta, L.T.Zhukov, M.G.Goldshmidt, Bases of design, the manual. Tomsk Publishing house TPU, 2009

References: 1. Mirimanov V.B. Image and style: Specific-

ity of Postmodern. Stylistics of 1950-1990-s. - М.: Russian State Humanist Univers., 1998. – 80p.

4. 4000 motives: animals, birds, fishes. Spra-vochnik/Graham Lesli Makkelem; trns. from Eng-lish E.V.negura. - М.:AST: Astrel, 2008. - 382, [2] with ill.

2. The basic terms of design. Brief directory, VNIIТE, 1988. – 88p.

ANALYSIS OF DESIGN PROJECTS OF THE WORKSHOP Pishchulina D.A., Kukhta M.S., Zemlyanitsyna A.P.,

Tomsk Polytechnic University, Russia, Tomsk 63 40 50, Lenin str., 30,


The purpose of this article is the analysis of

three projects of the workshop for students of Tomsk Polytechnic University, who study “Indus-trial Design”.

The peculiarity of this speciality is mastering different techniques and technologies of materi-als processing: wood, ceramics, glasses and metals. Also, the students study a lot about properties of materials. According to this factor, working area must have the following zones:

− Working zone (for classroom study); − Storage zone; − Assembly zone (for process of fabrica-

tion); − Relaxation zone and zone of discus-

sions. One of the classrooms of the Mechanical Engineering Department was taken as an object for design project. Let’s make analysis of three presented projects which were created with 3d graphic programs.

Pic.1 Workshop interior, author D. Pishchulina The next project was created by Anastasia

Kozlova. There is no blind wall (as in variant 1) in this design, but there are lattice frames for area division, and also serves as a panel. Abso-lutely, that is the advantage of this variant. It makes the area of the workshop lighter, but at the same time, crushes the structure of the workshop space and makes chaos, which re-veals the other design problem.

The first project made by Dasha Pishchulina (pic. 1) is presented with the icy colour gamma, that makes this variant very interesting and un-usual. But it’s not taken into account that it makes room “cold” in winter period and accord-ing to the words of M.Lusher, icy colours de-crease temperature approximately in 3-4 de-grees. Rectangular shapes of tables, windows and lamps are balanced by contours of the arch and this is the advantage of this design. Storage zone with moveable frames, which have the function of the panel (pic. 1, left) should be re-designed for meeting the needs of safety.

200



Pic. 2 Workshop design, author А. Kozlova

The area is divided aflat (tables, chairs) and

upright (shelves, panels, compartments) and that is the advantage (possibility of rearrangement and infilling) and the disadvantage the same time.

The third variant was created by Vera Pod-dubnaya (pic. 3).

Pic. 3 Workshop interior, author V. Poddubnaya

This project is a hybrid of two previous vari-

ants. There are both types of division: blind wall and lattice frames. They are used for keeping different materials for work and for expositions, like panel.

According to the Ergonomics, this variant is safer, because the height of panels and shelves is optimal and it’s not necessary for making spe-cial frames.

The colour gamma of all projects meets the needs of technical aesthetics. However, the col-ours of two last variants, are more appropriated, because of the factor of weather condition.

Literature: 1. Elements of Design: training aids / M.S.

Kuhta, L.T. Zhukova, M.G. Goldshmidt. – Tomsk: publishing house Tomsk Polytechnic University, 2009. – 300 p.

2. Medvedev V.U. Principles and Canons of Value of Industrial Products – Ceation of Design. St-P.: “PC SPGTD”, 2006 . – 76 p.

3. Ustin V.B. Composition in Design. Me-thodical elements of Composition Forming in Design Creation. M.: AST: Asttrel, 2007. – 239 p.

201


STEELS IN GERMAN DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE Smirnova E.V.,

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russian Federation, Tomsk, Lenin Avenue, 30


Stuttgart is a city in the south of Germany, the capital of the state of Baden-Württemberg. Founded in the 10th century, it numbers nowa-days nearly 590,497 citizens.

The Stuttgart region is Germany’s leading high-tech region and strongest commercial met-ropolitan area. A motherland of Mercedes-Benz, the city is worldwide known for its car industry: besides Mercedes, Porsche, Audi and Volks-wagen are produced here.

Unfortunately, the high concentration of im-portant industrial plants resulted in about com-plete destruction during the World War II. That is why nowadays aspect of Stuttgart includes fea-tures of both classic architecture and modern design.

Besides traditional materials, such as stone or bronze, German designers use widely rela-tively new materials, which are not so wide-spread in Russia. For example, monuments made of glass (Figure 1) or combination of bronze and plastic, or landscape design projects and even sculptures, based on concrete and ceramics, can be found in Stuttgart.

Figure 1: The Mirror Monument.

However, the first place among the prefer-

able design materials belongs, of course, to steel.

Constructions, made of steel for the design purposes, can be tentatively divided into 3 groups:

1. Monuments; 2. Fountains;

3. Attractions or Amusements. The best example of the Stuttgart’s steel

monuments is an abstract work “Motion” (“Bewegung”, Figure 2) of an Austrian sculptor professor Wander Bertoni (born 11 October 1925 in Codisotto, Italy, in 1943 he comes as a compulsory worker in Vienna, where he starts his creative work) [1].

Figure 2: “Motion”, Wander Bertoni.

It should be noticed, that the sculptor has

created 5 different versions of this sculpture [2]. Stuttgart’s “Motion” has a number II and was created in the year 1960.

Another outstanding piece of art is “Crinkly with a red Disk” (Figure 3), a movable work of Alexander Calder, created in 1973 and mounted in 1981 on the Schlossplatz, the main square of Stuttgart [3]. This sculpture belongs to the Mu-seum of Modern Arts of Stuttgart.

Figure 3: “Crinkly with a red Disk”, A. Calder.

202



One more widespread style of German mod-ern design is represented by a raw of sculptures, located in the small city Bietigheim not far from Stuttgart. The main one, “A Tower of the Grey Horse” (“Turm der grauen Pferde”, Figure 4 a), is situated at the end of the main street of the city and surrounded with few smaller horse-like steel sculptures. It is 11 m high and was created in 1993 by Jürgen Goertz.

The second work of this sculptor, “Das Kuri-osum” or “das Kuh-riosum” (Figure 4 b) in differ-ent sources, represents an iron cow (German “Kuh”) on a steel milk can [4]. It is a fountain, which works in Bietigheim since 1987, and here we come to the second big group of the steel constructions.

a) b)

Figure 4: Works of Jürgen Goertz: a) “A Tower of the Grey Horse”; b) “Das Kuriosum”.

Most of steel fountains of Stuttgart can be

found in the region called Wartberg with its Egel-see (“Leeches Lake”, Figure 5). Originally, it em-braces a row of small lakes, often called “Cancer Tail” because of its form. Spouting geometric figures animate these 5000 square meters of water surface [5].

Figure 5: Egelsee. Egelsee belongs to the “Green U” («U» be-

cause of the similar form), a system of parks in Stuttgart. Created in 1993 specially for the Inter-national Garden Exhibition "IGA Stuttgart Expo 93", it became the last link in the 5.6 square kilometers of public parks of the city. Natural landscape elements combined with top-quality landscaping and design techniques make this park a joy to walk through year around [6]. This

non-stop landscape-water show was designed and realized by Prof. Hans Luz and Hans Dieter Bohnet. The former is well known for his light-weight steel constructions in civil engineering, the latter – for his amazing architectural experi-ments with simple geometric objects, for exam-ple, a series of Spherical Objects (“Kugelob-jekt”), made of polyurethane or steels. These experiments have found their implementation in the Egelsee project as well.

The last group of the steel objects, attrac-tions or amusements, includes mostly movable constructions, designed not only for the city`s beauty, but also for childrens entertainment. They can be found in the city center (Koenig-strasse, Figure 6), as well as in the Green U and the other parts of the city. These objects are in-teresting, because despite artistic value, they have direct practical use. Normally such con-structions cannot be used in Russia because of the low temperatures most part of the year, that make the apply of metal attractions at least un-comfortable or even dangerous, that is why we will not observe them in details in this article.

Figure 6: Children amusements on Koenig-strasse.

After this brief description, an attentive

reader could ask, why steels are so widely adopted by German designers and architects. The secret is in outstanding properties of steels. First of all, different admixtures and ways of treatment cause broad spectrum of material properties. Steels can be very hard, durable and ductile material, resistant to different external effects, such as vibration, corrosion or aging. Steels can be easily covered by different coating by means of paint-and-lacquer materials as well as thin-film metallic evaporation. Steels are chemically active, that is why etching of the steels is also possible. In all these cases, differ-

203

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 ent high-class visual properties of a piece of arts are achieved and durability is even increasing. Steels have also very good castability and weld-ing characteristics. Moreover, due to of high strength, lightweight steel constructions can be designed.

Unfortunately, the main disadvantage of steels, which restricts its use in Russia, is high costs. German designers solve this problem by use of sawn and chopped beams and boards, which they get from house construction sites or scrap metal collectors.

Dislike Russian designers with their tradi-tionally bronze monuments, German ones went farther in implementation material science in de-sign and architecture. New materials and their combinations are more and more involved in such a projects, allowing changing traditional view on design and realizing the boldest ideas. This makes German pieces of arts more diversi-fied and stimulates artist’s imagination. Though many of their projects failed or seem to be un-successful and useless from the Russian public point of view, there are no doubt that the positive experience has been stocked up and should be taken into account by Russian design-ers.Another point which must be outlined, is that German monuments and constructions often have direct practical application (for example,

ventilation of metro tunnels (Figure 7), fountains or attractions for children), while the works of Russian designers have only artistic value.

Figure 7: Monuments involved in the metro tun-nels ventilation system.

References: 1. http://geschichte.landesmuseum.net 2. http://wanderbertoni.com 3. http://www.gymnasium-gerlingen.de 4. http://www.bietigheim-bissingen.de 5. http://www.vvs.de/freizeitportal/index.ph

p 6. http://stuttgart.de/

204

http://geschichte.landesmuseum.net/

http://wanderbertoni.com/

http://www.gymnasium-gerlingen.de/

http://www.bietigheim-bissingen.de/

http://www.vvs.de/freizeitportal/index.php

http://www.vvs.de/freizeitportal/index.php

http://stuttgart.de/

Section XII

NANOMATERIALS, NANOTECHNOLOGIES AND NEW ENERGETICS

205

Section XII: Nanomaterials, nanotechnologies and new energetics

INFLUENCE OF NANOPOWDERS DISPERSION ON METAL RELEASE RATE IN PHYSIOLOGICAL SOLUTION AND DISTILLED WATER

Gorbatenko D.V., Godymchuk A.Y.

Scientific supervisor: Saveliev G.G.

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050 Tomsk, ave. Lenina 30


Considerable improvement of materials and

products characteristics, as well as significant growth of quality and productivity of technologi-cal processes can be reached by use of metal containing nanopowders. Since 1984 in Tomsk Polytechnic University (TPU) scientists have been dealing with research and application of metal and metal-containing ultradispersed (nano-) powders. It is obvious that deep nanoparticles research, wide nanopowders ap-plication, and manufacturing materials using nanopowders in the long term will definitely lead to close contact of working staff, people and the environment with nanoparticles, nanoobjects and nanomaterials. Therefore, we believe, study-ing the questions of potential risks appearing here is a vitally important task of research prob-lem.

The Division of Nanomaterials and Nanotechnologies at TPU has organized the experimental works devoted to the study of process of nanopowders dissolution in synthetic biological media. The goal of these works is to study the influence of different factors (like dis-persion and structure of nanopowders, composi-tion of the biological media, temperature of the environment etc.) on kinetic parameters for nanopowders dissolution. The main results of the experiments are considered to be the data to which can give the arguments of danger or safety of nanopowders application. These tasks

correspond to a priority direction “The Industry of Nanosystem and Nanomaterials” of National Program “Development of Nanoindustry in Rus-sian Federation in 2008 – 2010”, 3.1. “Devel-opment of methods allowing to estimate safety/unsafety nanomaterials application”.

Work under the project includes a complex of physical, chemical and toxicological meas-urements, focusing on study of the metal nanopowders activity in synthetic biological solu-tions and the definition of their toxicity at interac-tion with biological solutions.

The purpose of the work was the definition of dependence between metal release rate and nanopowders dispersion of copper powders in physiological solution and distilled water. In work the metal powders of copper received by means of electrical explosion of copper wires (tab. 1) were investigated.

To characterize powders particles it was used the surface characterization techniques: the electron microscopy, BET analysis, X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Average surface diameter (d) of particles was counted using the formula:

Sd

⋅=ρ

6

(1), where d – average surface diameter, m; ρ – material density, kg/m3; S – specific surface area, m2/kg.

Table 1. – Characteristics of copper nanopowders

Characteristics of investigated copper nanopowders Sample label Average surface size of

particles, d, nm Value of the specific surfa-

carea, Sm, m2/g Cu content, %, wt.

Cu-50 55.8 12 85÷90 Cu-100 98.5 6.8 85÷90 Cu-150 133. 5.0 73÷77 Cu-200 209 3.2 73÷80

For studying the activity of the nanopowders

in the physiological media the following solutions have been chosen:

1) PS - a physiological solution (the con-centration of NaCl was 9 g/l, рН=7.2-7.4),

2) PBS - a phosphate buffering saline (NaCl - 8.77 g/l; Na2HPO4 - 1.28 g/l; KH2PO4 - 1.36 g/l, рН=7.2-7.4),

3) and DW - distilled water, рН=7.8. The basic experimental approach which al-

lows studying activity of nanoparticles «in-vitro»

207


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 [1] has been developed in 2007 in TPU on the base of join project (2006) of TPU and research group from the University of Technology of Stockholm (KTH) in 2006 [2].

Metal release rate (R) was counted using the formula:

tmVCR⋅⋅

= (2),

Specific metal release rate (RS):

tSmVCRs ⋅⋅⋅

= (3),

where C – concentration of Cu+ and Cu2+ in a solution after powder exposure mg/l;

V – volume of solution , l; m – mass of the sample , g; t – time of exposure, sek; S – specific surface area of the sample,

m2/g. Figure 1 shows the change of the calculated

metal release rate of copper nanopowders after their exposure in physiological solution.

Fig.1. Change of specific metal release rate of copper powders in PS.

Fig.2. Change of metal release rate of coppers in PS.

According to the data, the correlation be-

tween metal release rate of powders and expo-sure time has character (fig. 1) which is made agreed with earlier received results on the cop-per and copper-nickel powders produced by

means of wire electrical explosion [3]. Thus, for the maximum point for of all powders was 5-minute exposure. The similar picture was ob-served at exposure to DW and PBS.

208


If to compare behavior of the nanopowders in various physiological media, it is have to no-tice that in the line “DW – PS – PBS”, in other words, with complication of composition of solu-tion there is an increase of metal release rate. Furthermore, if to calculate the specific metal release rate of the samples there is an obvious conclusion: with increase of specific surface area specific metal release rate (fig. 2) decreases. The same results for PBS and DW were re-ceived. So, in the line “Cu-50, Cu-100, Cu-150, Cu-200” dissolution activity decreases.

Also in work the data on change of conver-sion degree for the sample in time in all three solutions were obtained. It was determined that the maximum conversion degree reached at dis-solution of samples within 1,5 hours, is for the sample with largest particles Cu-200 (33% wt.). If to compare the conversion degree of the sam-ples in different solutions used for experiment, the minimum degree was reached in DW.

Reference: [1]. Godymchuk A.Y. Method to study the of

metal nanoparticles in the synthetic biological media // Proceedings of the Conference «Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials for Biology and Medicine». October, 11-12, 2007, Novosi-birsk, Russia. 2007. - Part.1. P.55-57.

[2]. K.Midander, J.Pan, C.Leygraf. Elabora-tion of a test method for the study of metal re-lease from stainless steel particles in artificial biological media // Corrosion Science. – 2006. - No 48. P.2855 –2866.

[3]. Godymchuk A.Y., Ladova А.А. Dissolu-tion of copper powders in physiological solutions and the distilled water //Prospects of develop-ment of fundamental sciences: Works of V inter-national conference of students and young sci-entists - Tomsk, on May, 20-23th 2008. - Tomsk: ТPU, 2008. - P.131-132.

FILTERING NANOMATERIAL FOR POTABLE WATER TREATMENT AND DEVICES ON ITS BASIS Tugutov A.Z., Storozhuk E.S.

Supervizer Uvarova S.Yu.


Lenin st.30, Tomsk, Russia


Over 80 academic, industrial and educa-tional institutes are engaged in working on this subject in Russia only. Works on nanotechnolo-gies are being done within several complex pro-grams implemented by the Russian Academy of Sciences.

Since 2000 the National Nanotechnology Ini-tiative (NNI)program has been in effect in the USA, whose chief executioners have been set to be organizations of the Defense Ministry and arms laboratories’ of the Energy Ministry (which are in charge of the US military industrial com-plex). NNI singles out five leading directions in developing nanotechnologies. These are long-term fundamental research works letting under-stand the nature of nanostructured substances and develop on this basis technologies of the measuring, modeling, imitating and processing of materials on a nanoscale’. This is a syntheses and creation of nano- and nanodimensional

components for («by design») designing nanos-tructured building blocks and systems with the use of the self-organization concept that will make it possible to create new categories and bio-inspired systems, introduce significant changes in principles of constructing different instruments and provide an opportunity to control conduct of atoms, molecules and clusters in nanostructured systems. These are different ap-plications of nanostructured materials and sys-tems in the sphere of industrial production, en-ergy power-plant, national security and health service. Finally, this is the way to educate a new generation of a highly qualified workers and specialists for ensuring a further quick progress in the development of nanotechnologies.

New filtering material Aquavallis - is a new generation of filtering materials and filters on the basis of polymer microfibers intended for water

209


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 and gases cleaning from microbiological con-taminations and impurities of heavy metals.

The operation of the developed filter is based on a combination of adsorption and filtra-tion. The majority of current filters remove con-taminants owing to the fact that the filter pore size is smaller than the removed particle size.

AquaVallis filtration material is the polymer

microfiber matrix with porous nanoparticles con-sisting of nanofibers. In water an electrokinetic potential is generated on their surface. Owing to this effect AquaVallis filtration material allows removing both pathogens and suspended solid particles from water with a high rate and effi-ciency of 99.999999 - 100 %.

Key advantages of the AquaVallis filtering material:

• Complete removal of microbiological im-purities (viruses and bacteria) at 99,99999-100% rate.

• Simple and inexpensive filter capable of removing all pathogen microorganisms but hav-ing high-speed throughput.

• Filter capable to set up as a regular home water filter.

• Adsorption of viruses and endotoxins with a size much smaller then filter's mean pore size.

• Removal of a wide variety of impurities at broad pH and ion conditions.

• High throughput compare to regular membranes.

Advantages of Aquavallis material: • Absence of secondary products of oxida-

tion (toxins and carcinogens) produced by chemical water treatment.

• High efficiency (higher then at reverse osmosis and ultraviolet treatment).

• Filtration of virus unimpaired by ozoniza-tion, chlorination, ultraviolet treatments.

• Complete water cleaning without shield-ing of pathogens by colloid particles.

* After filtering ~ 2,0*1012 particles/sm2 pores plug up.

AquaVallis filtration material can be used for water purification from pathogen contamination, for microbiological water analysis, in beverage industry, for sanitary control of interior surfaces of rooms and equipment surfaces, in industrial microfiltration, in water purification systems (pro-viding laboratory, analytical, reagent water pu-rity), etc.

Replacement filter elements AquaVallis for removal of microbiological contamination from water

Filter elements AquaVallis are intended for

use as elements of cartridges for water purifica-tion in drinking water treatment plants.

Filter elements AquaVallis are made with the

application of a unique filtration material based on nanofibers which provides 99.999999 - 100 % efficiency of water purification from microbi-ological contamination.

The cartridges are used in water treatment

equipment and plants at home and in industry coupled with a standard pre-filtration device for removal of mechanical admixtures, sand, etc.

Characteristics of filter elements AquaVallis

Type of AquaVallis filter element Property

5” 10” 20” 40” Microbiologi-

cal filtration effi-

ciency, %

99.999999 -100

Throughput capacity,

m3/h 0.8 1.6 3.2 6.4

Service life**, m3 250 500 1000 2000

Diameter, mm 65 Height, mm 125 250 500 1000 Water pH 6.5-8.5 Cartridge pressure drop, atm

0.2”

*at inlet pressure 1.2 atmg ** at microorganism concentration in un-

treated water 105/ml and mineralization 500 mg/l

210


Advantages of Aquavallis material

Filtering material

Filtration speed

at 0.6 atm pressure drop,sm/s

MS-2 bacteriophage

sorption efficiency, %

Sorption capacity

particles/sm2

Carbon filters 0,6 99,999 No data

Volume filter w/modified

charge on the basis

of fossil meal (thickness 1,2mm)

1 99.0 0.7*1012

Membrane filter

w/ 25nm pore size

0,003 100* 2,0*1012

Nanofiber-based

Aquavallis filtering material

(thickness 1,2mm)

1 99,999999 - 100 4,6*1012

AquaVallis SF250 was especially designed for use in:

• children’s sanitary camps, • kindergartens, • schools and hostels, • military bases. AquaVallis SF250 provides two-stage water

treatment.: Stage I - is regenerated and aimed at remov-

ing iron compounds, organic and mechanical impurities

Stage II – purification from microbiological contamination with the use of filtration material AquaVallis

The conclusion. While the product is in development state

and far from industry-wide production, it has shows a good market potential in Russia and abroad. The material already has Russia certifi-cation and international patents are pending, besides it has won many awards on Russian and international exhibitions.

Principle of operation • Microbiological contaminants are re-

moved due to outside/inside water filtration through a layer of the filtration material

• Contaminants stay both on the surface and in the bulk of the material

• The filter element is resistant to disinfec-tant solutions and organic solvents; it withstands chemical and temperature sterilization

Setup for water cleaning AquaVallis SF250 has a distribution water point for several tabs. Does not require power supply.

The setup allows to clean water directly from the source of central water supply or any natural uncleaned water source and also capable to dis-tribute water to several users.

211

http://aquavallis.com/IMAGES/Products_SF250.jpg

Section XIII

ROUND TABLE «TECHNIC PHILOSOPHY»

213

Section XIII: Round table «Technic philosophy»

UNIVERSE DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS BASED ON MECHANICAL PRESUPPUSITIONS

Epikhin A. V., Karneev К. V.

Scientific advisors: Sokolov A.P., associate professor,

Vasilchenko T. V., associate professor

Tomsk Polytechnic University, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenina St.


A well-known red shift is an observable shift of spectral lines towards long waves from a dis-tant cosmic source in the expanding Universe in comparison with the wave length of the same lines measured from a steady source. The red shift is explained by Doppler effect. If you know its value, it is possible to define the velocity of non-terrestrial object recession, as well as, the distance up to the galaxy due to Hubble law. It is usually explained by the fact that the Universe, i.e. space itself, is expanding. In other words, the light emitted by stars has expended together with the space it was going through. Thus, the red shift also is a measure of time from the be-ginning of the Universe expansion up to the light emission into the galaxy. The red shift is the actual evidence of Big Bang theory. However, a lot of discrepancies have been revealed in this hypothesis. [6]

A sensational statement was made by American astronomers some time ago. They have discovered a quasar which is 24 billion light years from the Earth. According to the theory, the Universe age is about 13,9 billion years. So, the question arises. How is it possible for a qua-sar to cover such a distance? In this case, it would move two times quicker than the light, that, it its turn, contradicts the relativity theory. [2]

The next question is even more interesting, because it reveals the contradictions between relativity theory and Big Bang hypothesis. Based on Big Bang theory, the scientists have proved that “to achieve the observable size of the Uni-verse for 10-35 seconds, the expansion velocity must be higher than the light velocity in 3 3 1052⋅, times”. However, according to relativity theory, “when object velocity is approximating to the light velocity, its mass increases to the infi-nite. Assuming such a velocity of material bunch expansion, the following deduction can be made: the explosion destroyed infinite-mass point into the non-limit amount of infinite heavy masses. It sounds strange! Trying not to distort the theory of relativity, the only conclusion is possible – the

energy from the great explosion was spent to break a material object into quarks and scatter them within the Universe.

Besides, trying to explain the Universe ori-gin, the followers of the Big Bang theory face with a serious problem – lack of mathematical apparatus. The Universe origin state, as de-scribed by Big Bang theory followers, could hardly receive any mathematical formulation. In fact, mathematics is a system of conventional notations based on logical reasoning. Does it mean that the lack of mathematical apparatus is just the lack of reasoning and knowledge?

The Nobel Prize winner, S. Weinberg, noted: “Unfortunately, I can’t begin the film (a documen-tary about Big Bang) with a zero reference point when there was no time and the temperature was infinitely high”. Thus, the Big Bang theory does not describe the Universe origin as the ini-tial singularity, as it is termed, can not be de-scribed. It is obvious that the pulsing Universe is cyclical one where every cycle finishes in col-lapse; hence it lives from singularity to singular-ity. [4]

According to the Big Bang theory, an enor-mous explosion was the beginning of the subse-quent motion and development. However, there is no any evidence in classical mechanics to prove that an explosion can create something. It is always destructive. More over, it is very impor-tant to explain the source of immense energy of the explosion! Matter-cycle model has raised this issue, as well as, the following questions: Why is a matter cycle constant? What is the energy source for it? If perpetual motion is a matter characteristic, the Universe existence is impos-sible without inexhaustible energy source and without bottomless fridge (as heat engine cycle in thermodynamics)! There is hypothesis that it happens due to neutrino and antineutrino forma-tion. The combination of matter and energy for-mation processes is necessary to complete mat-ter cycle in Nature. If this hypothesis is proved, there will be the answers to the main questions about Universe origin and its construction.

215



The alternative theory is so-called pulsing Universe model. What is it? The radius of the Universe curvature “increases up to zero, reaches the ultimate value and decreases up to zero again».

It is difficult to define what theory is abso-lutely correct. Both of them can exist. Therefore, we would like to propose some of our assump-tions concerning the Universe origin and would be grateful for their detailed consideration.

The first assumption is derivative from two hypotheses: Big Bang and pulsing Universe theories. Probably, they should be united in some way. First of all, how can explosion take place without any detonating mechanism or drive reaction? It is impossible! Let us consider the first stage of the Universe origin not as a mate-rial point characterized by infinite mass and den-sity but as “quark soup” [1]. What happened fur-ther? It is necessary to consider the composition of the things which surround us, as well as, me-chanics laws (in fact, scientist so often apply mechanics laws to find the answers to many dif-ficult questions, arising, for example, in quantum physics). Let assume that the processes of quark approach and their further adhesion (there are the examples in chemistry when due to ad-hesion, the substance weighed in liquid or gas forms homogeneous substance) begun. The Universe shrank up to the point size without changing in mass. According to the Big Bang theory, after this there was such a great explo-sion so that the matter was scattered. The en-ergy of the matter clots was so strong that they are still scattering. Here is the room for main mysteries: what is the detonating mechanism of this point? How could the matter be broken into bunches by this explosion? As the Big Bang theory which is intensively criticized now has not been proved yet, there is no answer to these questions.

One more assumption should be mentioned. Let us assume that the Universe has a center around which a lot of galaxies rotate. It resem-bles atom model where electrons swirl around the nucleus. It is difficult to ignore this hypothesis because everything has the same composition in nature. For example, a small electron swirls around big hydrogen nucleus, the Moon swirls around relatively big Earth, and planets swirl around the Sun…Why could not galaxies swirl around something massive capable of gravitat-ing them? But, what could it be? Could it be a planet, a star, a galaxy? The question is disput-able; however, it is possible to make an assump-tion. Probable, it is a huge black hole which suits all the parameters of atom nucleus, i.e. it has enormous mass even with relatively small size (according to astronomic quantities). If there is an opportunity, it is possible to explain so-called

“Universe recession”, i.e. just a rotation of galax-ies and big stars along the orbits in relation to the Universe center. It is obvious that the orbit length is measured in millions and billions of light years.

If consider above-mentioned theory from the point of pulsing Universe, it is possible to make striking assumptions. Let assume that the Uni-verse does not only shrink and expand in rela-tion to some center, but also it rotates around it. However, it is time to a well-known law of Na-ture: “Nothing is eternal”. It means that oscilla-tion process also is not eternal, i.e. any wave or oscillation, as well as, amplitude tends to damp down, while the galaxies are still rotating. In this case, pulsing universe theory proves our as-sumptions about atomic composition of the Uni-verse. There is another question – what is the origin of these pulsing oscillations?

Based on a well-known fact that infinite masses distort the space, it is possible to make the following assumption: if there is a huge black hole in the center of the Universe, its formation could excite the oscillations. The black hole, in its turn, could be formed as the result of another Universe death being absorbed by the black hole itself.

In conclusion it is necessary to come back to the main issue of this article, i.e. red shift origin. As stated above, quantum reddening and red shift are explained be space expansion as the result of Big Bang. Today this hypothesis is criti-cized. The main doubts are cast upon impossibil-ity to describe this process from the point of mathematics. When this hypothesis was ac-cepted, the scientists hardly admitted that they had created the abstraction than a well-grounded theory. It is a well-known fact that a wave passing through any medium is character-ized by losing its energy, amplitude and fre-quency. We have analyzed the alternative hy-pothesis put forward by I.D. Novikov [5] and we could say that this theory is well-grounded and it could be considered at the same level as other famous theories.

The concept concerning the Universe is con-stantly getting complicated. Present science is pretending to base its assumptions on abstrac-tions, unconceivable approximations… Young generation is brought up on stated but not proved concepts! It seams that we go away from the cradle in wrong direction while sometimes it is essential to turn back. Mechanics which we are trying to ignore is a base which our ances-tors began to explore the world with. The pur-pose of this article is to explain some uncon-firmed facts from the point of mechanics. Per-haps, it will help to reveal new approaches and ideas, as it is said: “The present is what was in the past”.

216

Section XIII: Round table «Technic philosophy»

1. http://www.astrolab.ru/cgibin/ man-ager2.cgi?id=32&num=108

2. http://nauka.relis.ru/16/0009/16009096.htm

3. Steven Weinberg, The First Three Minutes (New York: Bantam, 1977), p.94

4. http://astronet.sai.msu.ru/db/msg/1210276#370

5. Novikov I.D. Evolutsia Vselennoy. - М.: Nauka. 1990. - 192 p.

Fig. 1 “Quark soup”; 2. Universe shrink into one point according to BV; 3. BV theory paradox; 4. regular explosion result

Fig.2 Universe from the point of atomic theory: 1, 2. Pulsing atomic Universe; 3. Atomic Universe after oscillation dampin

MECHANICS-BASED ANALISIS OF LIGHT BEAM MOTION IN SUBSTANCE Karneev K.V., Epikhin A.V.

The supervisors of studies: Sokolov A.P. c.t.s., the senior lecturer,

Vasilchenko T. V., c.h.s., the teacher

Tomsk polytechnic university, 634050, Russia, Tomsk, 30 Lenina St.


The first light nature concepts were put for-ward by ancient Greeks and Egyptians. As opti-cal devices were developed these concepts transformed. In the end of XVII century two con-cepts of the light nature appeared: corpuscular (I. Newton) and wave (R. Hooke and H. Huy-gens). According to corpuscular theory, light is a particle flux emitted by the luminous bodies. Newton believed that the motion of light corpus-cles was subject to the laws of mechanics. [1]

According to the wave theory, light is a wave process which is similar to mechanical waves. This theory was based on Huygens principle (due to this principle reflection and refraction laws were explained). However, Newton found some proofs against this theory. The main his argument was the straightforwardness of light propagation (according to Fermat principle). [1]

Light electromagnetic theory explained many optical phenomena, such as interference, diffrac-tion, polarization and etc. However, in the turn of the XX century it was found out that this theory could not explain the phenomena of corpuscular origin, those phenomena which occurred as the result of light and substance interaction. To study such phenomena as blackbody radiation, photoeffect, Compton effect and etc., quantum concepts were introduced. Thus, science has returned to the idea of corpuscles – light quanta. According to contemporary stage of knowledge, light nature is termed as “corpuscular-wave dual-ism”. [1,4]

The whole Universe can be divided into three parts (fig.1.): microcosm (the world of spe-cial laws (for instance, uncertainty principle)), macrocosm (observable and easily controlled

217

http://nauka.relis.ru/16/0009/16009096.htm

http://astronet.sai.msu.ru/db/msg/1210276#370


XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 world), megaworld (its size is bigger than the size of Solar system. The mankind explore it creating different hypotheses).

Fig.1.

Light is the only phenomenon which charac-

teristics are not changed in all three parts of the Universe. Undoubtedly, this fact proves this Na-ture element to be a special one.

Considering the problem of light propagation, the term of ether arises. When electric charge oscillations are excited by the generator in the antenna mounted on the artificial Earth satellite, the current is excited in the receiving antenna on the Earth. If a signal sensed by the receiver can be depicted as an incident wave, than what is the wave which can propagate within the vac-uum and how can humps and troughs form where there is no anything? The question about the observable light propagating from the Sun to the observer’s eye was put quite a long period of time ago. During almost the whole XIX century physicists were trying to find the answer in the fact that space is not empty itself; it is filled with some medium (“luminiferous ether”) character-ized by the properties of a solid body. Ether theory can also explain such experimental facts as light beam deviation in space heavy object gravitation field and red shift, as well as, unravel the mystery of the «roaring forties» on the Earth and etc. [4]

It was proved that ether is an integral part of the Universe (according to Michelson experi-ments).

Actually, ether is a substance with marvelous properties. It is capable of forming planet ether atmosphere including the Earth. Ether wind was revealed during Michelson experiments (this term was introduced by J. Bradley in 1728). The properties of ether wind helical motion can de-fine the rotation of planets and majority of satel-lites towards one direction, as well as, correla-tion of planet angular velocities with their masses. («The roaring forties» - the name of the ocean space in latitude 40 South, where there are strong western winds often cause storms.

The motion of these air masses can be easily explained by ether wind).[2]

Fig. 2. Ether blow-off of the Earth.

However, instead of investigation of the ex-

periment results, relativists denied them commit-ting so-called scientific forgery. That’s why the term “ether” was deleted from physics a century ago as it didn’t correspond to the reality. How-ever, physicists had to introduce such term as physical vacuum. It was a step towards ether existence.

Today Michelson experimental data is ele-gantly explained by ether gravitation to the heavy objects ( electrostatic phenomenon). That’s why, due to ether deformation the light velocity decreases near massive objects. [3]

How does light interact with the substance? When the light passes through transparent mate-rial, it propagates more slowly than in vacuum. Interacting with medium atoms, the light beams slow down and can’t move as quickly as in vac-uum. In glass or in water, the light propagates at speed which is 60-70% from light velocity in vacuum. Nothing prevents fast particle (proton or electron) of moving faster than the light in such medium. More over, these electrons have to os-cillate in light wave alternating field, so they emit the waves at the same frequency; however, they are phase-shifted in relation to exciting wave (this fact is the calculation result based on me-chanics). These waves combining with initial one produce such interesting effects as light refrac-tion, light beam self-focus, light absorption by the substance, and signal wave which propagates in the substance at the same velocity as the light propagates in vacuum during a short period of time.

There are a lot of examples in science his-tory when scientists considered some facts to be the truth but then proved them to be a mistake. So, Tomson suggested a model where atom electrons are “inserted into elastic positive jelly”. Despite the naivety of this model, it could explain

218

Section XIII: Round table «Technic philosophy» some internal atom processes. His atom is an example of erroneous model (from the point of contemporary stage of knowledge) which can lead to the right mathematical formulation of a great number of different phenomena. So, if ether exists in reality, photon and electromag-netic wave are mathematical abstractions which have nothing to do with the reality. Today, when a theory sometimes can hardly help to solve the problems in reality, it is important to find a way out. Perhaps, it is essential to come back to the point when physics preferred abstractions and postulation to dynamics laws. It is important to return to the ether question and to the experi-ments which have been already carried out; it is important to develop new hypotheses.

In this connection, it is possible to put for-ward another hypothesis about light propagation in substance. Couldn’t the light beam be gravi-tated by atoms and electrons while it passes between them? In fact, the beam will propagate more slowly than in vacuum. Beam lag will take place. Making some calculations, it is possible to reveal that with stated mass and order, electron, proton, neutron and almost all elementary parti-cles can be termed as black hole! It is not obliga-tory to the black hole to be big…And it is a well-known fact that a black hole has a property to gravitate everything which is close to it. Let us out the following question: why are there so few substances on the Earth which can let pass the light through? Glass, water, and some others… The list is not long. More over, light-conductor capacity of these substances is not absolute one! If you look at the object through several layers of glass or water, clearance decreases. Could it be caused by gravitation of the light beam to the small black holes which are in the substance? Substance opacity can be explained by the fact that black holes lining in a certain way in the crystal lattice of the solid bodies or sub-

stance atom in its liquid phase could absorb the beam completely.

Fig. 3 Light passing between atoms – “black holes”.

In conclusion, it is important to mention that

the development of mathematical apparatus in physical research always began with macro-cosm. This mathematical basis could be tested by any macrocosm phenomenon, for example, by any element of mechanical motion. It was checked completely. Mathematical apparatus applied for photon motion description can be checked. Science can study only photon forma-tion and its disappearance. It can’t explain how the particle moves and develops in time. How-ever, not all possibilities are exhausted in this mathematical apparatus. It is essential to apply mechanical approach to the microcosm and megaworld problem solution as more often as possible.

1. http://cat.tmn.fio.ru/works/46x/306/10/s10_1.html 2. http://www.sciteclibrary.ru/rus/catalog/pages/8162. 3. http://www/scorsher.ru/art/theory/rykov.html 4. http://elementy.ru/trefil/45

219

http://www.sciteclibrary.ru/rus/catalog/pages/8162.html


Table of Contents

Section I: Power engineering THE ANALYSIS OF THE UNIT FROM THE TUTORIAL BY G.N. KLIMOVA «ENERGY CONSERVATION IN LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS» (TOMSK, 2008) Bogdanovskaya S. A., Nikitin V. D., Myl’nikova T.S..……………………………………………….............7 RECONFIGURATION OF DISTRIBUTION NETWORK BY GENETIC ALGORITHM Paar M., Spaček J.. ………………………………………….......................................................................9 FLICKERMETER IMPLEMENTATION IN LABVIEW J. Slezingr, J. Drapela, Member, IEEE and J. Tezky……………………………………………………….11 ANALYSIS OF PENALIZATION COSTS IN DISTRIBUTION NETWORK J. Slezingr, J. Drapela, Member, IEEE and J. Tezky……………………………………………………….13 EVALUATION OF THE RELIABILITY OF THE 22 KV OVERHEAD DISTRIBUTION NETWORK AT THE URBAN AREA IN THE CZECH REPUBLIC Paar M., Špaček J……..........................................................................................................................16 THE GROUND FAULT INDICATORS FOR FAULT LOCATION ACCORDING TO THE ANALYSIS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS OF MV LINES

David Topolánek, Jaroslav Bok, Petr Toman………………………………………………………………..18

ANALYSIS OF SUITABLE USING OF LIGHT SOURCES AT CONCRETE SUPPLY NETWORK WITH REGARD TO RECORDED VOLTAGE EVENTS

David Topolánek, Jaromír Bok, Jiří Drápela…………………………………………………………………20

HARD ROCK EXCAVATION BY ELECTRIC PULSE Lazarev S.V., Perkov V.V……………………………………………………………………………………...23


TESTING DRILLING PIPES DURING EXPLOITATION PROCESS Dao Xuan Thao , Sazanakova T.N……………………………………………………………………………29 METHODS AND DEVICES FOR THE RESEARCH OF THE PHOTOELECTRIC CONVERTER IN THE LABORATORY Dao Xuan Thao………………………………………………………………………………………………….31 “CAR GUARD” Dmitrova Mary…………………………………………………………………………………………………..33 THE INFLUENCE OF THE FINANCIAL CRISIS ON THE GEOPHYSICAL WORKS Kalashnikova E., Zharnikov V. ………………………………………………………………………………..34 FIBER OPTIC MONITORING SYSTEMS Polinovskiy_S. ………………………………………………………………………………………………….38 CUFF-LESS WAY TO MEASURE BLOOD PRESSURE Starikov S.S. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………40 TECHNICAL DIAGNOSTICS OF MANUFACTURE OF THE SOLAR BATTARY Takhanova V. …………………………………………………………………………………………………...41

221

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 CONSENSUS RELATION FOR DATA FUSION IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK Khomyakova M.S., Tarakanov E.V., Baranov P.F…………………………………………………………..44 CLASSIFICATION OF METHOD OF MEASUREMENT OF THE COMMERCIAL ACCOUNT OF GAS AS CONVERTERS OF THE CHARGE Chebykina T. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………46 AUTOMATION OF MEASURMENTS COMPUTER MASS SPECTROMETRY A.G. Chugunov, M.A. Shalutov, L.N. Orlikov, M.S. Voronin……………………………………………….48


SINGULARITY ZONES OF THE NONORTHOGONAL CNC MACHINE Zelensky А., Suominen O., Ritala R. ………………………………………………………………………...53 GENERAL INFORMATION ON PULSE WELDING M.A. Krampit…………………………………………………………………………………………………….55 FORECASTING PRODUCTIVITY OF PROCESS LAYERED LASER SINTERING ON THE BASIS OF FORM AND ORIENTATION FACTOR Saprykin A. А, Walter A.V., Saprykina N.A. ………………………………………………………………………57


THE INFLUENCE OF CABLE ARMOR ON THERMAL AGIN OF PLASTICIZED PVC Anisimova O.A., Annenkov Yu.M. ……………………………………………………………………………63 SENSOR LESS FIELD ORIENTED CONTROL OF PMSM Saeidi Saeid……………………………………………………………………………………………………..65 DEVELOPMENT OF ELECTRIC DRIVE FOR LABORATORY TESTBENCH A.S. Tililyaev, A.A. Prelovskiy, K.V. Obraztsov……………………………………………………………...67 COST EFFICIENCY OF THE IMPROVED INDUCTION MOTORS AT THE CHANGE OF MOTOR SPEED Tyuteva P.V. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………69

Section V: The use of modern technical and information means in health services

NONINVASIVE METHODS OF BLOOD GLUCOSE LEVEL ANALYSIS Asadulina V.H., Nam I.F., Komarova L. D. ……………………………………………………………………….75 THE DEVICE FOR PHOTOMETRIC RESEARCH OF THE BIOLIQUID DROP SAMPLE Rafalskiy A.. S., Bushuev A. V. …………………………………………………………………………………...77


STUDY ON HARDNESS AND WEAR RESISTANCE OF HDPE-G-SILANE AND UHMW-PE MIXTURE Sompong Piriyayon, S.V. Panin, L.R. Ivanova, L.A. Kornienko……………………………………………83

222


SURFACE MODIFICATION OF ULTRA HIGH MOLECULAR WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE BY ALBX ION IMPLANTATION T. Poowadin, S.V. Panin, V.P. Sergeev, L.R. Ivanova, L.A. Kornienko………………………………….85 INFLUENCE OF MECHANICAL ACTIVATION TIME ONTO WEAR RESISTANCE OF CARBON NANOFIBER FILLED UHMWPE S. Wannasria, S.V. Panin, L.R. Ivanova, L.A. Kornienko, A.G. Tkachev…………………………………87 СATHODELUMINESCENCE OF THE BRAZILIAN TOPAZ Gabaydulina E.T. ………………………………………………………………………………………………89 RESEARCH OF STRENGTH, WEAR - RESISTANCE AND HARDNESS OF COMPOSITES ON A BASIS OF UHMW - PE Mulenkov A.N., Vasendina E.A. ………………………………………………………………………………92 SPECTROSCOPIC PROPERTIES OF DY3+ DOPED PHOSPHATE GLASS V.M. Lisitsyn, E.F. Polisadova, H. A. Othman……………………………………………………………….94 THERMO-RHYSICAL CONDITIONS OF FORMING GAS-THERMAL COATING ADHESION Chabanets A.A. ………………………………………………………………………………………………...96


BUSINESS PROCESS DESCRIPTION USING BPMN AND BPEL4PEOPLE Nguyen Hoang Trinh………………………………………………………………………………………….101 MODELING OF MIXING PRODUCTS AUTOMATED DISPENSING Gatilov D., Sap’yan A. ………………………………………………………………………………………..104 CREATION OF AN AUTOMATED STUDENT SURVEY SYSTEM Zinovyeva N.E. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..106 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING SYSTEMS Kostenyuk N.A., Rusyaeva D.A. …………………………………………………………………………….108 SOFT AND METHODICAL COMPLEX FOR DEVELOPMENT ACS SOFTWARE Krasovskaya E.K., Musrepov E.A. ………………………………………………………………………….111 AN ANALYSIS OF PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY OF A VIDEO HEAD TRACKING SYSTEM O. Krivtsov, A. Korikov………………………………………………………………………………………..113 PAPERLESS RECORDER LOGOSCREEN 500 CF WITH COMPACTFLASH CARD AND LIFE-CYCLE DATA MANAGEMENT Кругликова Е.Е. ………………………………………………………………………………………………115 POLYMER OPTICAL FIBER LINK OPTIMIZATION ON THE BASIS OF SIMULINK® SOFTWARE R. Kruglov, S. Loquai, B. Schmauss………………………………………………………………………..117 ONLINE VIDEO EDITOR “AXIMEDIA MOVIE STUDIO” Kuzemchik V.D. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….120 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM OF SAMOTLOR OIL FIELDS TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES Laktuishin A., Musenko E. …………………………………………………………………………………...122 USE OF SCADA SYSTEMS FOR DEVELOPMENT OF COMPUTER-AIDED MANUFACTURING IN THE STUDENTS' PRACTICE O.S. Lugacheva…………………………………………………………………………………………………125

223

XV Modern Technique and Technologies 2009 ROBOT TECHNOLOGY AND ROBOTICS IN MEDICAL SCIENCE Mel’nikova E.A. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….127 THE AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM OF TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES OF THE CENTRAL OIL AND GAS ACQUISITION AND PREPARATION POINT Musenko E., Laktuishin A. …………………………………………………………………………………...128 INTELLIGENT WELL SYSTEM WITH HYDRAULIC ADJUSTABLE CHOKES AND PERMANENT MONITORING Naydukov I.А. …………………………………………………………………………………………………131 AUTOMATION OF PROCESS OF CONDUCTING THE BUDGET AT THE ENTERPRISE WITH THE HELP 1S «MANAGEMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ENTERPRISE» 8.0 Rajmanova E.V. ………………………………………………………………………………………………...133 AUTOMATION OF DISPERSING MIXING PRODUCTS ON THE BASIS OF CONTROLLER SIMATIC Sap’yan A, Gatilov D………………………………………………………………………………………….135 IMAGE IDENTIFICATION FROM A SATELLITE WITH FUZZY GENETIC CLASSIFIER Sergienko R.B. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..137 THE CALCULATION OF THE SCALAR DYNAMIC ROW SPACE DIMENSION WITH THE CAPACIOUS METHOD Bychina M. N., Tretiakova O. S. …………………………………………………………………………….140 ASSESSMENT OF ECONOMIC RISCS IN DEVELOPMENT OF OIL AND GAS FIELDS Charushin D.A., Khitrov P.V. ………………………………………………………………………………..142 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS Захарова И.Г., Шарапова Е.И. …………………………………………………………………………….144 THE ANALYSIS OF SECURITY FACILITIES MEMORY IN REAL-TIME OPERATING SYSTEM Shuvaeva Y. V. ……………………………………………………………………………………………….147 REPORT GENERATING SYSTEMS BASED ON MICROSOFT OFFICE EXCEL TEMPLATES Yunusova M.R…………………………………………………………………………………………………149


HYDROGEN LIKE MODEL OF F CENTER IN WIDE-GAP DIELECTRICS Bikhert Y.V., Eliseev A.Y., Mylnikova T.S. ………………………………………………………………………155 MATHEMATICAL MODEL OF MICROWAVE PULSE REFLECTOMETRY OF PLASMA IN FUSION DEVICE Kalashnikov А.А., Sharnin А,V., Mezentsev А.А. …………………………………………………………157 ELECTRON DENSITY RECONSTRUCTION METHOD IN PULSED REFLECTOMETRY OF FUSION PLASMAS Lobes L.A., Sharnin A.V., Bikmullin E.A. ………………………………………………………………………..159


INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AS A BASIS FOR SUSTAINABLE COMPANY DEVELOPMENT Zvereva N.V. …………………………………………………………………………………………………..165

224


SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF THE WORKFLOW SYSTEM Smolyaninova A.A. …………………………………………………………………………………………...167 BUSINESS-PROCESS AUDIT ORGANIZATION Shvyrkunova O.N. …………………………………………………………………………………………….169 ANALYSIS OF PROCESS EFFECTIVENESS AS SHOWN BY THE EXAMPLE OF THE DESIGN ENGINEERING FIRM Shilnikova L.V. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..172


CALCULATION GROUP OF STEPS BIG WITH TWIST BY A PRINCIPLE OF A CONSTANCY OF THE SPECIFIC CHARGE ON HEIGHT BLADES A.S. Matveev, S.A. Shevelev………………………………………………………………………………...177 HEAT TRANSFER DURING WOOD DRYING PROCESS Alexeev M.V. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………179 DEVELOPMENT OF A TWO-LEVEL SYSTEM OF NON-DESTRUCTIVE ACOUSTIC EXAMINATION OF THE HEAT POWER EQUIPMENT Klimov A.S., Medenkov A.A., Petrov V.I. …………………………………………………………………..181 RESEARCH OF PEAT IGNITION CONDITIONS WITH CHANGE OF DIFFERENT PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Kulesh R.N. , Budkova S.S. …………………………………………………………………………………183 THERMAL STRATIFICATION WITHIN THE WATER TANK Sushilova N.V. ………………………………………………………………………………………………...185 THE PRODUCTION OF A SOLID CARBON DIOXIDE THROUGH EXPANSION OF SMOKE FUMES IN THE TURBOEXPANDER Chatshina Y.A. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..188


LASER ART – LASER APPLIED IN MODERN PERFORMANCE Zhang D., Smirnova E.V. ……………………………………………………………………………………...193 IMAGING SPECTROMETER AIDED RESEARCH OF DESIGN OBJECTS V. L. Zhukov……………………………………………………………………………………………………195 MAIN FRAMEWORK OF COMPLEX ORNAMENTS APPLICATION PROCESS BY PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF THE COMPLEX HARDWARE PIECES S. V. Zhukova………………………………………………………………………………………………….196 PROBLEM OF STYLE CLASSIFICATION IN DESIGN Kozlova A.A., Kukhta M.S., Zemlyanitsyna A.P……………………………………………………………198 ANALYSIS OF DESIGN PROJECTS OF THE WORKSHOP Pishchulina D.A., Kukhta M.S., Zemlyanitsyna A.P. ……………………………………………………...200 STEELS IN GERMAN DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE Smirnova E.V. …………………………………………………………………………………………………..202

225



INFLUENCE OF NANOPOWDERS DISPERSION ON METAL RELEASE RATE IN PHYSIOLOGICAL SOLUTION AND DISTILLED WATER Gorbatenko D.V., Godymchuk A.Y. ………………………………………………………………………...207 FILTERING NANOMATERIAL FOR POTABLE WATER TREATMENT AND DEVICES ON ITS BASIS Tugutov A.Z., Storozhuk E.S. ………………………………………………………………………………209

Section XIII: Round table «Technic philosophy» UNIVERSE DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS BASED ON MECHANICAL PRESUPPUSITIONS Epikhin A. V., Karneev К. V. …………………………………………………………………………………215 MECHANICS-BASED ANALISIS OF LIGHT BEAM MOTION IN SUBSTANCE Karneev K.V., Epikhin A.V. …………………………………………………………………………………217

226

portal.tpu.ruportal.tpu.ru/tpu/files/eng-sbornik-2009.pdf · Electrical editions and popular...

Documents

Transcript of portal.tpu.ruportal.tpu.ru/tpu/files/eng-sbornik-2009.pdf · Electrical editions and popular...